Panasonic PT-REZ10LBU Projector User Manual

Add to my manuals
313 Pages

advertisement

Panasonic PT-REZ10LBU Projector User Manual | Manualzz

Operating Instructions

Functional Manual

DLP™ Projector Commercial Use

Model No.

PT-REZ12

PT-REZ10

PT-REZ80

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

This manual is common to all the models regardless of suffixes of the Model No.

For details on the Model No., please refer to “Suffixes of the Model No.” (

x

page 2).

Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual

for future use.

Before using this product, be sure to read “Read this first!” (

x

pages 6 to 19).

ENGLISH

DPQP1460ZB/X1

Suffixes of the Model No.

z for USA, Canada

B: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LB: Black model, the lens sold separately

W: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LW: White model, the lens sold separately z for United States Government

LBUG: Black model, the lens sold separately z for EU, EFTA, UK, Turkey

BEJ: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LBEJ: Black model, the lens sold separately

WEJ: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LWEJ: White model, the lens sold separately z for Korea

B: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied

W: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied z for Taiwan

B: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied z for India

BD: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LBD: Black model, the lens sold separately z for other countries or regions

BE: Black model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LBE: Black model, the lens sold separately

WE: White model, the standard zoom lens supplied

LWE: White model, the lens sold separately

2 - ENGLISH

Contents

Contents

Read this first!

Chapter 1 Preparation

6

Installing the Function Board 54

Before installing or removing the Function

54

For Intel ® SDM-S specification Function Board 55

Precautions for use 24

Installation and handling of the laser product

24

Connecting 59

Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter

Application software supported by the projector

29

Chapter 3 Basic Operations

Switching on/off the projector 68

About your projector 33

When the initial setting screen is displayed 71

When the administrator account setting screen

76

Names and functions of the Function Board

38

Switching off the projector 79

Projecting 80

Preparing the remote control 40

Connecting the remote control to the projector

40

Moving the projection lens to the home position

84

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Setting up 42

Using the USB memory 86

USB memory that can be used with the

86

Removing/attaching the projection lens 51

Operating with the remote control 87

ENGLISH - 3

Contents

Chapter 4 Settings

[DISPLAY OPTION] menu 123

Menu navigation 91

[PICTURE] menu 97

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu 151

[POSITION] menu 108

[ADVANCED MENU] menu 116

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu 122

[TEST PATTERN] menu 192

192

4 - ENGLISH

Contents

[SIGNAL LIST] menu 195

Updating the firmware 259

Updating the firmware via LAN 259

Updating the firmware using the USB memory

264

Chapter 6 Maintenance

Light source/temperature indicators 267

[SECURITY] menu 198

Maintenance 269

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

200

Troubleshooting 270

[NETWORK] menu 202

Self-diagnosis display 272

Chapter 7 Appendix

Technical information 274

Specifications 289

Chapter 5 Operations

Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount

Bracket 305

Index 307

Network connection 216

Using the web control function 221

Using the data cloning function 253

Copying the data to another projector via LAN

253

Copying the data to another projector using

255

Using HDMI CEC function 257

Setting the projector and CEC-compatible

257

Operating the CEC-compatible device with the

257

ENGLISH - 5

Read this first!

Read this first!

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.

WARNING: To prevent damage which may result in fire or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reflexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view.

The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV.

The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.

WARNING:

1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.

2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthingtype mains plug. This plug will only fit an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing plug.

WARNING:

This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR32.

In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.

(for Taiwan)

WARNING:

This equipment complies with the Class A standard of CNS15936.

To avoid radio frequency interference, this equipment should not be installed or used in a residential environment.

CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate this device.

This is a device to project images onto a screen, etc., and is not intended for use as indoor lighting in a domestic environment.

Directive 2009/125/EC

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

6 - ENGLISH

Read this first!

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN

Indicated on the projector

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

WARNING: Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.

As with any bright source, do not stare into the direct beam, RG2 IEC 62471-5:2015.

Indicated on the projector

(for USA and Canada)

WARNING: MOUNT ABOVE THE HEADS OF CHILDREN.

The use of a ceiling mount is recommended with this projector to place it above the eyes of

children.

Laser Notice No.57

Notice on laser

(except for Taiwan, India)

This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

DANGER-CLASS 4 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EYE OR

SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED RADIATION

DANGER-RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 4 - EN CAS D'OUVERTURE

EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU RAYONNEMENT DIRECT OU

DIFFUS DES YEUX OU DE LA PEAU

DPQT1359ZA

(Inside of product)

ENGLISH - 7

Read this first!

(for Taiwan)

This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

第 1 類雷射產品

(for India)

This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

CAUTION (North/Middle/South America)

Power Supply: This Projector is designed to operate on 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz AC, house current only.

CAUTION: The AC power cord which is supplied with the projector as an accessory can only be used for power supplies up to 125 V. If you need to use higher voltages than this, you will need to obtain a separate 250 V power cord. If you use the accessory cord in such situations, fire may result.

CAUTION (North/Middle/South America, Taiwan)

This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power plug. Do not remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug will only fit a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.

Do not remove

8 - ENGLISH

Read this first!

WARNING (USA and Canada)

f

Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data

Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75.

f

For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring.

f

For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

NOTIFICATION (Canada)

This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

For USA-California Only

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

For Australia Only

WARNING: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A COIN BATTERY

Keep coin battery out of the reach of infants and small children whether the battery is new or used.

Severe or fatal injuries can occur within 2 hours of ingestion. Seek medical attention immediately.

EU Declaration of Conformity (DoC) for RE Directive

This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

2014/53/EU.

Customers can download a copy of the original DoC for this product from our DoC server: https://www.ptc.panasonic.eu/

Contact in the EU:Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH, Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525

Hamburg, Germany

ENGLISH - 9

Read this first!

FCC NOTICE (USA)

Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity

Model Number: PT-REZ12B / PT-REZ12W / PT-REZ12LB / PT-REZ12LW / PT-REZ12LBUG /

PT-REZ12BE / PT-REZ12WE / PT-REZ12LBE / PT-REZ12LWE

Trade Name:

PT-REZ10B / PT-REZ10W / PT-REZ10LB / PT-REZ10LW /PT-REZ10LBUG /

PT-REZ10BE / PT-REZ10WE / PT-REZ10LBE / PT-REZ10LWE

PT-REZ80B / PT-REZ80W / PT-REZ80LB / PT-REZ80LW / PT-REZ80LBUG /

PT-REZ80BE / PT-REZ80WE / PT-REZ80LBE / PT-REZ80LWE

Panasonic

Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America

Address: Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490

General Contact: http://www.panasonic.com/support

Projector Contact: 855-772-8324 or [email protected]

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Caution:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

FCC Warning:

To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate this device.

10 - ENGLISH

Read this first!

IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG

FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This appliance is supplied with a molded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.

If the fitted molded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.

If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:

Green - and - Yellow: Earth

Blue: Neutral

Brown: Live

As the colors of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.

The wire which is colored GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN - AND -

YELLOW.

The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or colored BLACK.

The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or colored RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

ENGLISH - 11

Read this first!

r

Hazard distance (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)

The distance from the projection lens surface, at which the emission reaches the Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) of risk group 2, is known as the hazard distance (HD) or safety distance. The area where the emission exceeds the Accessible Emission Limit of risk group 2 is called the hazard zone (HZ).

Within the hazard zone, never look into the light projected from the projector. The eyes may be damaged by direct irradiation even if you look at the light just for a moment. If you are outside the hazard zone, it is considered to be safe in all circumstances except deliberately staring into the light projected from the projector.

HD HD

D1

D2

HZ

D3

D4

HZ r

Risk group

The combination of the projector and the projection lens is categorized as risk group 2 when the hazard distance is 1 m (39-3/8") or less. It is categorized as risk group 3 when the hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8 " ), and it will be for professional use instead of consumer use.

In case of risk group 3, there is a possibility of damaging the eyes by direct irradiation when looking into the projection light from inside the hazard zone even for a moment.

In the case of risk group 2, safe use without damaging the eyes is possible in all circumstances except deliberately staring into the light projected from the projector.

The combination of the projector and the projection lens which the hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8") and is categorized as risk group 3 is as follows.

Model No.

Projection lens Model No.

Risk group

PT-REZ12 *1

PT-REZ10 *1

PT-REZ80 *1

ET-C1T700 Risk group 3

*1 When PT-REZ12 / PT-REZ10 / PT-REZ80 is used with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1T700) attatched, the hazard distance exceeds 1 m

(39-3/8"), and regardless of the use condition, the throw ratio is larger than 2.0:1. In this case, it is catagorized as the risk group 3.

12 - ENGLISH

Indicated on the projector

Read this first!

Each dimension inside the hazard zone for combination with projection lens which the hazard distance exceeds

1 m (39-3/8") is as follows.

(Unit: m)

Model No.

PT-REZ12

PT-REZ10

PT-REZ80

Projection lens

Model No.

ET-C1T700

ET-C1T700

HD *1

2.4

1.7

D1 *2

0.481

0.347

D2 *2

0.481

0.347

D3 * 2

0.553

0.399

D4 * 2

0.553

0.399

*1 HD: Hazard Distance

*2 The values of D1 to D4 will change in accordance with the lens shift amount. Each value in the table is the maximum value.

Note f The value in the table is based on IEC/EN 62471-5:2015.

f Projection lens compatible with the projector may be added or changed without prior notice.

For the latest information, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Attention f If the light projected from the projector directly enters the eyes while you are inside the hazard zone, the retinas may be damaged. Do not enter within the hazard zone during use. Alternatively, install the projector in a location where the projected light will not directly enter the eyes.

ENGLISH - 13

Read this first!

WARNING:

r

POWER

The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.

Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock, or will cause visual impairment.

f

If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.

f

If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.

f

If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.

Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.

During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.

Electric shocks can result.

Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.

If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire will result.

f

Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.

Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.

Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.

Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks or fire. Please note that if you do not use the provided power cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.

Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.

If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.

f

Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.

Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.

Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.

Use an outlet supporting 15 A independently.

Using an outlet together with another device may result in fires due to heat generation.

Do not overload the wall outlet.

If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and fire will result.

Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.

Failure to observe this will cause a fire.

f

If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.

f

If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.

Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.

r

ON USE/INSTALLATION

Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.

Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, fire or damage to the projector.

Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into contact with oily smoke or steam.

Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire, electric shocks or deterioration of components. Oil may also distort the plastic and the projector could fall such as when mounted on the ceiling.

Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.

Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage could result.

Do not install the projector in a location where people pass through.

People may bump into the projector or trip on the power cord, which may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.

Install the projector in a location sufficiently away from surrounding walls and objects so that air ventilation is not obstructed.

Failure to observe this will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.

f

Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.

For details, refer to “Cautions when setting up the projector” ( x

page 26).

f

Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the intake vent.

14 - ENGLISH

Read this first!

WARNING:

Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.

Do not enter the projection luminous flux using an optical device (such as magnifier or mirror).

Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.

f

Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into this light.

f

Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and switch off the main power when you are away from the projector.

Do not project an image with the lens cover attached.

Doing so can cause fire.

Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.

High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks.

f

For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.

Do not allow metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow the projector to get wet.

Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction of the projector.

f Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.

f If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.

f Particular attention must be paid to children.

Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in falling accidents.

f

Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.

Installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling should only be carried out by a qualified technician.

If installation is not carried out and secured correctly, it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.

r

ACCESSORIES

Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.

Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.

f

Do not use unspecified batteries.

f

Do not charge dry cell batteries.

f

Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.

f

Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.

f

Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as necklaces or hairpins.

f

Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.

f

Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.

f f

Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.

f

Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.

Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.

If the battery fluid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.

f

Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury.

Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.

f

Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.

In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.

Do not allow children to reach the batteries.

Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm. f If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.

Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.

f

Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.

ENGLISH - 15

Read this first!

CAUTION:

r

POWER

When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.

If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks will result.

When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.

Before replacing the projection lens, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

f

Unexpected projection of light may cause injury to eyes.

f

Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.

Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before attaching or removing the Function Board

(optional) and performing maintenance.

Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

r

ON USE/INSTALLATION

Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.

Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.

Do not put your weight on this projector.

You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.

f

Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.

Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.

Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.

f

Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.

Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.

Failure to observe this could cause injury.

Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur.

Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.

Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.

Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.

f

Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.

Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.

Do not block the projection by placing an object in front of the projection lens.

Doing so can cause fire, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.

f

Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.

The projector must be carried or installed by two or more people.

Failure to do so may cause falling accidents.

Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.

Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to occur.

When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with metal parts inside the ceiling.

Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.

16 - ENGLISH

Read this first!

CAUTION:

r

ACCESSORIES

When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote control.

Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or contamination of surrounding area.

r

MAINTENANCE

Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector every 20 000 hours of usage as an estimated duration.

Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire.

f

For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.

To remove the battery

Remote Control Battery

1. Press the guide and lift the cover.

(ii)

(i)

2. Remove the batteries.

ENGLISH - 17

Read this first!

Brazil Only

Brasil Apenas

r

Manuseio de baterias usadas

BRASIL

Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias deverão ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.

Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma fita isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper a blindagem e produzir fogo. (Fig. 1)

Fig. 1

Como isolar os terminais

Fita Isolante

Fita Isolante

Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem ficar expostas a temperaturas superiores a 100 °C (212 °F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos terminais provocado internamente.

Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante

água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.

r

Remoção das baterias

1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa.

2. Remova as baterias.

(ii)

(i)

18 - ENGLISH

Read this first!

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment.

For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local authority.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol)

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

Product Information (for Turkey only)

AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

For India Only

Information on hazardous constituents as specified in the E-Waste (Management) Rules in electrical and electronic equipment.

Declaration of Conformity with the requirements of the E-Waste (Management) Rules limits with respect to Lead,

Mercury, Cadmium, Hexavalent chromium, Polybrominated biphenyls,Polybrominated diphenyl ethers.

The content of hazardous substance with the exemption of the applications listed in the E-Waste (Management) Rules:

1. Lead (Pb) – not over 0.1% by weight.

2. Cadmium (Cd) – not over 0.01% by weight.

3. Mercury (Hg) – not over 0.1% by weight.

4. Hexavalent chromium (Cr6+) – not over 0.1% by weight.

5. Polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) – not over 0.1% by weight.

6. Polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) – not over 0.1% by weight.

For the purpose of recycling to facilitate effective utilization of resources, please return this product to a nearby authorized collection center, registered dismantler of recycler, or Panasonic service center when disposing of this product.

Customer care number ( Toll free ) : 1800 103 1333 ,1800 108 1333

Please see the Panasonic website for further information on collection centers, etc. or call the customer care toll-free number.

https://www.panasonic.com/in/corporate/e-waste-management.html

Do’s & Don’ts

No.

Do's Don'ts

1 All electrical and electronic products are required to be handed over only to the Authorized recycler.

The product should not be opened by the user himself

/ herself, but only by authorized service personnel.

2 The product should be handed over only to authorized recycler for disposal.

3 Keep the product in an isolated area, after it becomes non-functional / unrepairable so as to prevent its accidental breakage.

4 Refer to Operating Instructions for handling of end of life products

5 Always dispose of products that have reached end of life at Panasonic Life Solutions India Authorized

Service Centre.

6 Wherever possible or as instructed, separate the packaging material according to responsible waste disposal options and sorting for recycling.

The product is not meant for re-sale to any unauthorized agencies / scrap dealers / kabariwalas.

The product is not meant for mixing into household waste stream.

Do not keep any replaced spare part(s) from the product in an exposed area.

Do not donate old electronic items to anybody. Do not dispose of your product in garbage bins along with municipal waste that ultimately reaches landfill.

Do not give e-waste to informal and unorganized sectors like Local Scrap Dealers / Rag Pickers.

ENGLISH - 19

r

Trademarks

f SOLID SHINE is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.

f DLP and the DLP logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Texas Instruments.

f The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade dress and the HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

f Intel and the Intel logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries.

f DisplayPort TM is a trademark owned by the Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA

States and other countries.

® ) in the United f Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas.

f Crestron Connected, the Crestron Connected logo, Crestron Fusion, and XiO Cloud are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

f HDBaseT TM is a trademark of HDBaseT Alliance.

f Art-Net TM Designed by and Copyright Artistic Licence Holdings Ltd f Windows and Microsoft Edge are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and other countries.

f Mac, macOS, Safari, and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries and regions.

f IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

f Android and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.

f QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.

f Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States and/ or other countries.

f Some of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by

Ricoh Company, Ltd.

f All other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Please note that the ® and TM symbols are not specified in this manual.

Software information regarding this product

This product incorporates the following software:

(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.,

(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.,

(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL V2.0),

(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or

(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/or LGPL V2.1.

The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE.

For details, refer to the license terms and conditions of each open source software.

The open source software license is stored in the firmware of this product, and can be downloaded by accessing

this projector using the web browser. For details, refer to “Using the web control function” ( x page 221).

At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. will give to any third party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under

GPL V2.0, LGPL V2.1 or the other licenses with the obligation to do so, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.

Contact Information: [email protected]

r

Illustrations in this manual

f Illustrations of the projector, menu screen (OSD), and other parts may vary from the actual product.

f Illustrations displayed on the computer screen may differ depending on the types of the computer, operating system, and the web browser.

f Illustrations of the projector with the power cord attached are only examples. The shape of the supplied power cords varies depending on the country where you purchased the product.

20 - ENGLISH

r

Reference pages

f Reference pages in this manual are indicated as ( x page 00).

r

Term

f In this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.

ENGLISH - 21

Features of the Projector Quick Steps

High image quality

With a new-generation laser light source and a unique optical system enhancing the color reproduction, high luminance of

12 000 lm

*1

and high contrast of 25 000:1

*2

are achieved.

*1 When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]

A value for PT-REZ12.

A value for PT-REZ10 is 10 000 lm and for PT-REZ80 is

8 000 lm.

*2 When [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3]

For details, refer to the corresponding pages.

1. Set up the projector.

(

x

page 42)

2. Attach the projection lens.

(

x

page 51)

3. Connect with external devices.

(

x

page 59)

High extensibility and flexible setup

Flexibly supports various systems for the customers by adopting the next-generation

slot specification Intel

®

Smart Display

Module and the Art-Net function. With the lens memory function and utilizing the characteristics of solid-state light source, application to wide range of usage is possible with support of all 360° direction projection.

4. Connect the power cord.

(

x

page 68)

5. Switch on the projector.

(

x

page 70)

6. Make initial settings.

(

x

page 71)

f Take this step when you switch on the power for the first time after purchasing the projector.

Long life and high reliability

In addition to adopting the solid-state light source with long life, the projector has enhanced the dust resistance property of

the optical unit. By eliminating the filter, the

maintenance cost for long-term operation is reduced. Also, it will contribute to the stable operation by adopting the backup function (HDMI input) that will continue the projection even when the input signal is discontinued.

7. Select the input signal.

(

x

page 80)

8. Adjust the image.

(

x

page 82)

22 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1 Preparation

This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.

ENGLISH - 23

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use

Precautions for use

Intended use of the product

The purpose of the projector is to project an image signal from imaging equipment or a computer on a screen or other surface as a still image or moving image.

Installation and handling of the laser product (for USA and Canada)

r

For permanent Installation

f Installation of the projector shall be performed by a technician trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

f The variance application to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA variance application) will be performed by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. The person responsible of the device or usage shall store the original or a copy of the FDA variance approval letter received from Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

r

For temporary installation

f Installation of the projector shall be performed by a technician trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

f Owner of the projector or the person responsible of usage such as the promotor of the show shall apply for FDA variance and acquire the approval letter.

f The variance holder who has acquired the FDA variance approval letter must submit the “installation checklist” required by FDA to Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

f Variance holder shall create and store a document recording the information such as the location of the use, dates of the use, users of the projector.

r

For use

f This projector is categorized as the risk group 3 of IEC/EN 62471-5:2015.

f Do not enter within the hazard distance (within RG3 range), refer to “Hazard distance (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)”.

f Assign a person responsible of the device when using the projector. The person responsible shall be trained by

Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. before starting to use the projector.

Note f Information such as training, FDA variance application, installation checklist, usage recording document can be confirmed by accessing following URL. https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/projector/extranet/index.html

Cautions when transporting

f Transport the projector with two or more people. Failure to do so may drop the projector, which may result in damage or deformation of the projector, or injury.

f Hold the bottom of the projector and do not hold the projection lens or the opening around the projection lens when transporting. Failure to do so may cause damage. Also, handle the projector in a way not to apply excessive vibration or shock. Failure to do so may cause a failure due to the damaged internal components.

f Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.

Cautions when installing

r

Do not set up the projector outdoors.

The projector is designed for indoor use only.

r

Do not set up the projector in the following locations.

f Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal components or malfunction.

f Location close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.

f Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare cases due to the heated air from the exhaust vent or the hot or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the projector.

24 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use f Places with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.

Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.

f Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.

f Places where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the projection lens surface causes damage to the DLP chips.

r

Ask a qualified technician or your dealer for the installation work such as installing to

a ceiling.

To ensure projector performance and security, ask a qualified technician or your dealer when installing the projector in a method other than the floor installation or when installing the projector in a high place.

r

Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK

connection.

Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.

r

The projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast

station or the radio.

If there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location, install the projector at a location sufficiently far from the source of the radio waves. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the

<DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe which is grounded at both ends. The

<DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is a terminal equipped on the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model

No.: TY-SB01DL).

r

Image adjustment after installation

Projected image of the projector is affected by the ambient temperature around the projector or the increased internal temperature caused by the light from its light source, and it will be unstable especially right after the projection has started.

It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern

displayed. For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” ( x page 192).

r

Do not install the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') or higher above sea level. (Altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level is the maximum height that the

performance of this projector is guaranteed.)

r

Do not use the projector in a location where the ambient temperature exceeds 45 °C

(113 °F).

Using the projector in a location where the altitude is too high or the ambient temperature is too high may reduce the life of the components or result in malfunctions.

Upper limit of the operating environment temperature varies depending on the altitude above sea level.

When using the projector at an altitude between 0 m (0') and 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level: 0 °C (32 °F) to

45 °C (113 °F)

When using the projector at an altitude between 1 400 m (4 593') and 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level: 0 °C

(32 °F) to 40 °C (104 °F)

Do not use the projector in a location where the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C (104 °F) regardless of the altitude when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is attached to the projector.

ENGLISH - 25

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use r

Projection in all 360° direction is possible.

360°

360°

360°

360° vertically 360° horizontally 360° tilted

(combination of vertical and horizontal)

Cautions when setting up the projector

f Use the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other purposes may damage the projector.

f When installing the projector with a method other than the floor installation using the adjustable feet or the ceiling installation with the Ceiling Mount Bracket, use the five screw holes for ceiling mount (as shown in the figure) to fix the projector to the mount.

In such case, make sure that there is no clearance between the screw holes for ceiling mount on the projector bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers (metallic) between them.

f Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten the fixing screws to their specified tightening torques.

Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.

For the screws to fix the projector, use commercially available ISO 898-1 standard screws (made of carbon steel or alloy steel).

(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the projector: 12 mm (15/32"), screw tightening torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)

Unit: mm Adjustable feet

Screw holes to fix the projector

Thread engagement depth

M6

12(15/32")

Adjustable feet

Positions of screw holes to fix projector and adjustable feet f Do not stack projectors on top of each other.

f Do not use the projector supporting it by the top.

26 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use f Do not block the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.

f Prevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.

300 mm (11-13/16") or longer

300 mm (11-13/16") or longer

500 mm (19-11/16") or longer

100 mm (3-15/16") or shorter 100 mm (3-15/16") or shorter f Do not install the projector in a confined space.

When installing the projector in a confined space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.

300 mm (11-13/16") or longer

500 mm (19-11/16") or longer

300 mm (11-13/16") or longer

100 mm (3-15/16") or longer f When installing and fixing the projector on a ceiling or wall using a mount, make sure that the fixing screw or power cord does not come in contact with the metal section inside the ceiling or wall. Failure to observe this may result in electric shocks.

f Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage to the product caused by an inappropriate choice of location for installing the projector, even if the warranty period of the product has not expired. f Immediately remove the product that is not in use anymore by asking a qualified technician.

Security

When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.

f Personal information being leaked via this product f Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party f Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party

Take sufficient security measures.

f Make your password difficult to guess as much as possible.

f Change your password periodically.

f Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge your password in case you receive such inquiries.

f The connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.

r

Security when using the wireless LAN product

The advantage of a wireless LAN is that information can be exchanged between a computer or other such equipment and a wireless access point using radio waves, instead of using a LAN cable, as long as you are within range for radio transmissions.

On the other hand, because the radio wave can travel through an obstacle (such as a wall) and is accessible from anywhere within a given range, following problems may occur if security setting is insufficient.

f Transmitted data may be intercepted

A malicious third party may intentionally intercept radio waves and monitor the following transmitted data.

g Personal information such as your ID, password, credit card number g Content of an Email

ENGLISH - 27

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use f Illegally accessed

A malicious third party may access your personal or corporate network without authorization and engage in the following types of behavior.

g Retrieve personal and/or secret information (information leak) g Spread false information by impersonating a particular person (spoofing) g Overwrite intercepted communications and issue false data (tampering) g Spread harmful software such as a computer virus and crash your data and/or system (system crash)

Since most wireless LAN adapters or access points are equipped with security features to take care of these problems, you can reduce the possibility of these problems occurring when using this product by making the appropriate security settings for the wireless LAN device.

Some wireless LAN devices may not be set for security immediately after purchase. To decrease the possibility of occurrence of security problems, be sure to make all security related settings according to the operation instructions supplied with each wireless LAN device before using a wireless LAN device.

Depending on the specifications of the wireless LAN, a malicious third party may be able to break security settings by special means.

Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. asks customers to thoroughly understand the risk of using this product without making security settings, and recommends that the customers make security settings at their own discretion and responsibility.

Notes regarding the wireless LAN

Radio wave in the 2.4 GHz band is used when the wireless LAN connection function of the projector is used. The license of wireless station is not required, but understand the following when using.

To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model

No.: AJ-WM50 Series).

r

Do not use close to other wireless devices.

Following devices may be using radio wave in the same bandwidth as the projector. Using the projector close to these devices may cause the communication to be disabled or the communication speed to slow down due to interference of radio wave.

f Microwave oven, etc.

f Industrial, scientific, or medical devices, etc.

f In-plant wireless station for identifying moving vehicles used in the manufacturing lines at a plant f Specified low power wireless station r

Do not use cell phone, television, or radio as much as possible close to the projector.

Cell phone, television, or radio is using radio wave with different bandwidth from the projector, so there is no effect on the wireless LAN communication or the send/receive on these devices. However, noise may occur in the audio or video due to the radio wave from the projector.

r

Radio wave for wireless LAN communication does not go through the reinforcing bars, metal, or concrete.

The projector can communicate through wall or floor made of wood or glass (excluding the glass with metal mesh embedded), but it cannot communicate through wall or floor made of reinforcing bars, metal, or concrete.

r

Do not use the projector as much as possible in a location where static electricity is

generated.

The communication via wireless LAN or wired LAN may be prone to disruption when the projector is used in a location where static electricity or noise is generated.

There is a rare case that the LAN connection may not be established due to static electricity or noise, so in such case, turn off the projector, remove the source of problematic static electricity or noise, and turn the projector back on.

Slot

This projector is equipped with Intel ® Smart Display Module (Intel ® SDM) specification slot.

Optional Function Board or an interface board or module of other manufacturers supporting Intel ® SDM Small

(Intel ® SDM-S) or Intel ® SDM Large (Intel ® SDM-L) specification (collectively referred to as “Function Board” hereinafter) can be installed in the slot. For the devices of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

28 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use

Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.

DIGITAL LINK

“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology to transmit the video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals using a twisted pair cable by adding unique functions by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. to the HDBaseT TM communication standard formulated by HDBaseT Alliance.

By installing the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) in the slot on the projector, connection with the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) or the peripheral devices by other manufacturers based on the HDBaseT TM standard (twisted-pair-cable transmitters such as the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics) becomes possible. For the devices of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers. The projector is not equipped with an audio function so it is not possible to output audio.

Art-Net

“Art-Net” is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol.

By using the DMX controller and the application software, illumination and stage system can be controlled. Art-Net is made based on DMX512 communication protocol.

Application software supported by the projector

The projector supports following application software.

For details or downloading application software except for “Geometric & Setup Management Software” and

“Projector Network Setup Software”, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

“Geometric & Setup Management Software” and “Projector Network Setup Software” can be downloaded from the following website (“Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website”).

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/

It is necessary to register and login to PASS *1 to download from “Panasonic Professional Display and Projector

Technical Support Website”.

*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website f Logo Transfer Software

This application software transfers the original image, such as company logo, which is projected at the start, to the projector.

f Smart Projector Control

This application software sets and adjusts the projector connected to the network using a smartphone or a tablet.

f Multi Monitoring & Control Software

This application software monitors and controls the multiple display devices (projector and flat panel display) connected to an intranet.

f Early Warning Software

This plug-in software monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals within an intranet, and notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality. “Early Warning

Software” is pre-installed in the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”. To use the early warning function of this plug-in software, install “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” in the PC to be used. By enabling the early warning function, it will notify of the approximate time to replace the consumables for the display devices, to clean each part of the display devices, and to replace the components of the display devices, allowing to execute maintenance in advance.

The early warning function can be used by registering maximum of 2048 display devices free of charge for

90 days after installing the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” into a PC. To continuously use after the 90 days, it is necessary to purchase the license of “Early Warning Software” (ET-SWA100 Series) and perform the activation. Also, depending on the type of license, the number of display devices that can be registered for monitoring varies. For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.

ENGLISH - 29

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use f Geometric & Setup Management Software (Geometry Manager Pro)

This application software performs detailed corrections and adjustments such as the geometric adjustment which cannot be covered by the projector settings in real-time. Also, the geometric adjustment and edge blending to match the shape of the screen, and the adjustment of color and luminance can be automatically performed within simple steps by using a camera.

f Projector Network Setup Software

This application software allows to set the network information, such as the IP addresses, and the projector names, for multiple projectors connected to the network collectively. Also, the administrator account, network information, and projector name can be set for the projector that does not have the administrator account set using this software.

Storing

To store the projector, store in a dry room.

Disposal

To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal. Also, dispose of the product without disassembling.

Cautions on use

r

To get a good picture quality

In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from shining onto the screen.

r

Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.

If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else, this will be magnified and projected onto the screen.

r

DLP chips

f The DLP chips are precision-made. Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or always lit. Such a phenomenon does not indicate malfunction.

f Directing a high-power laser beam onto the projection lens surface can damage the DLP chips.

r

Do not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating.

Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.

r

Light source

The light source of the projector uses laser diode, and has the following characteristics.

f Depending on the operating environment temperature, the luminance of the light source will decrease.

The higher the temperature becomes, the more the luminance of the light source decreases.

f The luminance of the light source will decrease by duration of usage.

If brightness is noticeably reduced and the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside the projector or replace the light source unit.

r

Computer and external device connections

When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords and shielded cables as well.

30 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use

Accessories

Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the number of accessories.

Wireless/wired remote control unit <1>

(N2QAYA000252)

For Korea

(K2CZ3YY00032) <1>

200 V - 240 V

For India

(K2CZ3YY00100) <1>

200 V - 240 V

Power cord

(K2CM3YY00057)

200 V - 240 V

(K2CT3YY00101)

200 V - 240 V

For Taiwan

(K2CH3YY00009) <1>

200 V - 240 V

AAA/R03 or AAA/LR03 battery <2>

(K2CG3YY00218)

100 V - 120 V

(For remote control unit)

SLOT adapter <1>

(DPVF2722YA/X1)

Attention f After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.

f Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.

f For lost accessories, consult your dealer.

f Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from young children.

Note f The SLOT adapter is used when the Intel ® SDM Small (Intel ® SDM-S) specification Function Board is installed in the slot on

the projector. ( x page 54)

f The type and number of the supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.

f The part numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

ENGLISH - 31

Chapter 1   Preparation — Precautions for use

Optional accessories

Optional accessories (product name)

Projection lens Zoom Lens

Model No.

ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500,

ET-C1S600

* 1

, ET-C1T700

12G-SDI Terminal Board *2

TY-SB01QS

Function Board for 12G-SDI

Optical *2

TY-SB01FB

Function Board DIGITAL LINK Terminal

Board

*2

Wireless Presentation

System Receiver Board *2

TY-SB01DL

TY-SB01WP

Wireless Module

*2 AJ-WM50 Series* 3

Ceiling Mount Bracket

ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings)

ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)

ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)

ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)

Early Warning Software

(Basic license/3-year license)

NFC Upgrade Kit

*2

Digital Interface Box

DIGITAL LINK Switcher

ET-SWA100 Series

ET-NUK10

ET-YFB100G

ET-YFB200G

*4

*1 This product is equivalent to the lens attached to the projector model with standard zoom lens.

*2 The availability of this product varies depending on the country. For details, contact your dealer.

*3 The suffix of the Model No. differs depending on the country.

Example of the Model No. with suffix for AJ-WM50 Series

AJ-WM50E, AJ-WM50G1, AJ-WM50G2, AJ-WM50GAN, AJ-WM50GPX, AJ-WM50P

*4 The suffix of the Model No. differs according to the license type.

Note f Use the Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) in an environment of 0 °C (32 °F) to 40 °C (104 °F), including when it is attached to the projector.

f The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.

For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your dealer. https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ f To connect the DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET-YFB200G) or the Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G) to the projector, it is necessary to install the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) in the slot.

f The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

f The optional accessories compatible with the projector may be added or changed without prior notice. The optional accessories described in this document are as of October 2023.

For the latest information, visit the following website. https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

32 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector

About your projector

Remote control

2

3

4

5

1

Front

12

Top

18

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

15

16

Bottom

19

11 17

1 <STANDBY> button

Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.

2 <POWER ON> button

Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN

POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power is turned off (standby mode).

3 Remote control indicator

Blinks if any button in the remote control is pressed.

4 Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)

Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift. ( x page 82)

5 <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/ asqw buttons

Used to navigate through the menu screen. ( x page 91)

asqw buttons are also used to enter the password in

[SECURITY] or enter characters.

6 <ON SCREEN> button

Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off

(hide). ( x page 87)

7 <INPUT MENU> button

Displays the input selection screen. ( x page 81)

8 Input selection buttons (<DISPLAYPORT>, <SLOT>,

<HDMI1>, <HDMI2>)

Switches the input signal to project. ( x page 80)

<SLOT> button can be used when the optional Function Board equipped with corresponding input is installed in the slot on the projector.

9 <FUNCTION> button

Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.

( x page 88)

When the <FUNCTION> button is held down, the [FUNCTION

BUTTON]

screen is displayed. ( x page 181)

10 Number (<0> - <9>) buttons

Used for entering an ID number or a password in a multiple projector environment.

11 <ID ALL> button

Used to simultaneously control all the projectors with a single

remote control in a multi-projector environment. ( x page 40)

12 <SHUTTER> button

Used to temporarily turn off the image.

( x page 87)

13 <TEST PATTERN> button

Displays the test pattern. ( x page 88)

14 <CEC> button

Displays the HDMI CEC operation screen. ( x page 257)

15 <STATUS> button

Displays the projector information.

16 <DEFAULT> button

Resets the setting of the displayed sub-menu to the factory

default. ( x page 92)

17 <ID SET> button

Sets the ID number of the remote control in a multiple projector

environment. ( x page 40)

18 Remote control signal transmitter

19 Remote control wired terminal

This is a terminal used to connect to the projector via a cable when the remote control is used as a wired remote control.

( x page 40)

ENGLISH - 33

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector

Attention f Do not drop the remote control.

f Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.

f Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.

f Observe the following instructions that are indicated on the caution label at the back of the remote control: g Do not use old battery with new one.

g Do not use batteries other than the type specified.

g Be sure the batteries are inserted properly.

For other instructions, read the instructions related to batteries that are described in “Read this first!”.

Caution label at the back of the remote control

Note f When operating the remote control by directly pointing at the remote control signal receiver of the projector, operate the remote control within a distance approximately 30 m (98'5") from the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±30° vertically and horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.

f If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.

f The signal will be reflected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material.

f If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as fluorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use it in a place distant from the light source.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal. However, the power indicator <ON

(G)/STANDBY (R)> will not blink in following cases.

g When [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] and the projector is in standby mode g When [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INDICATOR SETTING] → [INDICATOR MODE] is set to [OFF]

34 - ENGLISH

Projector body

Front

1 2 3 4 5 8

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector

Side

6 7

Rear

9

7 6

6

Top

5 4 3 2

10 6

17

Bottom

11

7

12 13

14 15 16

18

Projection direction

1 Remote control signal receiver (front)

2 Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>

Indicates the status of the power.

3 Light source indicator <LIGHT1>

Indicates the status of light source 1.

4 Light source indicator <LIGHT2>

Indicates the status of light source 2.

5 Temperature indicator <TEMP>

Indicates the internal temperature status.

6 Adjustable feet

Adjusts the projection angle.

7 Intake vent

8 Projection lens

(Only models with lens)

9 Remote control signal receiver (rear)

10 Exhaust vent

Attention f Do not block the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.

11 Control panel ( x page 36)

12 Security slot

This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security cables.

13 Connecting terminals ( x page 37)

14 <MAIN POWER> switch

Turns on/off the main power.

15 <AC IN> terminal

Connect the supplied power cord.

16 Power cord holder

17 NFC touch point

This is the touch point when using the near field communication

(NFC, Near Field Communication) function. A device such as a smartphone equipped with the NFC function can be connected to the projector by holding it near the touch point.

18 Security bar

A wire, etc., can be attached to prevent theft.

ENGLISH - 35

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector

Note f The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC

Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.

For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your dealer.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ f For the connection using the NFC function, use the application software “Smart Projector Control” which performs the setting and adjustment of the projector.

For details of the “Smart Projector Control”, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ r

Control panel

1

2

8

3

4

5

9

6 10

7

1 <POWER ON> button

Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN

POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power is turned off (standby mode).

2 <STANDBY> button

Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.

3 <MENU> button

Displays or hides the main menu. ( x page 91)

Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed.

If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the on-screen display is turned on.

4 <ENTER> button

Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.

5 asqw buttons

Used to select items in the menu screen, change settings, and adjust levels.

Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter characters.

6 <ON SCREEN> button

Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off

(hide). ( x page 87)

7 Input selection buttons (<HDMI 1/2>, <DISPLAYPORT>,

<SLOT>)

Switches the input signal to project. ( x page 80)

<SLOT> button can be used when the Function Board is installed in the slot on the projector.

8 <INPUT MENU> button

Displays the input selection screen. ( x page 81)

9 <LENS> button

Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift.

10 <SHUTTER> button

Used to temporarily turn off the image.

( x page 87)

36 - ENGLISH

r

Connecting terminals

1 2

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector

3 4 5 6 7

8 9

1 <MULTI SYNC IN> terminal/<MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal

This terminal is used to connect multiple projectors when balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out with a system using multiple projectors.

2 <SERIAL IN> terminal

This is the RS-232C compatible terminal to externally control the projector by connecting a computer.

This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out with a system using multiple projectors.

3 <SERIAL OUT> terminal

This is a terminal to output the signal connected to the <SERIAL

IN> terminal.

This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out with a system using multiple projectors.

4 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the external control circuit.

5 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal

These are terminals to connect the remote control for serial control in a multiple projector environment.

Note

10 11 12

6 Slot (<SLOT>)

There is an Intel ® Smart Display Module (Intel ® SDM) specification slot internally. Function Board supporting the Intel ®

SDM Small (Intel ® SDM-S) or the Intel ® SDM Large (Intel ®

SDM-L) specification can be installed.

( x page 54)

7 Slot cover

8 <DC OUT> terminal

This is the USB terminal dedicated for power supply. (DC 5 V,

2 A)

Use this terminal when a power supply is required to wireless display adapters and wireless LAN/Ethernet converters, etc.

9 <USB> terminal

This is a terminal to connect the USB memory when using the data cloning function or firmware update function. ( x pages

253, 259)

This is also the terminal to connect the optional Wireless

Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) when the projector is

connected via wireless LAN. ( x page 218)

10 <HDMI IN 1> terminal/<HDMI IN 2> terminal

This is a terminal to input HDMI signal.

11 <DisplayPort IN> terminal

This is a terminal to input DisplayPort signal.

12 <LAN> terminal

This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network.

f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.

f

When connecting a USB memory to the <USB> terminal, also refer to “Using the USB memory” ( x page 86).

f When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL], power can be supplied by using the <DC OUT> terminal even while the projector is in standby mode. If [ECO] is set, power cannot be supplied in standby mode.

ENGLISH - 37

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector

Names and functions of the Function Board (optional)

This projector is equipped with Intel ® Smart Display Module (Intel ® SDM) specification slot.

Function Board supporting the Intel ® SDM Small (Intel ® SDM-S) or the Intel ® SDM Large (Intel ® SDM-L) specification can be installed in the slot.

The terminal names of the optional Function Board with image input terminal to be used in this document is defined here, and also their operations are explained. Also refer to the Operating Instructions of the Function

Board.

12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS)

This board supports the HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, and 12G-SDI signal.

4 IN 3 IN 2 IN OUT 1 IN

TY-SB01QS

3G SDI 12G/3G SDI

1 2 3 4 5

1 <SDI 4 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to input SDI signal (HD-SDI/3G-SDI).

2 <SDI 3 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to input SDI signal (HD-SDI/3G-SDI).

3 <SDI 2 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to input SDI signal (HD-SDI/3G-SDI).

Note

4 <SDI OUT> terminal

This is an active through terminal to output the SDI signal

(HD-SDI/3G-SDI/12G-SDI) input to the <SDI 1 IN> terminal.

5 <SDI 1 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to input SDI signal (HD-SDI/3G-SDI/12G-SDI).

f The <SDI 2 IN> / <SDI 3 IN> / <SDI 4 IN> terminals are used when the quad link signal is input. These terminals do not support input of

12G-SDI signal.

f When the projector is in standby mode, a signal is not output from the <SDI OUT> terminal.

f This projector is not equipped with an audio function so it is not possible to output audio, but the audio signal input to the <SDI 1 IN> terminal is output from the <SDI OUT> terminal.

Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB)

This board is equipped with two ports that can install the SFP (Small Form-Factor Pluggable)/SFP+ module

(referred to as “SFP module” hereinafter) and supports the HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, and 12G-SDI signal.

SDI OPT

1 IN OUT 2 IN

SIGNAL

12G/3G/HD TY-SB01FB

1 2 3

1 SFP port 1

This is the port to install the SFP module for receiving.

2 SFP port 2

This is the port to install the SFP module for sending and receiving.

Note

3 Input indicator <SIGNAL>

This is the indicator to indicate the detection state of the video signal. This is illuminated when input of the video signal is detected in either or both of the <SDI OPT 1 IN> terminal and the <SDI OPT 2 IN> terminal.

f The SFP module is an extension module for converting optical signal to electric signal or electric signal to optical signal.

f Prepare the commercially available SFP module and the optical fiber cable required for connection according to the usage, video signal to be input, specification of the external device to be connected, etc.

f Operation of the sending function is restricted depending on the port where the SFP module is installed.

f SFP module compatible with this function board must be correspond to any of the following.

g 12G-SDI/3G-SDI/HD-SDI compatible optical fiber SFP module that is compliant with MSA (Multi-Source Agreement) g Optical fiber SFP module that the operation has been verified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

f To confirm the SFP module that the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Confirmation of operation for SFP module from other manufacturer has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic

Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the SFP module, contact the respective manufacturers.

f The sending function of the SFP module for sending or for sending and receiving will not operate even when it is installed in the SFP port 1.

f In addition to the SFP module for sending and receiving, the SFP module for receiving or for sending can be installed in the SFP port 2.

38 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1   Preparation — About your projector r

When the SFP modules are installed

This is an example when the SFP module for receiving (LC connector) is installed in the SFP port 1, and the SFP module for sending and receiving (LC connector) is installed in the SFP port 2.

SDI OPT

1 IN OUT 2 IN

SIGNAL

12G/3G/HD TY-SB01FB

1 2 1

1 <SDI OPT 1 IN> terminal/<SDI OPT 2 IN> terminal

These are terminals to input SDI signal (optical signal).

2 <SDI OPT OUT> terminal

This is an active through terminal to output the signal that is input from the <SDI OPT 1 IN> terminal/<SDI OPT 2 IN> terminal.

Attention f The SFP module to be installed on this product is a Class 1 laser product. Do not look into the SFP module or the connector of the optical fiber cable with the power of the projector turned on. Your eyes may be damaged when the laser goes into your eyes.

Note f Depending on the currently selected input, the signal from either the <SDI OPT 1 IN> terminal or the <SDI OPT 2 IN> terminal will be output from the <SDI OPT OUT> terminal.

f

For details on installing/removing the SFP module, refer to “Installing the SFP module” ( x

page 57) and “Removing the SFP module”

( x page 58).

DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL)

This board supports the DIGITAL LINK signal.

TY-SB01DL

POWER

DIGITAL LINK OUT DIGITAL LINK IN / LAN

LINK

HDCP

LINK

HDCP

1 2 3 4 5 3 4

1 Power status indicator <POWER>

On:

The power is supplied to the Function Board.

The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] → [DIGITAL LINK

OUT] is set to [ENABLE].

Blinking:

The power is supplied to the Function Board.

The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] → [DIGITAL LINK

OUT] is set to [DISABLE].

Off:

The power is not supplied to the Function Board.

2 <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal

This is a terminal to output DIGITAL LINK signal input to the

<DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal.

3 Signal status indicator <LINK>

On:

DIGITAL LINK signal is input or output.

Blinking:

Only the Ethernet signal is input or output.

Off:

DIGITAL LINK signal is not input or output.

4 Image signal indicator <HDCP>

On:

An image signal protected with HDCP is input or output.

Blinking:

An image signal that is not protected with HDCP is input or output.

Off:

An image signal is not input or output.

5 <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal

This is a terminal to connect a device that transmits an image signal via the LAN terminal. Also, this is the LAN terminal to connect to the network.

Note f To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET

TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

f To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET

TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

f The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

f The DIGITAL LINK signal is output only when a display device (projector or flat panel display) that corresponds to any of the following is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

g Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. display device supporting the DIGITAL LINK input g Display device installed with the Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. Function Board supporting the DIGITAL LINK input f When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] → [DIGITAL LINK OUT] is set to [ENABLE] and the projector is in projection mode, the

DIGITAL LINK signal (including the audio signal) input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is output from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

f When the projector is in standby mode, the DIGITAL LINK signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is not output from the

<DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

ENGLISH - 39

Chapter 1   Preparation — Preparing the remote control

Preparing the remote control

Inserting and removing the batteries

(ii)

(i)

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

1) Open the cover. (Fig. 1)

2) Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2) f When removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.

When using the multiple projectors

When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector individually using single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.

When using the projectors by setting the ID numbers, set the ID number of the projector body after initial settings

have been completed. Then, set the ID number of the remote control. For initial settings, refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed” ( x page 71).

The factory default ID number of the projector (projector body and remote control) is set to [ALL], so you can use it as it is. Set the ID numbers of the projector body and remote control as necessary.

For details on setting the ID number of the remote control, refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”

( x page 89).

Note f Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].

Connecting the remote control to the projector with a cable

If you control the multiple projectors with a single remote control, use commercially available M3 stereo mini jack cables to connect to the <REMOTE 1 IN> / <REMOTE 1 OUT> terminals of the projectors.

The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are susceptible to outside light.

M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially available)

Connecting to a second projector

Remote control

Connecting to the remote control wired terminal

Connecting terminals

Attention f Use a cable that is 15 m (49'3") or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds

15 m (49'3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.

40 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2 Getting Started

This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.

ENGLISH - 41

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Setting up

Usable outlet

This projector supports AC 100 V to AC 240 V as the power supply. A grounded outlet supporting 15 A is required with either voltage.

The shape of the usable outlet differs depending on the power supply. Following illustrations are examples.

2P/3W 16 A 250 V 2P/3W 16 A 250 V

2P/3W 15 A 250 V

2P/3W 15 A 250 V 2P/3W 15 A 125 V 2P/3W 20 A 250 V

Attention f Use the supplied power cord and ground at the outlet.

f Use the power cord matching the used power supply voltage and outlet shape.

Note f The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.

Installation mode

The installation modes of the projector are as follows. Set [FRONT/REAR] / [FLOOR/CEILING] in the

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[PROJECTION METHOD] ( x page 151) depending on the installation mode.

Setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward Setting on a desk/floor and projecting from rear

(Using the translucent screen)

Menu item

[FRONT/REAR]

[FLOOR/CEILING]

Setting value

[FRONT]

[AUTO] or [FLOOR]

Menu item

[FRONT/REAR]

[FLOOR/CEILING]

Setting value

[REAR]

[AUTO] or [FLOOR]

42 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear

(Using the translucent screen)

Menu item

[FRONT/REAR]

[FLOOR/CEILING]

Portrait setting and projecting forward

Setting value

[FRONT]

[AUTO] or [CEILING]

Menu item

[FRONT/REAR]

[FLOOR/CEILING]

Portrait setting and projecting from the rear

(Using the translucent screen)

Setting value

[REAR]

[AUTO] or [CEILING]

Menu item

[FRONT/REAR]

[FLOOR/CEILING]

Setting value

[FRONT]

Set in accordance with the image to project.

Menu item

[FRONT/REAR]

[FLOOR/CEILING]

Setting value

[REAR]

Set in accordance with the image to project.

Note f In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.

To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the [OSD ROTATION] setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →

[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

( x page 143).

f The projector has a built-in angle sensor. The attitude of the projector is automatically detected by setting [FLOOR/CEILING] to [AUTO] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].

r

Angle sensor

The range of the installation attitude that is detected by the angle sensor built-in the projector is as follows.

Floor standing installation

30°

30°

Ceiling mount installation

Floor standing installation

Projection direction

ENGLISH - 43

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Parts for installation (optional)

The projector can be installed on the ceiling by combining the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:

ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis

Adjustment)) and the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)).

f Be sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specified for this projector.

f Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing and setting up the projector.

Attention f To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified technician.

Projected image and throw distance

Install the projector referring to the projected image size, projection distance, etc.

Attention f

Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” ( x page 24).

f Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room. The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the projection lens surface.

Figure of projected image and throw distance

Projected image

SD Screen

L (LW/LT)

L1

SW

L1

Screen

L (LW/LT)

Note f This illustration is prepared on the assumption that the projected image size and position have been aligned to fit full in the screen.

f This illustration is not in accurate scale.

SH

SW

SD

H

L *1 (LW/LT) *2

L1

Projected image height

Projected image width

Projected image size

Distance from the lens center to the bottom edge of the projected image

Projection distance (distance from the front end of the projection lens to the screen)

Lens protrusion dimension (distance from the front surface of the projector to the front end of the projection lens)

*1

For details about calculating the projection distance, refer to “Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens” ( x page 50).

*2 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used

LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used

44 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Projection lens Model No.

ET-C1U100

ET-C1W300

ET-C1W400

ET-C1W500

Standard zoom lens/ET-C1S600

ET-C1T700

Lens protrusion dimension (L1) (approximate value)

0.384

0.155

0.149

0.144

0.110

0.160

Note f

For the adjustment range of the projected image position with the lens shift, refer to “Lens shift range” ( x page 85).

[GEOMETRY] projection range

[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)

(Unit: m)

Screen Screen

Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side)

Projection distance

Arc radius

Screen

Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)

Projection distance

Arc radius

Screen

Arc center

Screen

Projection distance

Arc radius

Arc center

Screen

Projection distance

Arc radius

ENGLISH - 45

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Projection lens Model

No.

ET-C1U100

ET-C1W300

ET-C1W400

ET-C1W500

Standard zoom lens/

ET-C1S600

ET-C1T700

Only [KEYSTONE] used *1 [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used together

Vertical keystone correction angle α (°)

±5

±10

±16

±22

Horizontal keystone correction angle β (°)

±3

±5

±10

±15

Vertical keystone correction angle α (°)

-

-

-

±8

Horizontal keystone correction angle β (°)

-

-

-

±8

Min. value of

R2/L2

-

-

-

1.3

Min. value of

R3/L3

-

-

-

3.3

Only [CURVED

CORRECTION] used

Min. value of

R2/L2

Min. value of

R3/L3

-

-

-

0.8

-

-

-

1.9

±40

±40

±40

±40

±20

±20

±15

±15

1.3

0.9

3.3

2.0

0.8

0.5

1.9

1.1

*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°.

Note f When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.

f Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.

f Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this projector within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.

46 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Projection distance of each projection lens

A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.

When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified image size.

r

When the image aspect ratio is 16:10

(Unit: m)

Lens type

Projection lens Model No.

Throw ratio *1

Projected image size

Diagonal

(SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

Height

(SH)

0.942

1.077

Width

(SW)

1.508

1.723

2.29 (90") 1.212

1.939

2.54 (100") 1.346

2.154

3.05 (120") 1.615

2.585

3.81 (150") 2.019

3.231

5.08 (200") 2.692

4.308

6.35 (250") 3.365

5.385

7.62 (300") 4.039

6.462

8.89 (350") 4.712

7.539

2.02

2.37

10.16 (400") 5.385

8.616

2.71

12.70 (500") 6.731

10.770

3.39

15.24 (600") 8.077

12.923

4.08

17.78 (700") 9.423

15.077

4.77

20.32 (800") 10.770 17.231

5.45

22.86 (900") 12.116

19.385

6.14

25.40 (1000") 13.462

21.539

6.82

0.65

0.79

0.99

1.34

1.68

ET-C1U100 *2

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

0.70

0.85

1.07

1.44

1.80

2.17

2.54

2.91

3.64

4.38

5.11

5.85

6.58

7.32

ET-C1W300

Min.

(LW)

0.82

0.94

1.06

1.18

1.43

1.79

Zoom Lens

ET-C1W400 ET-C1W500

0.308 - 0.330:1 0.550 - 0.690:1 0.680 - 0.950:1 0.940 - 1.39:1

Projection distance (L)

Standard zoom lens/ ET-C1S600

1.36 - 2.10:1

ET-C1T700

2.07 - 3.38:1

Max.

(LT)

1.03

1.18

1.33

1.49

1.79

2.25

Min.

(LW)

1.01

1.16

1.31

1.46

1.76

2.21

Max.

(LT)

1.42

1.63

1.84

2.05

2.46

3.09

Min.

(LW)

1.41

1.61

1.82

2.03

2.44

3.06

Max.

(LT)

2.08

2.39

2.69

2.99

3.60

4.51

Min.

(LW)

2.03

2.33

2.63

2.93

3.53

4.43

Max.

(LT)

3.15

3.61

4.06

4.52

5.44

6.82

Min.

(LW)

3.09

3.55

Max.

(LT)

5.07

5.81

4.00

4.46

6.54

7.28

5.37

8.75

6.73

10.96

2.40

3.01

3.62

4.22

3.01

3.77

4.53

5.29

2.96

3.71

4.46

5.22

4.13

5.18

6.22

7.26

4.09

5.12

6.03

7.55

5.93

9.11

9.01

14.64

7.43

11.40

11.28

18.32

6.15

9.07

8.92

13.70

13.56

22.00

7.18

10.59

10.42

15.99

15.83

25.68

4.83

6.05

6.06

7.58

5.97

8.30

8.21

12.10

11.92

18.28

18.11

29.37

7.47

10.39

10.27

15.14

14.92

22.87

22.66

36.73

7.26

9.10

8.97

12.48

12.33

18.18

17.92

27.46

27.21

44.09

8.48

10.63

10.47

14.56

14.39

21.22

20.91

32.04

31.76

51.45

Lens type

Projection lens Model No.

ET-C1U100

Zoom Lens

ET-C1W300

Standard zoom lens/

ET-C1W400 / ET-C1W500 /

ET-C1S600 / ET-C1T700

Projected image size

Diagonal (SD)

Height

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

17.78 (700")

20.32 (800")

22.86 (900")

25.40 (1000")

(SH)

0.942

1.077

1.212

1.346

1.615

2.019

2.692

3.365

4.039

4.712

5.385

6.731

8.077

9.423

10.770

12.116

13.462

Width

(SW)

1.508

1.723

1.939

2.154

2.585

3.231

4.308

5.385

6.462

7.539

8.616

10.770

12.923

15.077

17.231

19.385

21.539

0.00 - 1.35

0.00 - 1.62

0.00 - 2.02

0.00 - 2.69

0.00 - 3.37

0.00 - 4.04

0.00 - 4.71

0.00 - 5.39

0.00 - 6.73

0.00 - 8.08

0.00 - 9.42

0.00 - 10.77

0.00 - 12.12

0.00 - 13.46

Height position (H)

0.00 - 0.94

0.00 - 1.08

0.00 - 1.21

0.00 - 1.35

0.00 - 1.62

0.00 - 2.02

0.00 - 2.69

0.00 - 3.37

0.00 - 4.04

0.00 - 4.71

0.00 - 5.39

0.00 - 6.73

0.00 - 8.08

0.00 - 9.42

-0.09 - 1.04

-0.11 - 1.19

-0.12 - 1.33

-0.14 - 1.48

-0.16 - 1.78

-0.20 - 2.22

-0.27 - 2.96

-0.34 - 3.70

-0.40 - 4.44

-0.47 - 5.18

-0.54 - 5.92

-0.67 - 7.40

-0.81 - 8.89

-0.94 - 10.37

*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").

However, the throw ratio for ET-C1U100 is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").

*2 For ET-C1U100, fine text and images may not be displayed clearly during projection with the projected image size over 15.24 m (600").

ENGLISH - 47

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up r

When the image aspect ratio is 16:9

(Unit: m)

Lens type

Projection lens Model No.

Throw ratio *1

Projected image size

Diagonal

(SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

Width

(SW)

1.550

1.771

2.29 (90") 1.121

1.992

2.54 (100") 1.245

2.214

3.05 (120") 1.494

2.657

3.81 (150") 1.868

3.321

5.08 (200") 2.491

4.428

6.35 (250") 3.113

5.535

7.62 (300") 3.736

6.641

8.89 (350") 4.358

7.748

2.08

2.43

10.16 (400") 4.981

8.855

2.78

12.70 (500") 6.226

11.069

3.49

15.24 (600") 7.472

13.283

4.19

17.78 (700") 8.717

15.497

4.90

20.32 (800") 9.962

17.710

5.60

22.86 (900") 11.207 19.924

6.31

25.40 (1000") 12.453 22.138

7.01

0.67

0.81

1.02

1.38

1.73

ET-C1U100 *2

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

0.72

0.87

1.10

1.48

1.85

2.23

2.61

2.99

3.74

4.50

5.26

6.01

6.77

7.52

ET-C1W300

Min.

(LW)

0.84

0.97

1.09

1.22

1.47

1.84

Zoom Lens

ET-C1W400 ET-C1W500

0.308 - 0.331:1 0.550 - 0.690:1 0.680 - 0.950:1 0.940 - 1.39:1

Projection distance (L)

Standard zoom lens/ ET-C1S600

1.36 - 2.10:1

ET-C1T700

2.07 - 3.38:1

Max.

(LT)

1.06

1.22

1.37

1.53

1.84

2.31

Min.

(LW)

1.04

1.19

1.35

1.50

1.81

2.27

Max.

(LT)

1.46

1.68

1.89

2.10

2.53

3.18

Min.

(LW)

1.45

1.66

1.87

2.08

2.51

3.14

Max.

(LT)

2.14

2.45

2.76

3.08

3.70

4.64

Min.

(LW)

2.09

2.40

2.71

3.01

3.63

4.55

Max.

(LT)

3.24

3.71

4.18

4.65

5.59

7.01

Min.

(LW)

3.18

3.65

Max.

(LT)

5.21

5.97

4.12

4.58

6.73

7.48

5.52

9.00

6.92

11.27

2.47

3.09

3.72

4.34

3.09

3.88

4.66

5.44

3.05

3.82

4.59

5.36

4.25

5.32

6.39

7.46

4.20

5.26

6.20

7.76

6.09

9.36

9.26

15.05

7.63

11.72

11.60

18.83

6.32

9.32

9.17

14.08

13.94

22.62

7.38

10.88

10.71

16.44

16.28

26.40

4.97

6.22

6.23

7.79

6.13

8.54

8.44

12.44

12.26

18.79

18.62

30.18

7.68

10.68

10.56

15.56

15.34

23.51

23.29

37.75

7.47

9.36

9.22

12.82

12.67

18.69

18.42

28.22

27.97

45.32

8.72

10.92

10.76

14.97

14.79

21.81

21.50

32.94

32.65

52.88

Lens type

Projection lens Model No.

ET-C1U100

Zoom Lens

ET-C1W300

Standard zoom lens/

ET-C1W400 / ET-C1W500 /

ET-C1S600 / ET-C1T700

Projected image size

Diagonal (SD)

Height

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

17.78 (700")

20.32 (800")

22.86 (900")

25.40 (1000")

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

8.717

9.962

11.207

12.453

Width

(SW)

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535

6.641

7.748

8.855

11.069

13.283

15.497

17.710

19.924

22.138

-0.07 - 1.31

-0.08 - 1.58

-0.10 - 1.97

-0.14 - 2.63

-0.17 - 3.29

-0.21 - 3.94

-0.24 - 4.60

-0.28 - 5.26

-0.35 - 6.57

-0.42 - 7.89

-0.48 - 9.20

-0.55 - 10.52

-0.62 - 11.83

-0.69 - 13.14

Height position (H)

-0.05 - 0.92

-0.06 - 1.05

-0.06 - 1.18

-0.07 - 1.31

-0.08 - 1.58

-0.10 - 1.97

-0.14 - 2.63

-0.17 - 3.29

-0.21 - 3.94

-0.24 - 4.60

-0.28 - 5.26

-0.35 - 6.57

-0.42 - 7.89

-0.48 - 9.20

-0.15 - 1.02

-0.17 - 1.16

-0.19 - 1.31

-0.21 - 1.45

-0.25 - 1.74

-0.31 - 2.18

-0.42 - 2.91

-0.52 - 3.63

-0.62 - 4.36

-0.73 - 5.09

-0.83 - 5.81

-1.04 - 7.26

-1.25 - 8.72

-1.45 - 10.17

*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").

However, the throw ratio for ET-C1U100 is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").

*2 For ET-C1U100, fine text and images may not be displayed clearly during projection with the projected image size over 15.24 m (600").

48 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up r

When the image aspect ratio is 4:3

(Unit: m)

Lens type

Projection lens Model No.

Throw ratio *1

Projected image size

Diagonal

(SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

Width

(SW)

1.422

1.626

2.29 (90") 1.372

1.829

2.54 (100") 1.524

2.032

3.05 (120") 1.829

2.438

3.81 (150") 2.286

3.048

5.08 (200") 3.048

4.064

6.35 (250") 3.810

5.080

7.62 (300") 4.572

6.096

8.89 (350") 5.334

7.112

2.29

2.68

10.16 (400") 6.096

8.128

3.07

12.70 (500") 7.620

10.160

3.85

15.24 (600") 9.144

12.192

4.62

17.78 (700") 10.668

14.224

5.40

20.32 (800") 12.192

16.256

6.18

22.86 (900") 13.716

18.288

6.95

25.40 (1000") 15.240 20.320

7.73

0.74

0.90

1.13

1.52

1.91

ET-C1U100 *2

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

0.80

0.96

1.21

1.63

2.05

2.46

2.88

3.29

4.13

4.96

5.79

6.62

7.46

8.29

ET-C1W300

Min.

(LW)

0.93

1.07

1.21

1.34

1.62

2.03

Zoom Lens

ET-C1W400 ET-C1W500

0.371 - 0.398:1 0.660 - 0.830:1 0.820 - 1.14:1 1.13 - 1.67:1

Projection distance (L)

Standard zoom lens/ ET-C1S600

1.64 - 2.52:1

ET-C1T700

2.49 - 4.06:1

Max.

(LT)

1.17

1.34

1.51

1.69

2.03

2.55

Min.

(LW)

1.15

1.32

1.49

1.66

2.00

2.51

Max.

(LT)

1.61

1.85

2.09

2.32

2.79

3.50

Min.

(LW)

1.60

1.83

2.07

2.30

2.77

3.47

Max.

(LT)

2.36

2.71

3.05

3.39

4.08

5.11

Min.

(LW)

2.31

2.65

2.99

3.33

4.00

5.02

Max.

(LT)

3.57

4.09

4.61

5.13

6.17

7.73

Min.

(LW)

3.51

4.03

Max.

(LT)

5.75

6.58

4.54

5.06

7.42

8.25

6.09

9.92

7.63

12.42

2.72

3.41

4.10

4.79

3.41

4.27

5.14

6.00

3.36

4.21

5.06

5.91

4.68

5.86

7.05

8.23

4.63

5.80

6.83

8.55

6.72

10.32

10.21

16.59

8.42

12.92

12.79

20.75

6.96

10.27

10.11

15.51

15.36

24.92

8.13

11.99

11.81

18.11

17.94

29.09

5.47

6.85

6.86

8.59

6.76

9.41

9.30

13.71

13.51

20.71

20.51

33.25

8.46

11.77

11.63

17.15

16.90

25.90

25.66

41.59

8.23

10.31

10.16

14.13

13.96

20.59

20.29

31.09

30.82

49.92

9.60

12.04

11.86

16.49

16.30

24.03

23.68

36.28

35.97

58.26

Lens type

Projection lens Model No.

ET-C1U100

Zoom Lens

ET-C1W300

Standard zoom lens/

ET-C1W400 / ET-C1W500 /

ET-C1S600 / ET-C1T700

Projected image size

Diagonal (SD)

Height

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

17.78 (700")

20.32 (800")

22.86 (900")

25.40 (1000")

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

10.668

12.192

13.716

15.240

Width

(SW)

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080

6.096

7.112

8.128

10.160

12.192

14.224

16.256

18.288

20.320

0.00 - 1.52

0.00 - 1.83

0.00 - 2.29

0.00 - 3.05

0.00 - 3.81

0.00 - 4.57

0.00 - 5.33

0.00 - 6.10

0.00 - 7.62

0.00 - 9.14

0.00 - 10.67

0.00 - 12.19

0.00 - 13.72

0.00 - 15.24

Height position (H)

0.00 - 1.07

0.00 - 1.22

0.00 - 1.37

0.00 - 1.52

0.00 - 1.83

0.00 - 2.29

0.00 - 3.05

0.00 - 3.81

0.00 - 4.57

0.00 - 5.33

0.00 - 6.10

0.00 - 7.62

0.00 - 9.14

0.00 - 10.67

-0.11 - 1.17

-0.12 - 1.34

-0.14 - 1.51

-0.15 - 1.68

-0.18 - 2.01

-0.23 - 2.52

-0.31 - 3.35

-0.38 - 4.19

-0.46 - 5.03

-0.53 - 5.87

-0.61 - 6.71

-0.76 - 8.38

-0.91 - 10.06

-1.07 - 11.74

*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").

However, the throw ratio for ET-C1U100 is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").

*2 For ET-C1U100, fine text and images may not be displayed clearly during projection with the projected image size over 15.24 m (600").

ENGLISH - 49

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Setting up

Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens

To use a projected image size not listed in this manual, check the projected image size SD (m) and use the respective formula to calculate projection distance.

The unit of all the formulae is m. (Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.)

When calculating a projection distance using image size designation (value in inches), multiply the value in inches by 0.0254 and substitute it into SD in the formula for calculating the projection distance.

r

Zoom Lens

Projection lens Model No.

ET-C1U100

ET-C1W300

ET-C1W400

ET-C1W500

Standard zoom lens/

ET-C1S600

ET-C1T700

Throw ratio

0.308 - 0.330:1

0.308 - 0.331:1

0.371 - 0.398:1

0.550 - 0.690:1

0.550 - 0.690:1

0.660 - 0.830:1

0.680 - 0.950:1

0.680 - 0.950:1

0.820 - 1.14:1

0.940 - 1.39:1

0.940 - 1.39:1

1.13 - 1.67:1

1.36 - 2.10:1

1.36 - 2.10:1

1.64 - 2.52:1

2.07 - 3.38:1

2.07 - 3.38:1

2.49 - 4.06:1

Aspect ratio

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

Projection distance (L) formula

Min. (LW) Max. (LT)

=0.2700 × SD - 0.0348

=0.2895 × SD - 0.0353

=0.2775 × SD - 0.0348

=0.3057 × SD - 0.0348

=0.4787 × SD - 0.0322

=0.4920 × SD - 0.0322

=0.2975 × SD - 0.0353

=0.3277 × SD - 0.0353

=0.5998 × SD - 0.0376

=0.6165 × SD - 0.0376

=0.5420 × SD - 0.0322

=0.5913 × SD - 0.0416

=0.6078 × SD - 0.0416

=0.6694 × SD - 0.0416

=0.8114 × SD - 0.0344

=0.8339 × SD - 0.0344

=0.9185 × SD - 0.0344

=0.6791 × SD - 0.0376

=0.8212 × SD - 0.0389

=0.8440 × SD - 0.0389

=0.9297 × SD - 0.0389

=1.1958 × SD - 0.0448

=1.2291 × SD - 0.0448

=1.3538 × SD - 0.0448

=1.1800 × SD - 0.0668

=1.2128 × SD - 0.0668

=1.3358 × SD - 0.0668

=1.7915 × SD - 0.0929

=1.8413 × SD - 0.0929

=2.0282 × SD - 0.0929

=1.8057 × SD - 0.0631

=1.8559 × SD - 0.0631

=2.0442 × SD - 0.0631

=2.8985 × SD - 0.0835

=2.9791 × SD - 0.0835

=3.2813 × SD - 0.0835

Adjusting adjustable feet

Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the projection screen is rectangular.

If the screen is tilted downward, extend the front adjustable feet so that the projected image becomes rectangular.

The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.

Adjustable feet can be extended by turning them as shown in the figure. Turning them in the opposite direction will return them to the original position.

Maximum adjustable range

Adjustable feet : 30 mm (1-3/16") each

Attention f Be careful not to block the intake/exhaust vents with your hands or any objects when adjusting the adjustable feet while the light source is on.

( x page 35)

50 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens

Removing/attaching the projection lens

Removing and attaching methods of the projection lens are basically the same for both standard zoom lenses and optional lenses.

Move the projection lens to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. ( x page 84)

Attention f Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector.

f Do not touch the electric contacts of the projection lens. Dust or dirt may cause poor contact.

f Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.

f Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from the use of projection lenses which are not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.. Be sure to use the specified projection lenses.

Note f A ball point hex driver (diagonal 2.5 mm (3/32")) is required when removing/attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100). Use the ball point hex driver suppiled with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100) or a commercially available one.

f The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result.

For details on moving to the home position, refer to “Moving the projection lens to the home position” ( x page 84).

f

For the adjustment procedure of the focus, zoom, and lens shift after attaching the projector lens, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” ( x page 82).

f

For the adjustment procedure of the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image, refer to “Adjusting the focus balance”

( x page 83).

Removing the projection lens

Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.

Prepare a ball point hex driver (diagonal 2.5 mm (3/32")) when removing the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100).

Start from Step 2) when removing a projection lens other than the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100).

1) Loosen the four lens fixing screws with the ball point hex driver until the screws turn freely. (Fig. 1)

(Only for ET-C1U100)

Fig. 1

Lens fixing screws

ENGLISH - 51

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens

2) While pressing the lens release button( and remove(  ). (Fig. 2)

 ), turn the projection lens counterclockwise(  ) to the end

Projection lens

 Lens release button

Fig. 2

Attention f Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.

Attaching the projection lens

Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.

Start from Step 2) when the dustproof sponge is already removed.

Prepare a ball point hex driver (diagonal 2.5 mm (3/32")) when attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100).

1) Remove the dustproof sponge. (Fig. 1)

Fig. 1

Dustproof sponge

52 - ENGLISH

Projection lens

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Removing/attaching the projection lens

2) Align the protruding mark on the projection lens with the protruding mark of the projector, and insert the projection lens all the way in. (Fig. 2) f When inserting the projection lens, be careful not to damage the connector.

3) Turn the projection lens clockwise until it clicks. (Fig. 3) f Continue to perform Step 4) when attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100).

Protruding mark on the projector

Protruding mark on the projection lens

Connector

Projection lens

Fig. 2 Fig. 3

4) Secure the projection lens with the lens fixing screws. (Fig. 4)

(Only for ET-C1U100) f Tighten the lens fixing screws to the four screw holes near the projections lens by using the ball point hex driver.

g Firmly tighten the lens fixing screws in diagonal order while supporting the barrel of the projection lens from the bottom with your hand.

Lens fixing screws

Lens fixing screws

Screw holes

Fig. 4

Attention f Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to confirm that it does not come out.

f When attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100), be sure to support the barrel of the projection lens from the bottom with your hand while tightening the lens fixing screws. Failure to do so may cause inadequate tightening of the lens fixing screws.

f If the projection lens was replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] →

[LENS CALIBRATION].( x page 156)

ENGLISH - 53

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Installing the Function Board

Installing the Function Board

This projector is equipped with Intel ® Smart Display Module (Intel ® SDM) specification slot.

Optional Function Board or an interface board or module of other manufacturers supporting Intel ® SDM Small

(Intel ® SDM-S) or Intel ® SDM Large (Intel ® SDM-L) specification (collectively referred to as “Function Board” hereinafter) can be installed in the slot.

For the devices of other manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.

Requesting a qualified technician to install or remove the Function Board is recommended. A malfunction may occur due to static electricity. Consult your dealer.

Illustration of the Function Board is just an example.

Before installing or removing the Function Board

f Always turn off the power of the projector before installing or removing the Function Board.

g

Always follow the procedure of “Switching off the projector” ( x page 79)

when turning off the power.

f Do not touch the connector section of the Function Board directly with your hands.

g The component may be damaged by the static electricity.

f Remove the static electricity from your body by touching to surrounding metal, etc., in advance to prevent the static electricity damage.

f Take care not to get injured when installing or removing the Function Board.

g Hands may be injured by the opening of the blank slot or the edge of the bracket of the Function Board.

f When installing the Function Board to the slot, insert it into the connector straight and slowly.

g It may not operate or cause malfunction if it is not correctly installed.

f Confirm that there is no lead wires or installed parts that may obstruct installation to the slot in the area within approximately 3 mm (1/8") from the end face of the circuit board of the Function Board (sections A and B).

g The Function Board cannot be installed correctly due to interference with the slot guide rail or the SLOT adapter guide.

f When attaching the SLOT adapter, confirm that there is no circuitry within the area approximately 3 mm (1/8") from the end face of the circuit board in the SLOT adapter side (section B).

g If there is circuitry, secure insulation with the SLOT adapter guide (clasp) by affixing a masking tape, etc.

SLOT adapter

Circuit board Circuit board

A

Intel ® SDM-L specification

A B

Intel ® SDM-S specification

A

54 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Installing the Function Board

For Intel

®

SDM-S specification Function Board

Attach the supplied SLOT adapter in advance when installing a narrow width Intel ® SDM Small (Intel ® SDM-S) specification Function Board.

SLOT adapter

Guide

Function Board screw

Fig. 1

Hook

End face End face

SLOT adapter screw Fig. 2

Fig. 3

1) Remove one screw from the SLOT adapter. (Fig. 1) f Remove the screw at the side with the guide of the bracket on the SLOT adapter by rotating counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver.

2) Attach the Function Board to the SLOT adapter. (Fig. 2) f Insert and firmly push in the Function Board circuit board into the guide on the SLOT adapter.

f Confirm that the Function Board circuit board is in contact with the tip of the hook and the end faces (two locations) of the SLOT adapter.

3) Fix the Function Board. (Fig. 3) f

Securely tighten and fix the Function Board with the screw removed in Step 1)

.

f Confirm that the Function Board circuit board is pressed against the hook of the SLOT adapter.

Note f Function Board cannot be correctly installed in the slot unless the Function Board circuit board and the SLOT adapter circuit board are parallel in the same plane.

SLOT adapter

×

×

Circuit board

ENGLISH - 55

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Installing the Function Board

Installing the Function Board

Screws (two locations)

Guide rail

Screws (two locations)

Slot cover

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

1) Remove the slot cover. (Fig. 1) f Remove the two screws fixing the slot cover by rotating counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver. The removed screws are used to fix the Function Board.

f When removing the second screw, hold the slot cover with your hand so it will not fall.

f

To replace from another Function Board, remove the Function Board following the procedure in “Removing the Function Board” ( x page 56) .

2) Install the Function Board in the projector. (Fig. 2) f Insert the Function Board along the groove of the guide rail at both sides inside the slot. Insert the bracket firmly all the way in.

3) Fix the Function Board. (Fig. 3) f

Tighten and fix the Function Board with the two screws removed in Step 1)

.

Attention f The removed slot cover is required when the projector is used with the Function Board removed. Store it so that it can be attached in the future.

Removing the Function Board

Handles

Fig. 1

1) Remove the Function Board. (Fig. 1) f Remove the two screws fixing the Function Board by rotating counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver.

The removed screws are used to fix the slot cover.

f Hold the handles of the Function Board and remove it slowly.

2) Attach the slot cover.

f

Attach the stored slot cover, and tighten and fix with the two screws removed in Step 1) .

f

To replace with another Function Board, install the Function Board following the procedure in “Installing the

Function Board” ( x page 56) .

Attention f Always attach the slot cover on the blank slot.

f Store the removed Function Board inside an antistatic bag.

56 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Installing the Function Board

Installing the SFP module

The following is an example of installation procedure for the SFP module. Please also check the operating instructions and setup guide of the SFP module.

SFP ports SFP modules

Circuit boards

Fig. 1

1) Remove the port cover.

f Pull out the port cover of the SFP port.

2) Install the SFP module to the SFP port. (Fig. 1) f With the circuit board of the SFP module visible from the bottom, securely insert the SFP module all the way.

f Remove the protection cap on the <SDI OPT 1 IN> terminal, <SDI OPT 2 IN> terminal, or <SDI OPT OUT> terminal, if there is any, before using.

Attention f The removed port cover and the protection cap will be needed in following cases. Store them so that they can be attached in the future.

g When the SFP module not required anymore is removed g When there is a terminal not to be used g When storing the SFP module

ENGLISH - 57

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Installing the Function Board

Removing the SFP module

The following is an example of removal procedure for the SFP module. Please also check the operating instructions and setup guide of the SFP module.

Lever

Lever

Latch

SFP modules

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

1) Disconnect the optical fiber cable.

f If the optical fiber cable is connected to the SFP module, remove the cable while releasing the latch of the optical fiber cable.

2) Release the latch of the SFP module. (Fig. 1) f Pull down the lever on the SFP module to release the latch.

3) Remove the SFP module. (Fig. 2) f Hold the lever and slowly pull out the SFP module.

Attention f Make sure to attach the port cover on the SFP port that the SFP module is not installed.

f Store the removed SFP module with the protection cap, etc., attached so that dust does not accumulate or the SFP module does not get dirty.

58 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting

Connecting

Before connecting

f Before connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.

f Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.

f Connect cables taking care of the following descriptions. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.

g When connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.

g Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the projector or to the projector body. The longer the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.

g When connecting cables, connect GND first, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a straight manner.

f Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied with the device nor available as an option.

f To use the Function Board, install it in the slot in advance.

Requesting a qualified technician to install the Function Board in the slot or remove from the slot is recommended. A malfunction may occur due to static electricity. Consult your dealer.

For details on installing the Function Board in the slot, refer to “Installing the Function Board” ( x page 56)

.

f For the connection when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in the slot,

refer to “For <SDI 1 IN> / <SDI 2 IN> / <SDI 3 IN> / <SDI 4 IN> / <SDI OUT> terminals of the Function Board”

( x page 60)

.

f For the connection when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed

in the slot, refer to “For <SDI OPT 1 IN> / <SDI OPT 2 IN> / <SDI OPT OUT> terminals of the Function Board”

( x page 61). For details on installing the SFP Module to the Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.:

TY-SB01FB), refer to “Installing the SFP module” ( x page 57).

f For the connection when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the

slot, refer to “Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK” ( x page 63) .

f When the projector is used with the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.:

TY-SB01WP) or an interface board or module by other manufacturers installed in the slot, refer to the respective

Operating Instructions.

f If synchronization signals output from computers or video equipment are disrupted due to changes in the video output setting or other reasons, colors of projected images may be temporarily disrupted.

f For the connection when linking multiple projectors and using the contrast synchronization function and the

shutter synchronization function, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/ shutter synchronization function” ( x page 65)

.

f Some computer models or graphic cards are not compatible with the projector.

f If connecting the projector to a computer that uses an early-type chipset or graphics card compatible with

DisplayPort, the projector or computer may not be operated properly when the signal output from DisplayPort on the computer is input to the projector. In such a case, switch off the projector or computer and then switch it on.

If the signal output from DisplayPort is input to the projector, use of the computer equipped with the latest chipset or graphics card is recommended.

f Connect using an extension device, etc., when installing the projector away from the video equipment. The projector may not display the image properly when it is connected directly using a long cable.

f

For details of the types of image signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”

( x page 294).

ENGLISH - 59

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting

Connecting example: AV equipment

For <HDMI IN 1> / <HDMI IN 2> terminals

Blu-ray disc player

Note f When HDMI signal is input, switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected external device or the input signal.

f For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when the following 4K image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use the HDMI cable supporting the high speed transmission of 18 Gbps such as the one with Premium HDMI cable authentication.

g An image signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit

Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when an image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is input.

f The <HDMI IN 1> / <HDMI IN 2> terminals of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an

HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.

For <SDI 1 IN> / <SDI 2 IN> / <SDI 3 IN> / <SDI 4 IN> / <SDI OUT> terminals of the Function Board

This is an example when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>.

12G-SDI signal output compatible device f Directly connect the projector with the external device that will output the signal without going through a distributor, etc., when inputting quad link signals. A phase difference is generated between the signals of Link 1, Link 2, Link 3, and Link 4, and the image may not be projected correctly.

f An error in signal detection may occur when an unsteady signal is input to the projector. In such case, set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →

[SLOT IN] to the content corresponding to the input signal.

For <SDI OPT 1 IN> / <SDI OPT 2 IN> / <SDI OPT OUT> terminals of the Function Board

This is an example when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in

<SLOT>.

12G-SDI signal output compatible device

HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, 12G-SDI signal

SDI - optical converter

Optical fiber cable

SDI OPT

1 IN OUT 2 IN

12G/3G/HD

SIGNAL

TY-SB01FB

SDI OPT

1 IN OUT 2 IN

12G/3G/HD

SIGNAL

TY-SB01FB

Attention f The SFP module to be installed on this product is a Class 1 laser product. Do not look into the SFP module or the connector of the optical fiber cable with the power of the projector turned on. Your eyes may be damaged when the laser goes into your eyes.

Note f Prepare the commercially available SFP module and the optical fiber cable required for connection according to the usage, video signal to be input, specification of the external device to be connected, etc.

f The transmission distance may become shorter and the image may not display correctly when there is dust on the connector of the SFP module or optical fiber cable, or it is dirty. Attach the protection cap or cover supplied by each product to the connector of the SFP module or the optical fiber cable if the optical fiber cable is not connected.

HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, 12G-SDI signal

Note f Use a cable of 5C-FB or higher (such as 5C-FB or 7C-FB) to properly transmit images when transmitting the HD-SDI signal or the 3G-SDI signal. It is recommended to use a cable of L-5.5CUHD manufactured by Canare Electric Co., Ltd. when transmitting the 12G-SDI signal. f The maximum cable length that can be used is as follows. However, this maximum cable length is a rough guideline, and does not guarantee the transmission distance.

g Input and output of HD-SDI signal and 3G-SDI signal: 100 m (328'1") g Input of 12G-SDI signal: 80 m (262'6") (when using a cable of L-5.5CUHD), 20 m (65'7") (when using a cable of 5C-FB) g Output of 12G-SDI signal: 50 m (164'1") (when using a cable of L-5.5CUHD), 20 m (65'7") (when using a cable of 5C-FB) f Use the BNC connector that is compatible with the coaxial cable and type of the signal to be used.

f Setting the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] is required depending on the connected external device or the input signal.

f The <SDI OUT> terminal is an active through terminal to output the SDI signal (HD-SDI/3G-SDI/12G-SDI) input to the <SDI 1 IN> terminal.

f The <SDI 2 IN> / <SDI 3 IN> / <SDI 4 IN> terminals are used when the quad link signal is input. These terminals do not support input of

12G-SDI signal.

f To input the quad link signal, use the cable with same length and same type for connecting to each of <SDI 1 IN> / <SDI 2 IN> / <SDI 3 IN>

/ <SDI 4 IN> terminals. The image may not be projected correctly when the difference of the cable length is 4 m (13'1") or more.

60 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting f Directly connect the projector with the external device that will output the signal without going through a distributor, etc., when inputting quad link signals. A phase difference is generated between the signals of Link 1, Link 2, Link 3, and Link 4, and the image may not be projected correctly.

f An error in signal detection may occur when an unsteady signal is input to the projector. In such case, set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →

[SLOT IN] to the content corresponding to the input signal.

For <SDI OPT 1 IN> / <SDI OPT 2 IN> / <SDI OPT OUT> terminals of the Function Board

This is an example when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in

<SLOT>.

12G-SDI signal output compatible device

HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, 12G-SDI signal

SDI - optical converter

Optical fiber cable

SDI OPT

1 IN OUT 2 IN

12G/3G/HD

SIGNAL

TY-SB01FB

SDI OPT

1 IN OUT 2 IN

12G/3G/HD

SIGNAL

TY-SB01FB

Attention f The SFP module to be installed on this product is a Class 1 laser product. Do not look into the SFP module or the connector of the optical fiber cable with the power of the projector turned on. Your eyes may be damaged when the laser goes into your eyes.

Note f Prepare the commercially available SFP module and the optical fiber cable required for connection according to the usage, video signal to be input, specification of the external device to be connected, etc.

f The transmission distance may become shorter and the image may not display correctly when there is dust on the connector of the SFP module or optical fiber cable, or it is dirty. Attach the protection cap or cover supplied by each product to the connector of the SFP module or the optical fiber cable if the optical fiber cable is not connected.

ENGLISH - 61

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting

Connecting example: Computers

Control computer

Control computer

Computer

Computer

Attention f When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially available shielded cables.

Note f When HDMI signal is input, switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected external device or the input signal.

f For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when the following 4K image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use the HDMI cable supporting the high speed transmission of 18 Gbps such as the one with Premium HDMI cable authentication.

g An image signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit

Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when an image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is input.

f The <HDMI IN 1> / <HDMI IN 2> terminals of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an

HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.

f When DisplayPort signal is input, switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DisplayPort IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected external device or the input signal.

f For the DisplayPort cable, use a DisplayPort cable that conforms to the DisplayPort standards. When a cable that does not conform to the

DisplayPort standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.

f If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate the projector.

62 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting

Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK

This is an example when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in

<SLOT>.

The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal/<DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal are terminals equipped on the optional

DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL).

Connecting with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter

Twisted-pair-cable transmitters based on the communication standard HDBaseT TM such as the optional DIGITAL

LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) use the twisted pair cable to transmit input images, Ethernet, and serial control signal, and the projector can input such digital signal to the <DIGITAL

LINK IN/LAN> terminal.

Projector connecting terminals

Computer

TY-SB01DL

POWER

DIGITAL LINK OUT

LINK

HDCP

DIGITAL LINK IN / LAN

LINK

HDCP

Computer cable

(commercially available)

Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter

HDMI cable

(commercially available)

Switching hub

VCR

(with built-in TBC)

Blu-ray disc player

Control computer *1

*1 Control target is the projector or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. The control itself may not be possible depending on the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. Check the operating instructions of the device to be connected.

Attention f Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.

g Use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC).

g Use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.

f If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be disrupted. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the external devices.

f Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. Image may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.

f For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria: g Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards g Shielded type (including connectors) g Straight-through g Single wire g Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.) f When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with

CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.

When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.

f Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.

f When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturers, do not place another twisted-paircable transmitter between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers and the projector. This may cause image to be disrupted.

f To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET

TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

f To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL

LINK].

f The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

ENGLISH - 63

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting f Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.

f To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector without any loops.

f Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.

f When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.

f After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL

QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality. ( x page 203)

Note f

For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.

f

The optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET-YFB100G) and the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET-YFB200G) do not support the input and output of the 4K image signal.

f

The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance is 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz) for the long-reach communication method. If these distances are exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN communication. Please note that Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. does not support the use of the projector outside the maximum transmission distance. When connecting with the long reach, image signal or distance that can be transmitted may be restricted, depending on the specification of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

f

For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic

Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.

Linking multiple displays devices

The <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal is a terminal to output DIGITAL LINK signal (including audio signal) input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal.

By connecting multiple display devices (projectors or flat panel displays) supporting the DIGITAL LINK connection in a daisy chain, it is possible to transmit image, audio, and serial control signals with a twisted pair cable.

Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter

Projector connecting terminals

TY-SB01DL

POWER

DIGITAL LINK OUT

LINK

HDCP

DIGITAL LINK IN

/

LAN

LINK

HDCP

Projector connecting terminals

TY-SB01DL

POWER

DIGITAL LINK OUT

LINK

HDCP

DIGITAL LINK IN

/

LAN

LINK

HDCP

Note f To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET

TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

However, only the first display device can received the Ethernet signal.

f The DIGITAL LINK signal is output only when a display device (projector or flat panel display) that corresponds to any of the following is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

g Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. display device supporting the DIGITAL LINK input g Display device installed with the Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board supporting the DIGITAL LINK input f Up to 10 devices can be daisy chained. However, the image may not be displayed due to degraded signal quality depending on the connected devices or the used cables.

f Maximum number of connected devices is restricted to eight devices when inputting an image signal protected with HDCP 1.X.

f Maximum number of connected devices is restricted to five devices when inputting an image signal protected with HDCP 2.X.

f When the projector is in standby mode, the DIGITAL LINK signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is not output from the

<DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

64 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting

Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function

In a case to construct a multi-display by linking projected images from multiple projectors, following functions can be used by synchronizing multiple projectors using the <MULTI SYNC IN> / <MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals or the

<SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals.

f Contrast synchronization function

A linked screen with balanced contrast can be displayed by sharing the brightness level of the image signal displaying in each projector.

To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each synchronized projector as follows.

g Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].

Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that is synchronized. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.

g Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [CONTRAST SYNC] to [ON].

Unify the [CONTRAST MODE] setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] for each linked projector to [1] or [2]. If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, unify the setting to [1].

f Shutter synchronization function

This is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out operation can be synchronized.

To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each synchronized projector as follows.

g Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].

Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source within the linked projectors. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.

g Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [SHUTTER SYNC] to [ON].

Unify the [CONTRAST MODE] setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] for each linked projector to [1] or [2]. If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, unify the setting to [1].

Connecting example

Connect all the projectors to be linked in a loop by daisy chain connection when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function. The number of linked projectors is limited to the maximum of 64 projectors.

r

For <MULTI SYNC IN> / <MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals

Connecting terminals of the synchronization source Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize

Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize

Note f The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.

f For details on the settings of the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR

SETUP] menu →

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] ( x page 176) .

ENGLISH - 65

Chapter 2   Getting Started — Connecting f The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are the same as the following setting items.

g The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] f If there are any projectors which you do not want to synchronize within the linked projectors, set [CONTRAST SYNC] and [SHUTTER

SYNC] to [OFF] individually.

f The shutter synchronization function will operate even when there are different models within the linked projectors. However, the synchronization function will not operate when there is a DLP projector that is constructed with three DLP chips within the linked projectors.

f To use the <MULTI SYNC IN> / <MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] →

[TERMINAL SELECT] to [BNC].

r

For <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals

Communication cable (straight all connected) Communication cable (straight all connected)

Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize

Communication cable (straight all connected)

Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize

Communication cable (straight all connected)

Connecting terminals of the synchronization source Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize

Note f The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.

f For details on the settings of the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR

SETUP] menu →

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] ( x page 176) .

f The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are the same as the following setting items.

g The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] f If there are any projectors which you do not want to synchronize within the linked projectors, set [CONTRAST SYNC] and [SHUTTER

SYNC] to [OFF] individually.

f The shutter synchronization function will operate even when there are different models within the linked projectors. However, the synchronization function will not operate when there is a DLP projector that is constructed with three DLP chips within the linked projectors.

f To use the <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [TERMINAL

SELECT] to [SERIAL].

66 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3 Basic Operations

This chapter describes basic operations to start with.

ENGLISH - 67

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Switching on/off the projector

Connecting the power cord

Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely fixed to the <AC IN> terminal of the projector to prevent it from being removed easily.

Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the supplied power cord to the projector.

Use the power cord matching with the power supply voltage and the shape of the outlet.

For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this first!” ( x page 6). For the shape of the outlet, refer to

“Usable outlet” ( x page 42)

.

Note f The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.

How to attach the power cord

Power cord holder

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Fig. 3 Fig. 4

1) Confirm that the power cord holder is raised so that the power cord can be inserted. (Fig. 1)

2) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector and the power cord connector, then insert the connector completely in the correct direction. (Fig. 2)

3) Lower the power cord holder. (Fig. 3)

4) Press down the power cord holder until the end of the power cord holder snaps onto the power cord to secure the power cord. (Fig. 4) f When pressing down and snapping the power cord holder onto the power cord, hold the power cord from the opposite side to avoid excessive force to be applied on the <AC IN> terminal.

How to remove the power cord

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector is on the <OFF> side, and remove the power plug from the outlet.

68 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

2) Raise the power cord holder fixing the power cord upward. (Fig. 1) f Fix the power cord holder by snapping into the projector.

3) While holding the power cord connector, pull out the power cord from the <AC IN> terminal of the projector. (Fig. 2)

Power indicator

Indicate the status of the power. Check the status of the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> before operating the projector.

Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>

Indicator status

Off

Red

Green

Orange

Lit

Blinking

Lit

Lit

Projector status

The main power is switched off.

The power is switched off. (standby mode)

Projection will start when the <POWER ON> button is pressed.

f The setting of the projector is as follows.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].

f The projector may not operate when the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2>

or the temperature indicator <TEMP> are blinking. ( x page 267)

The power is switched off. (standby mode)

Projection will start when the <POWER ON> button is pressed.

f The projector is in one of the following states.

g

The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON].

g The output image corresponding to the projected image from the projector is being

check by the web control function. For details, refer to “[Remote preview lite] page”

( x page 225)

.

f The indicator will change to a red light when the specified time has elapsed after the projector enters the standby mode if the projector is set to the following. However, the indicator will not change to a red light while the output image is being checked by the web control function.

The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK

STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON].

f The projector may not operate when the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2>

or the temperature indicator <TEMP> are blinking. ( x page 267)

Projecting.

The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.

The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)

Note f While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.

f For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on. Turn on the power again after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red.

f

The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red). Refer to “Standby mode power consumption” ( x page 291) for the standby mode power consumption.

ENGLISH - 69

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector f When the projector receives the signal from the remote control, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink in the following color according to the status of the projector.

g When the projector is in projection mode: Green g When the projector is in standby mode: Orange

However, if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the indicator will stay lit red and will not blink if the projector is in standby mode.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink green slowly while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), or while the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] →

[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] ( x page 172) is operating and the

light source is turned off.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will not blink in following cases.

g When [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INDICATOR SETTING] → [INDICATOR MODE] is set to [OFF] g When [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INDICATOR SETTING] → [INDICATOR MODE] is set to [TIMEOUT] and the indicator-off function is enabled

Switching on the projector

When using the optional projection lens, attach the projection lens before switching on the projector.

Remove the lens cover first.

4)

4)

3) 2) 1)

1) Connect the power cord to the projector.

2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.

3) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red, and the projector enters the standby mode.

4) Press the <POWER ON> button.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights green and the image is soon projected on the screen.

Note f A warm-up period of up to approximately five minutes may be necessary until an image is displayed when the projector is switched on at around 0 °C (32 °F).

The temperature indicator <TEMP> lights red during the warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed, the temperature indicator

<TEMP> turns off and the projection starts. Refer to “When an indicator lights up” ( x page 267) for the indicator status display.

f If the operating environment temperature is low and warm-up takes more than five minutes, the projector will judge that a problem has occurred and the power will automatically be set to standby mode. In such case, increase the operating environment temperature to 0 °C

(32 °F) or higher, turn off the main power, and then turn on the power again.

f It will take longer to start the projection when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] compared to the time when it is set to [NORMAL].

f Projection will start in approximately one second when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON] and if the power is turned on within a specified time after going into the standby mode.

The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].

f If the power is turned on while the output image is being checked by the web control function, the image will be projected approximately one second after the power is turned on.

f When the power is turned on or an input signal is switched, you may hear a high-frequency driving sound. This is not a malfunction.

f If the power was turned off by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by using the breaker directly while projecting at the previous use, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights up green and an image is projected after a while when the power is turned on by pressing the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch or by turning the breaker on with the power plug connected to the outlet. This applies only when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] is set to [LAST MEMORY].

70 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

When the initial setting screen is displayed

When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after the projection starts, followed by the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen. If the

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY] is executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR

ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after the projection starts. Set them according to the circumstances.

In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.

If you press the <MENU> button while the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed, you can go back to the previous screen.

Focus adjustment

Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.

You may also need to adjust the zoom and lens shift.

Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” ( x page 82) for details.

LENS

FOCUS

FOCUS POSITION

ADJUST

52

1) Press asqw to adjust the focus.

2) Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.

Initial setting (display language)

Select the language to show on the screen.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.

1) Press as to select the display language.

INITIAL SETTING 1/7

Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE.

ENTER

SELECT

SET

2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

ENGLISH - 71

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Initial setting (operation setting)

Set the items for the operating method depending on the projector’s application and duration of usage.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the brightness decreases to half may shorten or the brightness may decrease.

This initial setting (operation setting) is prepared to complete the settings simply at once during the installation when the operation of the projector is predetermined. This cannot set all the items regarding the operation setting.

When the detailed setting is required or setting change is required, ask the person responsible for this projector

(such as a person in charge of equipment or operation).

2/7 INITIAL SETTING

OPERATING MODE

LIGHT OUTPUT

Set the way to use the projector.

For details, please refer to the operating instructions "When the initial setting screen is displayed".

NORMAL

100.0%

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

CHANGE

Note f

For the relationship between the brightness and the runtime, refer to “Relationship between brightness and runtime” ( x

page 73)

.

f

For details on each setting item, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING].

1) Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NORMAL]

[ECO]

Set this item to prioritize the brightness. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours *1 .

The brightness will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to prioritize the life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours *1 .

The brightness will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to prioritize the operation with low noise. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours *1 .

[QUIET]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[USER3]

Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] as desired.

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

The value of runtime is just an estimate, and is not the warranty period.

3) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].

4) Press qw to adjust.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Brightness

The screen becomes brighter.

Runtime

The runtime becomes shorter.

The screen becomes darker.

The runtime becomes longer.

Range of adjustment

5.0 % - 100.0 % *1

*1 The upper limit of the adjustment range is the value set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [MAX LIGHT

OUTPUT LEVEL].

5) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

72 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Relationship between brightness and runtime

The projector can be operated with arbitrary brightness and runtime by setting [LIGHT OUTPUT] to desired setting.

The relationship between the [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting, brightness, and the estimated runtime is as follows. Make the initial setting (operation setting) depending on the desired brightness of the projected image and runtime.

The values of the brightness and the runtime are just an estimate, and the graph indicating the relationship is just an example. Also, these do not indicate the warranty period.

r

PT‑REZ12

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

100

90

80

70

60

50

Brightness (lm)

12 000

10 800

9 600

8 400

7 200

6 000

Estimated runtime

20 000

21 500

24 000

27 000

30 700

35 200

*1 (hours)

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

100.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20 000 23 040 26 080 29 120 32 160

Estimated runtime (hours)

12 000

6 000

35 200 r

PT‑REZ10

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

100

90

80

70

60

50

Brightness (lm)

10 000

9 000

8 000

7 000

6 000

5 000

Estimated runtime

20 000

21 400

24 000

27 100

30 700

35 300

*1 (hours)

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

10 000 100.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20 000 23 060 26 120 29 180 32 240

Estimated runtime (hours)

5 000

35 300

ENGLISH - 73

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector r

PT‑REZ80

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

100

90

80

70

60

50

Brightness (lm)

8 000

7 200

6 400

5 600

4 800

4 000

Estimated runtime

20 000

21 300

24 000

27 200

31 000

35 600

*1 (hours)

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

100.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20 000

8 000

4 000

23 120 26 240 29 360 32 480

Estimated runtime (hours)

35 600

Note f Under influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation environment, etc., the runtime may be shorter than the estimation.

f If the consolidated runtime of the projector exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. The consolidated runtime can be confirmed in the [STATUS] screen. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] for details.

f After completed the initial setting, the wider the combination of luminance and runtime becomes by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] to [AUTO] or [PC]. Refer to the

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] for details.

Initial setting (installation setting)

Set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode.

Refer to “Installation mode” ( x page 42) for details.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[PROJECTION METHOD].

1) Press qw to switch the setting.

INITIAL SETTING

PROJECTION METHOD

FRONT/REAR

FLOOR/CEILING

Change the projection method

(FRONT/REAR, FLOOR/CEILING) if the screen display is upside down or inverted.

FRONT

AUTO

3/7

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

CHANGE

2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

74 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Initial setting (standby mode)

Set the operation mode during standby. The factory default setting is [NORMAL], which allows you to use the network function during standby. To keep power consumption low during standby, set this item to [ECO].

After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[STANDBY MODE].

1) Press qw to switch the setting.

INITIAL SETTING 4/7

STANDBY MODE NORMAL

When set to ECO, network functions and SERIAL OUT terminal, DC OUT terminal, and some RS-232C commands are not available during standby.

ENTER

CHANGE

SET

2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

Initial setting (screen setting)

Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →

[SCREEN SETTING].

1) Press qw to switch the setting.

f The setting will change each time you press the button.

INITIAL SETTING

SCREEN FORMAT

SCREEN POSITION

Set as necessary for the screen in use.

16:10

5/7

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

CHANGE

2) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].

f [SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].

3) Press qw to adjust.

INITIAL SETTING

SCREEN FORMAT

SCREEN POSITION

Set as necessary for the screen in use.

16:9

0

5/7

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

CHANGE

4) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

ENGLISH - 75

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Initial setting (time zone)

Set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE

AND TIME]. The current settings are displayed in [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME].

1) Press qw to switch the setting.

INITIAL SETTING

TIME ZONE

LOCAL DATE

+09:00

20XX/01/01

6/7

LOCAL TIME 12 : 34 : 56

Please set up a time zone according to the area of your country or region.

ENTER

CHANGE

SET

2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

Note f In the factory default setting, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korea Standard Time). Change the setting of the

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.

Initial setting (date and time)

Set the local date and time.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE

AND TIME].

To set the date and time automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically” ( x page 174)

.

1) Press as to select an item.

INITIAL SETTING

YEAR

MONTH

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

Please set the date and time of the built-in clock of the projector.

20XX

1

1

12

34

56

7/7

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

CHANGE

2) Press qw to switch the setting.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f Confirm the setting value and complete the initial setting.

When the administrator account setting screen is displayed

When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] is executed, the focus adjustment screen, the [INITIAL SETTING] screen, and then the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed in order after the projection starts. If the

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY] is executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR

ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after the projection starts.

When using the network function of the projector, set a user name and password of the administrator account. It can be set later in the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].

76 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

[PASSWORD POLICY]

Display a policy about the password of the administrator account.

1) Press as to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD POLICY] screen is displayed.

f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen.

PASSWORD POLICY

Reusing passwords is not recommended.

Password cannot be blank.

A password consisting of at least eight half-width characters and contaning characters of at least three of the following four types is recommended.

Uppercase letters

Lowercase letters

Digits

Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)

MENU

RETURN

Setting the administrator account

Set the user name and password of the account with administrator rights.

1) Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER NAME] screen is displayed.

f The factory default setting of the user name for the administrator account is set to “dispadmin”.

2) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Up to 16 characters can be entered.

3) After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

5) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Up to 16 characters can be entered.

f A password cannot be blank.

6) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

8) Enter the password entered in Step

5)

.

9) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

10) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

For limitation of the character string that can be set as a password, refer to “[PASSWORD POLICY]” ( x page 77)

.

f Pressing the <MENU> button while the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed enables to advance to the next operation without setting the password of the administrator account but network function of the projector will not be able to be used. When using the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.

ENGLISH - 77

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector f When pressing the <MENU> button while the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed, the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen will not be displayed from the next time the projector is switched on. To use the network function, set a password in the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].

f

The user name and password of the administrator account can also be changed in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web control screen.

f

The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web control screen.

Making adjustments and selections

Perform the image adjustment when the projected image has stabilized.

It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern

displayed. For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” ( x page 192) .

4) 1) 6) 7) 8) 9)

2) 3)

1) 8) 6)

7) 9)

2) 3)

4)

5)

4)

1)

Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the projected image. ( x page 82)

2) Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the

installation mode. ( x page 42)

f

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

3) Execute the lens calibration.

f Execute the lens calibration when using the projector for the first time after attaching the projection lens.

( x page 156)

4) Select the input by pressing the input selection button on the remote control or the control panel.

f The buttons that can be used on the remote control or the control panel are as follows.

Remote control:

<HDMI 1> button, <HDMI 2> button, <DISPLAYPORT> button, <SLOT> button

Control panel:

<HDMI 1/2> button, <DISPLAYPORT> button, <SLOT> button f

For details of operation for input selection, refer to “Selecting the input signal” ( x page 80)

.

5)

Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. ( x page 50)

6) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the projected image.

7) Press the <ZOOM> button to match the projected image size to the screen.

8) Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.

9) Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom and match the projected image size to the screen.

Note f When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY

RESET] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after the projection starts, followed by the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen. If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY] is executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]

screen is displayed after the projection starts. For details, refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed” ( x

page 71), “When the administrator account setting screen is displayed” ( x page 76) .

78 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Switching off the projector

3)

4)

1)

1)

2)

2)

1) Press the <STANDBY> button.

f The [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.

2) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

(Or press the <STANDBY> button again.) f Projection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body lights in orange. (The fan keeps running.)

3) Wait for a few seconds until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> of the projector body lights/ blinks red.

4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.

Note f

For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on.

f

Even when the <STANDBY> button is pressed and the projector is switched off, the projector consumes power if the main power of the projector is on.

Usage of some functions is restricted but the power consumption during the standby mode is conserved when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].

f

While projecting, the power can be turned off by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch, or by directly using the breaker under conditions where the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be switched off/on easily such as while installing on the ceiling.

However, the settings or adjustments performed right before the power is turned off may not be reflected.

ENGLISH - 79

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Projecting

Projecting

Check the projection lens attachment ( x

page 52), external device connection ( x page 59), and power cord

connection

( x

page 68), and then switch on the power ( x page 70) to start projecting. Select the video for

projection, and adjust appearance of the projected image.

Selecting the input signal

The input of the image to project can be switched. Method to switch the input is as follows.

f Press the input selection button on the remote control and directly specify the input of the image to project.

f Press the input selection button on the control panel and directly specify the input of the image to project.

f Display the input selection screen and select the input of the image to project from the list.

Remote Control Control Panel

Switching the input directly with the remote control

The input of the image to project can be switched by directly specifying it with the input selection button on the remote control.

1) Press the input selection button (<HDMI 1>, <HDMI 2>, <DISPLAYPORT>, <SLOT>).

<HDMI 1>

<HDMI 2>

<DISPLAYPORT>

<SLOT>

Switches the input to HDMI.

The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal is projected.

Switches the input to HDMI.

The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN 2> terminal is projected.

Switches the input to DisplayPort.

The image of the signal input to the <DisplayPort IN> terminal is projected.

Switches the input to SDI, SDI OPT1, SDI OPT2, DIGITAL LINK, PressIT, or SLOT.

Displays the image from the Function Board installed in the slot.

Every time the button is pressed, the input is switched between SDI OPT1 and SDI OPT2 when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot and both the SFP module for receiving and the SFP module for sending/receiving are installed to the SFP ports.

Attention f Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.

Depending on the selected input, set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] and the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN].

f Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu →

[ASPECT].

Note f When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot, the input on the DIGITAL LINK output supported device changes each time the <SLOT> button is pressed. The input can also be changed using the RS-232C control command.

For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

f When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot, if neither SFP module for receiving nor SFP module for sending/receiving is installed in the SFP port, the input will be treated as the status that there is no input signal.

f The operation when the <HDMI1> button, <HDMI2> button, <DISPLAYPORT> button or <SLOT> button is pressed can be fixed to operation to switch to the specified input using the [SECURITY] menu → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

f When the projector is in standby mode, current input selection status cannot be changed even if the input selection button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed.

80 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Projecting

Switching the input directly with the control panel

The input of the image to project can be switched by directly specifying it with the input selection button on the control panel.

1) Press the input selection button (<HDMI 1/2>, <DISPLAYPORT>, <SLOT>).

<HDMI 1/2>

<DISPLAYPORT>

<SLOT>

Switches the input to HDMI.

The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal is projected.

Switches to the other input when one input has already been selected.

Switches the input to DisplayPort.

The image of the signal input to the <DisplayPort IN> terminal is projected.

Switches the input to SDI, SDI OPT1, SDI OPT2, DIGITAL LINK, PressIT, or SLOT.

Displays the image from the Function Board installed in the slot.

Attention f Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.

Depending on the selected input, set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] and the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN].

f Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu →

[ASPECT].

Note f When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot, if neither SFP module for receiving nor SFP module for sending/receiving is installed in the SFP port, the input will be treated as the status that there is no input signal.

f The operation when the <HDMI 1/2> button, <DISPLAYPORT> button or <SLOT> button is pressed can be fixed to operation to switch to the specified input using the [SECURITY] menu → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

f When the projector is in standby mode, current input selection status cannot be changed even if the input selection button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed.

Switching the input by displaying the input selection screen

The input of the image for projection can be selected by displaying the input selection screen.

1) Press the <INPUT MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

f Press the input selection button on the remote control and directly specify the input of the image to project.

The following input selection screen is an example when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model

No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>.

INPUT SELECT

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]

ENTER

SELECT

SET

2) Press the <INPUT MENU> button again.

f The input will switch each time you press the <INPUT MENU> button.

Note f Input can be switched by pressing as to select the input of the image for projection and pressing the <ENTER> button while the input selection screen is displayed.

f If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot, the input selection menu for the DIGITAL

LINK output supported device is displayed when the <ENTER> button is pressed while the DIGITAL LINK input is selected in the input selection screen.

f If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot, the DIGITAL LINK logo and the input name selected in the DIGITAL LINK output supported device are displayed in the display section of the [DIGITAL LINK] in the input selection screen.

f When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot, if neither SFP module for receiving nor SFP module for sending/receiving is installed in the SFP port, the input will be treated as the status that there is no input signal.

ENGLISH - 81

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Projecting f The display for the input varies depending on the installed Function Board.

g [SDI [SLOT]]: 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) g [SDI OPT1 [SLOT]] / [SDI OPT2[SLOT]]: Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) g [DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]]: DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) g [PressIT [SLOT]]: Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) g [SLOT]: Function Board by other manufacturers f PressIT is a nickname of “Wireless Presentation System”.

Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift

Adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift if the image projected to the screen or its position is shifted even if the projector and the screen are set up in the correct positions.

f

When the following projection lens is used, also refer to “Adjusting the focus balance” ( x page 83) .

g Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500)

Using the control panel

1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.

f Pressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].

2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.

Using the remote control

1) Press the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) on the remote control.

f Pressing the <FOCUS> button: Adjusts the focus (adjustment of the lens focus position).

f Pressing the <ZOOM> button: Adjusts the zoom (adjustment of the lens zoom position).

f Pressing the <SHIFT> button: Adjusts the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens).

2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.

CAUTION

During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in any opening around the lens.

Your hand may be caught in between, resulting to injury.

Note f When the projection lens without the zoom function is attached, the zoom adjustment screen is not displayed.

f The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw while adjusting the focus or zoom.

f The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw for approximately three seconds or longer while adjusting the lens shift.

f It is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed.

For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” ( x page 192) .

f Only [FOCUS] is shown in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the projector is not focused and displayed characters are unreadable. (Factory default)

The displayed color of [FOCUS] differs depending on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD

COLOR].

f When the projector is switched off during the lens shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the projector is switched on.

( x page 156)

f If the main power is turned off during the lens shift adjustment, a lens calibration error screen is displayed during the next lens shift adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION].

f Request a repair to your dealer if the lens calibration error screen is displayed even though the lens calibration is executed.

82 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Projecting

Adjusting the focus balance

By changing the projected image size, the focus balance in the center and periphery of the image may be lost.

f When the following projection lens is used, the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image can be adjusted on the projection lens side.

g Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500)

1) Adjust the focus at the center of projected image.

f

For the steps to adjust the focus, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” ( x page 82)

.

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PERIPHERY FOCUS] adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to adjust.

4) Press the <ENTER> button again.

f The [FOCUS] adjustment screen is displayed.

5) Press asqw to adjust the focus at the center of the image.

f Check the focus at the center and periphery of the image and and make fine adjustments.

f The projected image size may change when the focus in the periphery of the image is adjusted.

Check the projected image size too when adjusting the focus balance in the center and periphery of the image.

Note f When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] →

[LENS CALIBRATION].

Executing the lens calibration

Detect the lens shift adjustment limit value, and perform the calibration in the adjustment range. Execute the lens calibration after attaching the projection lens.

1) Press the <MENU> button.

f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

2) Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [LENS].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].

7) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The lens calibration is started. f After completing the calibration in the adjustment range, the projection lens will move to the home position.

f To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Note f Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration execution.

f For details of operation, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] →

[LENS CALIBRATION] ( x page 156)

.

f The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result. It does not match with the optical image center position.

ENGLISH - 83

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Projecting

Moving the projection lens to the home position

Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.

When operating from the main menu

1) Press the <MENU> button.

f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

2) Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [LENS].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [LENS HOME POSITION].

7) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The projection lens is moved to the home position.

Note f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.

f The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result. It does not match with the optical image center position.

When operating from the lens shift adjustment screen

1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while displaying the lens shift adjustment screen.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

2) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The projection lens is moved to the home position.

Note f The [HOME POSITION] screen can also be displayed by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the remote control for three seconds or longer.

f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.

84 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Projecting

Lens shift range

The projector can adjust the position of the projected image within the lens shift range for each projection lens based on the optical center position of the image (standard projection position). Optical center position of the image is an image position based on the optical axis center of the projector body.

Perform the lens shift adjustment within the range indicated in the following illustration. Note that moving the lens outside the adjustment range may change the focus. This is because the shift of the lens is restricted to protect the optical parts.

Following illustration indicates the lens shift range when the projector is installed on desk/floor.

Projection lens Model No.

ET‑C1U100, ET‑C1W300

Standard projection position

Optical axis center

Standard zoom lens, ET‑C1W400,

ET‑C1W500, ET‑C1S600, ET‑C1T700

Optical axis center

Standard projection position

Lens shift range

0.23H

0.23H

Projected image width H

0.29H

0.29H

Projected image width H

ENGLISH - 85

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Using the USB memory

Using the USB memory

This projector supports the attachment of the USB memory. Attach the USB memory to the <USB> terminal when registering a user test pattern or when using the data cloning function or the firmware update function, etc.

Note f

For registering the test pattern, refer to “Registering the test pattern” ( x page 193) .

f For the data cloning function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[DATA CLONING] ( x page 186)

.

f For the firmware update function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[FIRMWARE UPDATE] ( x page 191)

.

Notes on use

Observe following.

f Do not disassemble or modify the USB memory.

f Do not apply strong impact on the USB memory.

f Do not pour liquid such as water or get it wet.

f Do not place foreign object into the terminal section.

f Do not touch the metal terminal with hand or metal.

f Do not leave the USB memory in a place with high humidity or dust.

f Do not leave the USB memory in a place where static electricity or electromagnetic radiation is generated.

f Store the USB memory appropriately in a location that small children cannot reach.

f Immediately remove the USB memory from the projector when smoke or odor is noticed, and contact the manufacturer.

f Do not remove the USB memory from the projector while reading or writing the data.

USB memory that can be used with the projector

This projector supports the commercially available USB 2.0 compatible USB memory formatted in FAT16 or

FAT32.

f Only the single partition structure is supported.

Attaching the USB memory

1) Insert the USB memory all the way in to the <USB> terminal.

Attention f Take care of the orientation of the terminal when inserting the USB memory so that it will not get damaged.

f Do not use a USB extension cable or a USB hub, and directly insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal of the projector.

f Do not insert the USB memory into the <DC OUT> terminal. The USB memory cannot be used on the <DC OUT> terminal.

Note f The USB memory can be attached even when the projector is turned on.

Removing the USB memory

1) Remove the USB memory after confirming that the indicator on the USB memory is not blinking.

Attention f The blinking of the indicator of the USB memory attached to the projector is indicating that the projector is accessing (reading or writing) the

USB memory. Do not remove the USB memory from the projector when the indicator is blinking.

f The access status to the USB memory cannot be confirmed when a USB memory without the monitoring function such as indicator is used.

In such case, remove the USB memory after confirming one of the following.

g Turn off the projector.

g When the registration of the test pattern is performed, confirm that the [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed after the user test pattern save operation is performed.

g When using the data cloning function, confirm that the saving or loading of the data to/from the USB memory is completed in the menu screen.

g When using the firmware update function, wait until the projector automatically goes into standby after the update has started.

86 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control

Operating with the remote control

Using the shutter function

If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible to turn off the image temporarily.

button

1) Press the <SHUTTER> button.

f The image disappears.

f This operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.

2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.

f The image is displayed.

Note f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink green slowly while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed).

f The fade-in/fade-out time of the image can be set by the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING].

f The light source may be lit dimly due to warm-up when the shutter function is used in the operating environment temperature of around 0 °C

(32 °F).

Using the on‑screen display function

Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen display, such as the menu or the input terminal name.

button

1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button.

f Turns off (hides) the on-screen display.

2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.

f Cancels the hide condition of the on-screen display.

Note f The hide condition of the on-screen display can also be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden).

ENGLISH - 87

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control

Switching the display position of the menu screen

By directly calling up the [ON‑SCREEN DISPLAY] screen without operating from the main menu screen, the display position of the menu screen (OSD) can be easily changed.

button

1) Press and hold the <ON SCREEN> button for at least one second.

f The [ON‑SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed while the cursor is in [OSD POSITION] state.

2) Press qw to switch the [OSD POSITION] setting.

f The display position of the menu screen (OSD) will switch each time you press qw .

Note f

Display position of the menu screen (OSD) can also be changed with the menu operation. For details, refer to “Setting [OSD POSITION]”

( x page 143) .

Using the function button

By assigning the following functions to the <FUNCTION> button, it can be used as a simplified shortcut button.

[SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE], [WAVEFORM MONITOR],

[LENS MEMORY LOAD], [ASPECT], [PROJECTION METHOD], [GEOMETRY], [ANGLE INFORMATION]

button

1) Press the <FUNCTION> button.

Note f Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[FUNCTION BUTTON] ( x page 181) .

The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen can also be displayed by holding down the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.

Displaying test patterns

To check the condition of the projector, ten internal test patterns and up to three user registered test patterns can be displayed.

button

1) Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.

f The test pattern and the main menu screen is displayed.

f If the [TEST PATTERN]

screen (list format) is displayed, proceed to Step 3) .

2) Press the <TEST PATTERN> button again.

f The test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) are displayed.

f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) can also be displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while

[TEST PATTERN] is selected in the main menu screen.

3) Press as to select the test pattern to display, and press the <ENTER> button.

f Selected test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

f

To change the test pattern, proceed to Step 4) .

4) Press qw to switch the test pattern.

f The test pattern will switch each time you press qw .

Note f The main menu screen and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format, toggle selection format) can be hidden by pressing the <ON

SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed.

f

Test patterns can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” ( x page 192) for details.

f Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing various adjustments.

88 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3   Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control

Using the status function

Display the status of the projector.

button

1) Press the <STATUS> button.

f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.

STATUS

PROJECTOR TYPE

SERIAL NUMBER

PROJECTOR RUNTIME

LIGHT RUNTIME

CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME

FIRMWARE VERSION

INTAKE AIR TEMP.

OPTICS MODULE TEMP.

EXHAUST AIR TEMP.

LIGHT1 TEMP.

LIGHT2 TEMP.

SELF TEST

PT-REZ12

123456789012

10000h

10000h / 10000h

31°C/87°F

27°C/80°F

1h 23m

1.00

31°C/87°F

31°C/87°F

31°C/87°F

NO ERRORS

1/6

ENTER

E-MAIL/USB

CHANGE

MENU

EXIT

Note f The projector status can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[STATUS]

( x page 181) for details.

Setting ID number of the remote control

When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.

After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.

The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, press the <ID

ALL> button on the remote control. Also, you can control a projector by pressing the <ID ALL> button on the remote control even if you do not know the projector ID.

button

1) Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.

2) Within five seconds, press and set the one‑digit or two‑digit ID number set on the projector body using the number (<0> ‑ <9>) buttons.

f If you press the <ID ALL> button, you can control the projectors regardless of the ID number setting of the projector body.

Attention f Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector body, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within five seconds, the ID number returns to its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.

f The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.

Note f When the ID number of the remote control is set to [0], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector body, as same as when [ALL] is set.

f Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].

ENGLISH - 89

Chapter 4 Settings

This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.

90 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — Menu navigation

Menu navigation

The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.

Navigating through the menu

Operating procedure

button

1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU

PICTURE

POSITION

ADVANCED MENU

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

DISPLAY OPTION

PROJECTOR SETUP

TEST PATTERN

SIGNAL LIST

SECURITY

NETWORK

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SUB MENU

2) Press as to select an item from the main menu.

f The selected item is highlighted in yellow.

MAIN MENU

PICTURE

POSITION

ADVANCED MENU

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

DISPLAY OPTION

PROJECTOR SETUP

TEST PATTERN

SIGNAL LIST

SECURITY

NETWORK

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SUB MENU

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.

POSITION

SHIFT

ASPECT

ZOOM

GEOMETRY

DEFAULT

OFF

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SUB MENU

ENGLISH - 91

Chapter 4   Settings — Menu navigation

4) Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.

f Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw .

A B C f For some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.

CONTRAST

ADJUST

0

Note f Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.

f Some items or functions may not be adjusted or used depending on the signals input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set.

If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.

f Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.

f Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.

f

For menu items, refer to “Main menu” ( x

page 92) and “Sub-menu” ( x page 93).

f The cursor color depends on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD COLOR]. The selected item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.

f In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.

To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD

ROTATION].

Resetting adjustment values to the factory default

If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to the factory default settings.

button

1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

CONTRAST

ADJUST

0

Note f You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.

f To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[INITIALIZE].

f Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those items individually.

f The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular mark varies according to the selected input signals.

Current adjustment value

Factory default setting

Main menu

When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.

The menu item with l in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD) when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].

[PICTURE]

Main menu item [SIMPLE] mode l

Page

97

[POSITION] l

108

[ADVANCED MENU] ―

116

92 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — Menu navigation

Main menu item

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]

[SIMPLE] mode l

[DISPLAY OPTION] l

[PROJECTOR SETUP]

[TEST PATTERN]

[SIGNAL LIST]

[SECURITY]

[NETWORK] l l l

― l

Sub-menu

The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.

The menu item with l in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD) when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].

[PICTURE]

Sub-menu item

[PICTURE MODE]

[CONTRAST]

[BRIGHTNESS]

[COLOR]

[TINT]

[COLOR TEMPERATURE]

[WHITE GAIN]

[GAMMA]

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

[SHARPNESS]

[NOISE REDUCTION]

[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]

[COLOR SPACE]

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE]

*1 Depends on the signal input.

*2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].

Factory default

[GRAPHIC] *1

[0]

[0]

[0] *2

[0]

[DEFAULT] *2

[+10]

[DEFAULT]

[OFF] *2

[+6] *2

[OFF] *2

[OFF] *2

[NATIVE] *1

[AUTO] *1

[AUTO]

[SIMPLE] mode l l l l

Page

97

97

97

98

98

98

100

100

102

102

102

102

105

105

106

[POSITION]

[SHIFT]

[ASPECT]

[ZOOM]

[GEOMETRY]

Sub-menu item Factory default

[DEFAULT]

[OFF]

[SIMPLE] mode

― l

― l

Page

108

108

109

110

Page

122

123

151

192

195

198

202

ENGLISH - 93

[ADVANCED MENU]

Sub-menu item

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

[GRADATION SMOOTHER]

[BLANKING]

[EDGE BLENDING]

[FRAME RESPONSE]

[RASTER POSITION]

*1 Depends on the signal input.

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]

Details ( x page 122)

[DISPLAY OPTION]

Sub-menu item

[COLOR MATCHING]

[COLOR CORRECTION]

[SCREEN SETTING]

[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]

[HDMI IN]

[DisplayPort IN]

[SLOT IN]

[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

[MENU MODE]

[BACK COLOR]

[STARTUP LOGO]

[UNIFORMITY]

[SHUTTER SETTING]

[FREEZE]

[WAVEFORM MONITOR]

[CUT OFF]

[PROJECTOR SETUP]

Sub-menu item

[PROJECTOR ID]

[PROJECTION METHOD]

[LENS]

[SLOT SETTING]

[OPERATION SETTING]

[LIGHT OUTPUT]

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]

[STANDBY MODE]

[QUICK STARTUP]

[POWER MANAGEMENT]

[NO SIGNAL SETTING]

[INITIAL STARTUP]

[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

[DATE AND TIME]

Chapter 4   Settings — Menu navigation

Factory default

[AUTO] *1

[2]

[OFF]

[NORMAL]

Factory default

[OFF]

[OFF]

[NORMAL]

[BLUE]

[DEFAULT LOGO]

[OFF]

Factory default

[ALL]

[100.0%]

[NORMAL]

[OFF]

[LAST MEMORY]

[LAST USED]

[SIMPLE] mode

[SIMPLE] mode l

― l

― l l

― l

[SIMPLE] mode l l l

― l l

― l

94 - ENGLISH

Page

116

116

116

117

121

121

Page

123

125

125

125

126

130

132

143

147

148

149

150

145

145

145

146

Page

151

151

152

157

158

162

162

168

169

169

170

173

173

174

Sub-menu item

[SCHEDULE]

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

[RS-232C]

[REMOTE2 MODE]

[FUNCTION BUTTON]

[STATUS]

[INDICATOR SETTING]

[DATA CLONING]

[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

[HDMI CEC]

[INITIALIZE]

[FIRMWARE UPDATE]

[SAVE LOG]

[SERVICE PASSWORD]

Chapter 4   Settings — Menu navigation

Factory default

[OFF]

[DEFAULT]

[OFF]

[SIMPLE] mode

― l

― l

― l

― l

[TEST PATTERN]

Details ( x page 192)

[SIGNAL LIST]

Details ( x page 195)

[SECURITY]

Sub-menu item

[SECURITY PASSWORD]

[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]

[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

Factory default

[OFF]

[SIMPLE] mode

Page

198

198

199

200

[NETWORK]

Sub-menu item

[ETHERNET TYPE] *1

[DIGITAL LINK] *1

[WIRED LAN]

[WIRELESS LAN] *2

[PROJECTOR NAME]

[NETWORK STATUS]

[NFC SETTING]

[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]

[NETWORK SECURITY]

[NETWORK CONTROL]

[PJLink]

[Art-Net]

Factory default

[LAN]

[ENABLE]

[READ/WRITE]

[SIMPLE] mode l l l l l l

― l

― l l

Page

202

202

204

205

206

206

207

208

210

211

211

213

*1 [ETHERNET TYPE] and [DIGITAL LINK] cannot be set if the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is not installed in the slot.

*2 [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.

189

191

191

191

186

186

187

187

Page

175

176

179

181

181

181

185

ENGLISH - 95

Chapter 4   Settings — Menu navigation

Note f Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.

When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set.

f Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.

f The [NETWORK] menu → [NFC SETTING] is displayed when the NFC function is enabled.

The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC

Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.

For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your dealer.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

96 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

[PICTURE] menu

On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

[PICTURE MODE]

You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the projector is used.

1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].

2) Press qw .

f The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[STANDARD]

[CINEMA]

[NATURAL]

[REC709]

[DICOM SIM.]

[DYNAMIC]

[GRAPHIC]

The image becomes suitable for video signals in general.

The image becomes suitable for movie contents.

The image becomes suitable for using in a relatively dark environment.

The image becomes Rec.709 compliant when the setting other than [PICTURE MODE] is set to the factory default.

The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.

The image becomes suitable for use in bright areas.

The image becomes suitable for computer signal input.

Note f

Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709” and is a color standard of high-vision broadcasting.

f

DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the

DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.

f

If the <ENTER> button is pressed while [PICTURE MODE] is selected, the adjustment condition that is currently set can be saved as a specified value of the selected picture mode. The data of all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] and [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] in the

[PICTURE] menu are saved.

f

If the [PICTURE] menu → [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] is set to [AUTO], [GRAPHIC] is automatically selected when a new computer signal is input, and [STANDARD] is automatically selected when a new video signal is input. If the [PICTURE] menu → [DEFAULT PICTURE

MODE] is set to anything other than [AUTO], the picture mode set in [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] is selected when a new signal is input.

[CONTRAST]

You can adjust the contrast of the colors.

1) Press as to select [CONTRAST].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

The screen becomes brighter.

The screen becomes darker.

Range of adjustment

-31 - +31

Attention f Adjust the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS] first when you need to adjust the black level.

[BRIGHTNESS]

You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

ENGLISH - 97

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

Adjustment

Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.

Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.

[COLOR]

You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.

1) Press as to select [COLOR].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

Operation

Press w .

Press q

.

Deepens colors.

Weakens colors.

Adjustment

Range of adjustment

-31 - +31

Range of adjustment

-31 - +31

[TINT]

You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.

1) Press as to select [TINT].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.

Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.

Range of adjustment

-31 - +31

[COLOR TEMPERATURE]

You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.

Adjusting with color temperature

1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press qw .

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[3200K] - [13000K]

Factory default setting.

Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” ( x page 98) for

details.

Allows you to set in increments of 100 K. Select so that images become natural.

Note f [DEFAULT] cannot be selected when the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DICOM SIM.].

f When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] is set to anything other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to

[USER1].

f The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.

Adjusting desired white balance

1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

98 - ENGLISH

2) Press qw .

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.

9) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

10) Press qw to adjust the level.

Item

[RED]

[GREEN]

[BLUE]

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Press w .

Press q

.

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Deepens red.

Weakens red.

Deepens green.

Weakens green.

Deepens blue.

Weakens blue.

Range of adjustment

[WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is

+255)

[WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 - +127 (factory default is

0)

Note f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.

Adjusting desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings

1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press qw .

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select anything other than [USER1] and [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [USER1] or [USER2].

f The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.

f If you press qw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the data will not be overwritten.

f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.

8) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

9) Press qw to adjust the level.

ENGLISH - 99

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

Note f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.

f When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.

Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]

1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press qw .

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The name set to color temperature is changed.

Note f The display of [USER1] or [USER2] is also changed when the name is changed.

[WHITE GAIN]

Adjust the brightness of the white part of the image.

1) Press as to select [WHITE GAIN].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [WHITE GAIN] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Brightness of the white part gets stronger.

The image becomes more natural.

Range of adjustment

0 - +10

[GAMMA]

You can switch gamma mode.

1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT]

[USER]

[HDR ST2084-500]

[HDR ST2084-1000]

Gamma mode unique to this projector.

Uses the gamma data registered by the user.

(Registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)

Gamma mode compliant with SMPTE ST 2084 that assumes a highest luminance of 500 cd/m 2 and supports HDR (High Dynamic Range).

Gamma mode compliant with SMPTE ST 2084 that assumes a highest luminance of 1 000 cd/m 2 and supports HDR (High Dynamic Range).

100 - ENGLISH

[HDR HLG]

[1.8]

[2.0]

[2.2]

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

Gamma mode compliant with ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG: Hybrid Log Gamma system) that supports

HDR (High Dynamic Range).

Set so that images become as you like.

Note f In the following cases, the gamma mode is automatically set based on the InfoFrame information while displaying the image with the

InfoFrame information added, so the gamma mode cannot be selected. If the information necessary for supporting HDR (High Dynamic

Range) is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, it will follow the [GAMMA] setting.

g When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the HDMI input is selected g When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DisplayPort IN] → [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the DisplayPort input is selected g When [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] under the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] is set to [ENABLE], and the input corresponding to that setting is selected

Setting [HDR HLG SYSTEM GAMMA]

Sets the system gamma to be applied to the [USER] and [HDR HLG] gamma modes. This system gamma is defined by the ITU‑R BT.2100 standard.

1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [USER] or [HDR HLG], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.

f

When [HDR HLG] is selected, proceed to Step 5) .

4) Press as to select [HDR HLG SYSTEM GAMMA].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

f [1.00] - [1.62] can be set in increments of 0.01.

Changing the [USER] name

1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [USER].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [GAMMA NAME CHANGE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The selected gamma name is changed.

Note f The display of [USER] is also changed when the name is changed.

ENGLISH - 101

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.

1) Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[1] - [9]

No correction.

Corrects the vividness of the image. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.

[SHARPNESS]

You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.

1) Press as to select [SHARPNESS].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

Operation

Press w

.

Press q .

Contours become sharper.

Contours become softer.

Adjustment Range of adjustment

0 - +15

Note f

If you press w

while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press q

while the adjustment value is [0], the value will become [+15].

[NOISE REDUCTION]

You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.

1) Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[1] - [6]

No correction.

Compensates the noise. The larger the value, the stronger the compensation of the noise.

Attention f When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from the original image. In such a case, set it to [OFF].

[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]

Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image to make the contrast optimum for the image.

1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

2) Press qw .

f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

102 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[USER]

Disables the dynamic contrast function.

Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.

Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.

Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.

Set any desired correction.

Refer to “Performing desired correction” ( x page 103) for details.

f

Proceed to Step 4) when [1], [2], or [3] is selected.

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the item to set.

f When [CONTRAST MODE] is selected, the items will switch each time you press qw .

f When [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected, press the <ENTER> button.

Setting item

[CONTRAST MODE]

(Correction mode setting)

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

[1]

[2]

Details

Select this item when misadjusted black level (grayish black) is bothersome in the dark scenes.

Performs conventional correction to adjust the black level by decreasing the general brightness.

Select this item when topical radiance is required even in dark scenes.

Performs standard correction of the projector that does not decrease the brightness too much.

(Factory default setting)

Sets the contrast synchronization function.

This setting item is common with the following menu item.

f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR

SYNC]

For details, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[MULTI

PROJECTOR SYNC] ( x page 176).

Note f Always use the contrast synchronization function when combining the projected images from multiple projectors to display a single image.

f The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.

g All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors) g [MODE] of [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to

[SUB].

g [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].

g If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

g If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

Performing desired correction

1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

2) Press qw .

f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [USER].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the item to set.

f The items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw . f Press the <ENTER> button when [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected.

ENGLISH - 103

[DYNAMIC GAMMA]

(Adjustment of signal compensation)

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

Setting item

[CONTRAST MODE]

(Correction mode setting)

[AUTO CONTRAST]

(Automatic light source adjustment)

[BRILLIANT CORRECTION]

(Adjustment of aperture diaphragm control)

[BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL]

(Setting of the brightness level of the signal to start the light adjustment)

[LIGHTS OUT TIMER]

(Time setting until the light turns off)

[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL

LEVEL]

(Setting of the brightness level of the signal to turn off the light)

[LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN]

(Setting of fade-in when lighting up again)

[LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT]

(Setting of fade-out when lighting off)

[MANUAL INTENSITY]

(Manual light source adjustment)

[OFF]

[1] - [255]

[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[0] - [255]

[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

[1]

[2]

[6%] - [50%]

[DISABLE]

[0.0s] - [10.0s]

[0%] - [5%]

[OFF]

[0.5s] - [10.0s]

[OFF]

[0.5s] - [10.0s]

Details

Select this item when misadjusted black level (grayish black) is bothersome in the dark scenes.

Performs conventional correction to adjust the black level by decreasing the general brightness.

Select this item when topical radiance is required even in dark scenes.

Performs standard correction of the projector that does not decrease the brightness too much.

(Factory default setting)

Does not adjust the light source.

The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light source.

Can be set in increments of 1.

Does not correct brightness even in a scene with radiance.

Slightly corrects brightness in a scene with radiance.

Moderately corrects brightness in a scene with radiance.

(Factory default setting)

Strongly corrects brightness in a scene with radiance. This setting will maximize the brightness.

Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the image signal being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the value, the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the light source.

Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 30 %)

Does not turn off the light source.

Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the image signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT

SIGNAL LEVEL].

Select an item from [0.0s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.0s] -

[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.

Set the level of the brightness of the image signal to turn off the light source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].

Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 0 %)

Does not set the fade-in of the image when the light source is turned on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].

Sets the time to fade in the image when the light source is turned on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with

[LIGHTS OUT TIMER].

Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -

[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.

Does not set the fade-out of the image when the light source is turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].

Sets the time to fade out the image when the light source is turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].

Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -

[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.

The larger the value, the stronger the correction.

Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255)

Does not compensate the signal.

Slightly compensates the signal.

Moderately compensates the signal.

Strongly compensates the signal. This setting will maximize the contrast.

Sets the contrast synchronization function.

This setting item is common with the following menu item.

f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR

SYNC]

Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[MULTI PROJECTOR

SYNC] ( x page 176) for details.

104 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

Note f [BRILLIANT CORRECTION] cannot be set when [CONTRAST MODE] is set to [1].

f [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL], [LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN], and [LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].

f When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.

g When the brightness level of the image signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] g When the input signal is gone g When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed g When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up f The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not operate while measuring the brightness and the color.

f The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of the image signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors.

f The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.

g All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors) g [MODE] of [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to

[SUB].

g [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].

g If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

g If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

[COLOR SPACE]

Set the color space used for the color representation of the image.

1) Press as to select [COLOR SPACE].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [COLOR SPACE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NATIVE]

[ITU-709]

[DCI-P3 emu.]

[ITU-2020 emu.]

Displays the image with a color space unique to this projector.

Displays the image with a color space compliant with the ITU-R BT.709 standard.

Displays the image with a color space close to DCI-P3.

Displays the image with a color space close to the ITU-R BT.2020 standard.

Note f DCI‑P3 is the specifications of the digital cinema color region defined by the Digital Cinema Initiatives (DCI).

f In the following cases, the color space is automatically set based on the InfoFrame information while displaying the image with the

InfoFrame information added, so the [COLOR SPACE] cannot be set. If the information necessary for supporting HDR (High Dynamic

Range) is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, it will follow the [COLOR SPACE] setting.

g When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the HDMI input is selected g When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DisplayPort IN] → [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the DisplayPort input is selected g When [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] under the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] is set to [ENABLE], and the input corresponding to that setting is selected

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.

1) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

ENGLISH - 105

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

3) Press as to select a system format.

f Available system formats vary depending on the input signal.

Input

HDMI input,

DIGITAL LINK input

DisplayPort input,

PressIT input, SLOT input

System format

480/60p or 576/50p signal Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YC

B

C

R

].

Signals other than above Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YP

B

P

R

].

Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YP

B

P

R

].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

For details of the types of image signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals” ( x page 294).

f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.

f The selection item for the DIGITAL LINK input can be selected when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

f The selection item for the PressIT input can be selected when the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.:

TY-SB01WP) is installed in the slot.

f The selection item for the SLOT input can be selected when the Function Board from other manufacturers is installed in the slot.

f For the SDI input and the SDI OPT input, the signal format can be set in detail in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN].

[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE]

Set the picture mode to be applied when a new signal is input. The setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE

MODE] will switch according to the setting.

1) Press as to select [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[STANDARD]

[CINEMA]

[NATURAL]

[REC709]

[DICOM SIM.]

[DYNAMIC]

[GRAPHIC]

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [GRAPHIC] when a computer signal is input or [STANDARD] when a video signal is input.

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [STANDARD].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [CINEMA].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [NATURAL].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [REC709].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [DICOM SIM.].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [DYNAMIC].

Set [PICTURE MODE] to [GRAPHIC].

Note f The following are the conditions where the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is switched to the picture mode set in

[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE].

g When a new signal is input g g When the <DEFAULT> button is pressed while the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is selected g

When the deleted signal is input again after the registered signal has been deleted

When there is no input signal

sRGB-compliant video

sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966‑2‑1) for color reproduction defined by IEC (International

Electrotechnical Commission).

Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.

1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] to [OFF].

f

Refer to [COLOR MATCHING] ( x page 123).

2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.

f

Refer to “[PICTURE] menu” ( x page 97).

3) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].

4) Press qw to set [REC709].

5) Press as to select [GAMMA].

106 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PICTURE] menu

6) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to select [2.2].

8) Press as to select [COLOR].

9) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.

10) Follow Steps 8) - 9) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [WHITE GAIN], and [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT

VIEW] to the factory default settings.

Note f sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.

ENGLISH - 107

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

[POSITION] menu

On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

Note f When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal on the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot, set the shift and aspect from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device first.

[SHIFT]

Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even when the positions of the projector and screen are correct.

1) Press as to select [SHIFT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to adjust the position.

Orientation Operation Adjustment

Press a .

The image position moves up.

Vertical (up and down) adjustment

Press s .

The image position moves down.

Press w .

The image position moves to the right.

Horizontal (right and left) adjustment

Press q .

The image position moves to the left.

Note f For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.

[ASPECT]

You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.

The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN

SETTING] →

[SCREEN FORMAT]. Set [SCREEN FORMAT] first. ( x page 125)

1) Press as to select [ASPECT].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.

f The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

108 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

[DEFAULT]

[THROUGH]

[16:9]

[4:3]

[H FIT]

[V FIT]

[HV FIT]

Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.

Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.

Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input *1 . When wide-screen signals are input *2 , the images are displayed without changing the input aspect ratio.

Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input *1 . When widescreen signals are input *2 , and [4:3] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the image is displayed with the aspect ratio converted to 4:3. When anything other than [4:3] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are reduced to be displayed without changing input aspect ratio so that the images will fit in the 4:3 screen.

Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN

FORMAT], the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off.

Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in

[SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.

Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].

*1 [Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.

*2 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.

Note f If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.

Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.

f If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio adjustment and zoom function.

f If conventional 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the creator of the images.

[ZOOM]

You can adjust the image size.

The adjustments in [ZOOM] will differ depending on the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].

When [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]

1) Press as to select [ZOOM].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[OFF]

[ON]

Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.

5) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].

6) Press qw to adjust.

Note f When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.

When [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]

1) Press as to select [ZOOM].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 109

3) Press as to select [MODE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

[INTERNAL]

[FULL]

Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].

Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].

5) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

[OFF]

[ON]

Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.

7) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].

8) Press qw to adjust.

Note f When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to anything other than [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.

[GEOMETRY]

You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.

Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.

The projected image can be made to look more natural by making topical correction as necessary.

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[KEYSTONE]

Does not perform geometric adjustment.

Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.

[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.

[CURVED CORRECTION]

[PC-1]

Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.

[PC-2]

Select this item when performing correction using a computer and “Geometric & Setup Management

Software” *1 . Up to three correction data can be saved.

[PC-3]

*1 “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/

It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.

Note f The menu, logo, or waveform monitor display may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.

f The edge blending adjustment may not be performed correctly depending on the environment when using the [ADVANCED MENU] menu →

[EDGE BLENDING] and [GEOMETRY] simultaneously.

f The image may disappear for a moment or may be disrupted while performing adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.

Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION]

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED CORRECTION] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select the item to adjust.

5) Press qw to adjust.

110 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

[KEYSTONE]

[LENS THROW RATIO]

Set the throw ratio.

Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.

To return to the default settings after selecting the value, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]

[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]

Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical direction.

Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal direction.

[FREE GRID]

Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.

For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” ( x page 112).

[CURVED CORRECTION]

[LENS THROW RATIO]

Set the throw ratio.

Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.

To return to the default settings after selecting the value, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]

[VERTICAL ARC] [HORIZONTAL ARC]

[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]

[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]

Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.

[FREE GRID]

Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.

For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” ( x page 112).

ENGLISH - 111

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.

f When [LINEARITY] is selected, press qw to select either adjustment method ([AUTO] or [MANUAL]).

Select [AUTO] normally.

For details of operation when [MANUAL] is selected, refer to “Adjusting to desired linearity” ( x page 112).

5) Press asqw to adjust.

[UPPER LEFT] [UPPER RIGHT]

[CORNER CORRECTION]

[LOWER LEFT] [LOWER RIGHT]

[LINEARITY]

Horizontal direction Vertical direction

[FREE GRID]

Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.

For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” ( x page 112).

Adjusting to desired linearity

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [LINEARITY].

5) Press qw to select [MANUAL].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LINEARITY] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to adjust.

Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press qw to select an item other than [OFF].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [FREE GRID].

112 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

5) Press qw to select an item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].

Enables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].

f

Proceed to Step 6) when [ON] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [GRID RESOLUTION].

8) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2x2]

[3x3]

[5x5]

[9x9]

[17x17]

Performs the adjustment using the pattern of the outer border (there are two lines each vertically and horizontally as a grid line).

Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into two in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.

Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into four in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.

(Factory default setting)

Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into eight in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.

Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into 16 in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.

9) Press as to select [CONTROL POINTS].

10) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[POINT]

[HORIZONTAL LINE]

[VERTICAL LINE]

Select this item when adjusting by selecting one intersection from the intersections on the grid lines.

Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one horizontal grid line, and adjusting them simultaneously.

Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one vertical grid line, and adjusting them simultaneously.

11) Press as to select [GRID WIDTH].

12) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[1] - [10]

Select the width of the grid line. It can be set between 1 line to 10 lines.

(Factory default setting: [5])

13) Press as to select [GRID COLOR].

14) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[WHITE]

[BLACK]

[RED]

[GREEN]

[BLUE]

[CYAN]

[MAGENTA]

[YELLOW]

[OFF]

Displays the pattern of the selected color.

(Factory default setting: [RED])

Does not display the pattern.

15) Press as to select [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].

ENGLISH - 113

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

16) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[WHITE]

[BLACK]

[RED]

[GREEN]

[BLUE]

[CYAN]

[MAGENTA]

[YELLOW]

Select the color of the marker that indicates the control point.

The marker that indicates the control point is displayed in the control point selection mode and adjustment mode.

(Factory default setting: [WHITE])

17) Press as to select [EXECUTE].

18) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The screen switches to the control point selection mode.

19) Press asqw to select the control point.

f Move the marker over the intersection of the grid lines to adjust.

f When [HORIZONTAL LINE] is selected in Step

10) , press

as to select the control point.

f

When [VERTICAL LINE] is selected in Step 10)

, press qw to select the control point.

20) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The control point is confirmed, and the screen switches to the adjustment mode.

21) Press asqw to adjust the position of the control point.

f By adjusting the position of the control point, the range to the neighboring intersections will be corrected.

f To continuously adjust the position of the other intersection, press the <MENU> button or the <ENTER>

button to return to Step 19) .

f Pressing the <MENU> button twice allows to reselect [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID

WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].

Note f The contents adjusted in [FREE GRID] are saved as individual correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED

CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3].

f Even if [GRID RESOLUTION] or [CONTROL POINTS] is reselected, the correction data adjusted before the reselection is maintained.

f By selecting more narrow grid pattern with [GRID RESOLUTION], the range of effect of the control point position adjustment will be smaller. f The image is not displayed correctly when the position of the control point exceeds the neighboring intersections.

f

To perform topical fine adjustment, it is recommended to adjust by setting [GRID RESOLUTION] to [17x17].

The settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are synchronized with the setting items under each item of [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-

2], and [PC-3].

Initializing adjustments for [FREE GRID]

Initialize the correction data adjusted with [FREE GRID] and restore the factory default settings (the state where no correction is performed). Simultaneously the settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID

WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are restored to the factory default settings.

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press qw to select the item to initialize its correction data in [FREE GRID].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [FREE GRID].

5) Press qw to select [ON].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

114 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [POSITION] menu

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f Each correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3] cannot be initialized at once.

To initialize all the correction data, select each item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.

f When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, all data in [FREE GRID] are initialized.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[INITIALIZE]

ENGLISH - 115

Chapter 4   Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

[ADVANCED MENU] menu

On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

The picture quality is enhanced by raising the vertical resolution higher performing the cinema processing when interlaced video signal is input.

1) Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[OFF]

[30p FIXED]

[25p FIXED]

Automatically detects the input signal and performs cinema processing. (Factory default setting)

Does not perform cinema processing.

When 60 Hz vertical scanning frequency signals are input

When 50 Hz vertical scanning frequency signals are input

Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).

Note f In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p

FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)

[GRADATION SMOOTHER]

Set the correction level to reduce the difference in level of gradation.

1) Press as to select [GRADATION SMOOTHER].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Disables the gradation smoother function.

Performs weak correction.

Performs moderate correction. (Factory default setting)

Performs strong correction.

[BLANKING]

Adjust the blanking width if there is a noise at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out from the screen.

1) Press as to select [BLANKING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT].

f When [CUSTOM MASKING] is selected and set to anything other than [OFF] ([PC-1], [PC-2], [PC-3]), the blanking width can be adjusted to arbitrary shape using a computer and the masking function of the

“Geometric & Setup Management Software”. Up to three adjustment data can be saved.

4) Press qw to adjust the blanking width.

116 - ENGLISH

Blanking correction Item

Chapter 4   Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

Operation

Press q .

The blanking zone moves upward.

Adjustment

Top of the screen [UPPER]

Press w .

The blanking zone moves downward.

Press w .

The blanking zone moves upward.

Bottom of the screen

[LOWER]

Press q .

The blanking zone moves downward.

Left side of the screen

[LEFT]

Right side of the screen

[RIGHT]

Press w

.

Press q .

Press q .

Press w

.

The blanking zone moves to the right.

The blanking zone moves to the left.

The blanking zone moves to the right.

The blanking zone moves to the left.

Range of adjustment

Top and bottom 0 - 1 198

Left and right 0 - 1 918

Note f The upper limit of the adjustment range may be restricted so that the entire projected image is not covered by blanking width.

f In following cases, the [CUSTOM MASKING] setting in [BLANKING] is disabled, and the masking function in the “Geometric & Setup

Management Software” cannot be used.

g When the image of 1080/120p is displayed

“Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website. https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/

It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.

[EDGE BLENDING]

The overlapping area is made seamless by creating inclination in the brightness in the overlapped area when structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.

It is recommended that edge blending is adjusted after an image is projected continuously for at least 30 minutes and then the image is stable.

1) Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

[USER]

Sets the edge blending function to off.

Use the setting value preset in the projector for the inclination of the edge blending area.

Use the user‑setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Configuration/registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.) f

Proceed to Step 3) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [MODE].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[SOFTEDGE/BLACK LEVEL] Standard setting. Adjusts both the inclination of the brightness and the black level.

[BLACK LEVEL ONLY]

Select this item when adjusting only the black level. This is useful when adjusting the inclination of the brightness with an externally connected media server, etc.

ENGLISH - 117

Chapter 4   Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

6) Press as to specify the location to be corrected.

f When joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON] f When joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON] f When joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON] f When joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]

7) Press qw to switch to [ON].

8) Press as to select [START] or [WIDTH].

9) Press qw to adjust the starting position or correction width.

10) Press as to select [MARKER].

11) Press qw to switch to [ON].

f A marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different correction widths.

The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap.

Green line

Red line

12) Press as to select [BLACK LEVEL AREA].

13) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[GEOMETRY LINKED]

[GEOMETRY UNLINKED]

Select this item to perform black level adjustment within the image display area after the geometric adjustment.

Select this item to perform black level adjustment in the area including outside the image display area.

This will make the misadjusted black level (grayish black) in the overlapping section outside the image display area not so obvious.

14) Press as to select [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST].

15) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen is displayed.

f The menu screen becomes dark automatically when the projector goes into the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen.

f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] in the [EDGE BLENDING] screen, the black test pattern is displayed when the projector goes into the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen.

16) Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

17) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The adjustment area in the projected image becomes temporarily bright and the [NON-OVERLAPPED

BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.

f [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].

18) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.

f Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen.

118 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

19) Press as to select [UPPER WIDTH], [LOWER WIDTH], [LEFT WIDTH], or [RIGHT WIDTH] in [BLACK

BORDER AREA].

20) Press qw to set the standard width of [BLACK BORDER AREA].

21) Press as to select [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], or [RIGHT

FREE SHAPE].

22) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Select this item when the shape of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and

[BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is not to be adjusted.

The region of the rectangle with the standard width set in Step 20)

will be the [BLACK BORDER

AREA].

Select this item when the shape of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and

[BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is to be adjusted.

f

Proceed to Step 30) when [OFF] is selected.

23) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [UPPER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LOWER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LEFT FREE SHAPE] screen, or the [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] screen is displayed.

24) Press as to select [ADJUSTMENT POINTS].

25) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2]

[3]

[5]

[9]

[17]

Adjusts the shape of the border at points on both ends.

Adjusts the shape of the border at three points

Adjusts the shape of the border at five points

Adjusts the shape of the border at nine points

Adjusts the shape of the border at 17 points

*1 The points are not placed at equally spaced intervals.

*1

*1

.

*1

.

*1

.

.

26) Press as to select [EXECUTE].

27) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The projector will go into the adjustment mode.

28) Press asqw to select the adjustment point.

f Move the marker over to the point to adjust.

f Press qw to select the adjustment point when [UPPER FREE SHAPE] or [LOWER FREE SHAPE] is

selected in Step 21)

.

f Press as to select the adjustment point when [LEFT FREE SHAPE] or [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] is selected

in Step 21)

.

29) Press asqw to adjust the position of the adjustment point.

f Press as to adjust [VERTICAL] when [UPPER FREE SHAPE] or [LOWER FREE SHAPE] is selected in

Step

21)

.

f Press qw to adjust [HORIZONTAL] when [LEFT FREE SHAPE] or [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] is selected in

Step

21)

.

f By adjusting the position of the adjustment point, the border between the adjacent adjustment point will be interpolated by a straight line.

f To continuously adjust the positions of other adjustment points, return to Step

28)

.

f Pressing the <MENU> button twice allows to reselect the items for [BLACK BORDER AREA].

30) Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].

31) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The adjustment area in the projected image becomes temporarily bright and the [BLACK BORDER

LEVEL] screen is displayed.

f [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].

ENGLISH - 119

Chapter 4   Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

32) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.

f Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen.

33) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] for [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

34) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The adjustment area in the projected image becomes temporarily bright and the [OVERLAPPED BLACK

LEVEL] screen is displayed.

f [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].

35) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.

Projection range

[BLACK BORDER AREA] (Right)

Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)

[MARKER] (Red)

Edge blending [START] (Right)

([MARKER] (Green))

[OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] (Right)

[BLACK BORDER LEVEL] [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL]

Note f It is recommended to select [GEOMETRY UNLINKED] when using the projector in following conditions.

g Project an image to a flat screen.

g Combine projected images from multiple projectors in vertical column or horizontal row.

f [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difficult to notice when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to structure a multi-display screen. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NON-

OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] so that the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the border area of the part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED

BLACK LEVEL], adjust the width or the shape of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the adjustment makes only the border area darker.

f The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.

f When configuring multiple screens using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] first before making adjustments in Step

16) . Adjustment method is same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

f If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.

f The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting will change in conjunction with the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] →

[AUTO TESTPATTERN].

f Adjustment of the shape of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to

perform the edge blending together with the adjustment of [GEOMETRY] ( x page 110). If [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is

deformed by correcting the distortion of the projected image with [GEOMETRY], perform the adjustment following Step 21) to Step 29) , and

adjust the edge blending according to the shape of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

f An error is accumulated by repeatedly adjusting the position of the adjustment points, which may distort the shape of the border awkwardly.

In such a case, initialize the shape of the border. Initializing the shape of the border will reset the shape to the factory default (unadjusted

state). For details, refer to “Initializing the shape of the border” ( x page 120).

Initializing the shape of the border

Initialize the data adjusted with [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], and

[RIGHT FREE SHAPE] and restore to the factory default settings (unadjusted state).

1) Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].

2) Press qw to select [ON] or [USER].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], or [RIGHT

FREE SHAPE] to initialize.

120 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

7) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [UPPER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LOWER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LEFT FREE SHAPE] screen, or the [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] screen is displayed.

8) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

9) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

10) Press qw to select [EXECUTE], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The adjustment data for [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], and [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] cannot be initialized at once.

f To initialize all the adjustment data, select each item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.

f When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, all data in [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE

SHAPE], and [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] are initialized.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[INITIALIZE]

→ [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[FRAME RESPONSE]

Set the processing method of the image frame delay.

1) Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NORMAL]

[FIXED] *1

Standard setting.

Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnification.

*1 Only when video signal or computer signal with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is input

[RASTER POSITION]

This function will allow the position of the image to move within the displayable area arbitrarily when the input image is not using the whole displayable area.

1) Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to adjust the position.

ENGLISH - 121

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub-menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

Changing the display language

You can select the language of the on-screen display.

1) Press as to select the display language and press the <ENTER> button.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

ENTER

SELECT

SET f Various menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected language.

f The language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese,

Russian, or Korean.

Note f The on-screen display language is set to English in the factory default setting or when the projector is initialized by one of the following methods.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[INITIALIZE]

→ [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

122 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[DISPLAY OPTION] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

[COLOR MATCHING]

Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.

Adjusting the color matching as desired

1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[3COLORS]

[7COLORS]

[MEASURED]

Color matching adjustment is not carried out.

Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].

Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter” ( x page 124) for details about this mode.

3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], or [WHITE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN],

[MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] when [7COLORS] is selected).

f The adjustment condition can be reset by selecting [RESET]. For details regarding [RESET], refer to

“Resetting the adjustment condition of the color matching” ( x page 124).

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [3COLORS:RED] , [3COLORS:GREEN] , [3COLORS:BLUE] , or [3COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed.

When [7COLORS] is selected, the [7COLORS:RED] , [7COLORS:GREEN] , [7COLORS:BLUE] ,

[7COLORS:CYAN] , [7COLORS:MAGENTA] , [7COLORS:YELLOW] , or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed.

f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.

7) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

f Only [GAIN] can be adjusted when [WHITE] is selected for [3COLORS].

8) Press qw to adjust.

f The adjustment value will change between 0

*1 The lower limit varies depending on the color to be adjusted.

*1 and 2 048.

Note f Operation when correcting the adjustment color

When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.

When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.

When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.

When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.

f Since advanced skills are necessary for the adjustment, this adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector or by a service person.

f When [RESET] is set to [PICTURE MODE] and the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the selected adjustment item will return to the value of factory default for the current picture mode.

f When [RESET] is set to [NATIVE], pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control will return the value to uncorrected value.

f When [COLOR MATCHING] is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER1].

ENGLISH - 123

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter

Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED],

[GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.

1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].

2) Press qw to select [MEASURED].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [MEASURED DATA].

f The adjustment condition can be reset by selecting [RESET]. For details regarding [RESET], refer to

“Resetting the adjustment condition of the color matching” ( x page 124).

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [MEASURED DATA] screen is displayed.

6) Measure the current luminance (Y) and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using the colorimeter.

7) Press as to select a color, and press qw to adjust the setting.

f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.

8) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.

f The [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.

f

When [MEASURED] is selected in Step 2) , proceed to Step 9)

and enter the coordinates of desired colors.

9) Press as to select [TARGET DATA].

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [TARGET DATA] screen is displayed.

11) Press as to select a color and press qw to input coordinates for desired colors.

f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.

12) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.

Note f Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector.

f Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors.

f The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting will change in conjunction with the setting in the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [EDGE BLENDING] →

[ON]/[USER] → [AUTO TESTPATTERN].

f When using a colorimeter or similar instrument to take measurement, measure the colors displayed in [AUTO TESTPATTERN].

f It is recommended to enter the value between [1000] and [32768] in [Y(RELATIVE)] of [WHITE] in the [MEASURED DATA] screen. For each value ([Y(RELATIVE)] of [BLACK], [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE]), enter the relative value for the [Y(RELATIVE)] value of [WHITE] based on the luminance (Y) of each color measured using the colorimeter.

f A difference in the color coordinates of target data and measurement value obtained from an instrument may occur for certain instrument and measurement environment used.

Resetting the adjustment condition of the color matching

Reset all the adjustment items of the color matching adjusted in [3COLORS], [7COLORS], and [MEASURED].

1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].

2) Press qw to select [3COLORS], [7COLORS], or [MEASURED].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [3COLORS] , [7COLORS] , or [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [RESET].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

6) Press asqw to select [RESET].

124 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

7) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[PICTURE MODE]

[NATIVE]

Sets all the adjustment items of the color matching to the color value of the factory default for the currently selected picture mode.

Set the picture mode in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE].

Sets all the adjustment items for color matching to uncorrected value.

8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The value for color matching is overwritten.

[COLOR CORRECTION]

Colors can be adjusted and registered for each input signal format.

1) Press as to select [COLOR CORRECTION].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[USER]

Standard setting.

For each signal format of RGB signal and YC

B

C

R

/YP

B

P

R

Adjustment is possible within the range of -31 to +31.

signal, six colors of red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow can be adjusted and registered. Press the <ENTER> button and set the details.

[SCREEN SETTING]

Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and the display position of the image.

Correct to the optimum image position for the set screen when the aspect ratio of a projected image is changed.

Set as necessary for the screen in use.

1) Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SCREEN FORMAT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[16:10]

[4:3]

[16:9]

Sets the screen format to 16:10.

Sets the screen format to 4:3.

Sets the screen format to 16:9.

f

Proceed to Step 5) when [4:3] or [16:9] is selected.

5) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].

6) Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].

Note f [SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].

[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]

Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input signal is disrupted.

1) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].

ENGLISH - 125

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BACKUP INPUT MODE] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.

Primary input

[HDMI1]

[OFF]

Secondary input

[HDMI2]

Disables the backup function.

Enables the backup function.

Details

6) Press the <MENU> button.

f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING].

f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF], [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected.

8) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Switches to the secondary input (primary input) automatically when the input signal for primary input

(secondary input) is disrupted.

Disables the automatic input switching function.

Note f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] f The backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] and same signal is input to the primary input and the secondary input.

f To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, make sure that the following three conditions are satisfied to be ready to use the function.

g Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to anything other than [OFF].

g Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.

g Display the image of the primary input or secondary input.

f If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to use the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input or secondary input.

f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the combination of that input is displayed in [PRIMARY INPUT] and

[SECONDARY INPUT] of the [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen.

f

[BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displayed in the input guide ( x page 144) and the

[STATUS] screen ( x

pages 89, 181) when [BACKUP

INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].

When the signal can be switched to the backup input signal using the backup function, [ACTIVE] is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].

When it is not possible, [INACTIVE] is displayed instead.

The secondary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary input is displayed.

The primary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary input is displayed.

f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the input is switched seamlessly if the input is switched between the primary input and the secondary input while it is possible to switch to the backup input signal.

f When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] shows [ACTIVE], the signal is switched to the backup input if a disruption occurs in the input signal.

f When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], the indication in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] will change to [INACTIVE] if the input signal is disrupted and automatically switched to the backup input. In this case, it is not possible to switch to the backup input signal until the original input signal is restored. If the input has switched to the backup input automatically, it is possible to switch to the backup input signal when the original signal has restored. In this case, the current input is maintained.

f The primary input setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA], and [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

[HDMI IN]

Set this item in accordance with the image signal input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal.

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [HDMI IN]

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

126 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[0-1023]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a Bluray disc player) is input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal.

Select this item when the signal output from the DVI-D terminal of the external device (such as a computer) is input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal using a conversion cable, etc.

Select this item also when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer, etc., is input to the

<HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal.

Note f

The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

Setting [EQUALIZER] in [HDMI IN]

Set this function when adjustment of the signal strength is required.

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [EQUALIZER].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

f Adjust while viewing the image.

[0] - [7]

Change the setting when the projected image does not stabilize. The higher the value, correction by the equalizer becomes stronger.

(Factory default setting: [2])

Setting [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [HDMI IN]

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with

HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-500], [HDR ST2084-1000], or

[HDR HLG].

Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

ENGLISH - 127

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Note f Even if [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the gamma mode is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Setting [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [HDMI IN]

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High

Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the

[PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].

Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Note f Even if [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the color space is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Setting [EDID SELECT] in [HDMI IN]

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [EDID SELECT].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2K]

[4K/60p/HDR]

[4K/60p/SDR]

[4K/30p]

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

This is EDID supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

This is EDID supporting SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). This does not support HDR (High Dynamic

Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).

128 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Note f Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR] or [4K/60p/SDR] and the 4K image signal is input.

f Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p] and the 2K image signal or lower is input.

f

For details of the signal described in EDID of [2K], [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” ( x page 296).

Setting [EDID MODE] in [HDMI IN]

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [EDID MODE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT]

[SCREEN FIT]

[USER]

Standard setting.

Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.

Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.

f

Proceed to Step 12) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

9) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].

f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p],

[1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1200p], [2048x1080p],

[2560x1080p], [2560x1440p], [2560x1600p], [3440x1440p], or [3840x2400p].

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.

11) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [30Hz] when [3840x2400p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [2048x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [120Hz], [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for

[RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].

g [3840x2400p], [2048x1080p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]

12) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

13) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].

f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.

f The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after configuring settings.

f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video device.

ENGLISH - 129

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[DisplayPort IN]

Set this item in accordance with the image signal input to the <DisplayPort IN> terminal.

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DisplayPort IN]

1) Press as to select [DisplayPort IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DisplayPort IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[0-1023]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a Bluray disc player) is input to the <DisplayPort IN> terminal using a conversion cable, etc.

Select this item when the signal output from the DisplayPort terminal of the external device (such as a computer) is input to the <DisplayPort IN> terminal.

Select this item also when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer, etc. is input to the

<DisplayPort IN> terminal using a conversion cable, etc.

Note f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

Setting [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [DisplayPort IN]

1) Press as to select [DisplayPort IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DisplayPort IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with

HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-500], [HDR ST2084-1000], or

[HDR HLG].

Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Note f Even if [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the gamma mode is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Setting [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [DisplayPort IN]

1) Press as to select [DisplayPort IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DisplayPort IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

130 - ENGLISH

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High

Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the

[PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].

Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Note f Even if [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the color space is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Setting [EDID SELECT] in [DisplayPort IN]

1) Press as to select [DisplayPort IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DisplayPort IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2K]

[4K/60p/HDR]

[4K/60p/SDR]

[4K/30p]

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

This is EDID supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

This is EDID supporting SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). This does not support HDR (High Dynamic

Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).

Note f Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR] or [4K/60p/SDR] and the 4K image signal is input.

f Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p] and the 2K image signal or lower is input.

f

For details of the signal described in EDID of [2K], [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” ( x page 296)

Setting [EDID MODE] in [DisplayPort IN]

1) Press as to select [DisplayPort IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DisplayPort IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DisplayPort EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT]

[SCREEN FIT]

[USER]

Standard setting.

Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.

Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.

f

Proceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 131

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].

f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1400x1050p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1920x1080p],

[1920x1200p], [2048x1080p], [2560x1080p], [2560x1440p], [2560x1600p], [3440x1440p], or [3840x2400p].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [30Hz] when [3840x2400p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [2048x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [120Hz], [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for

[RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].

g [3840x2400p], [2048x1080p], [1920x1080p]

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].

f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.

f The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after configuring settings.

f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video device.

[SLOT IN]

Set this item in accordance with the image signal of the SLOT input.

The content that can be set varies depending on the structure of the Function Board installed in the slot. This cannot be set when the Function Board is not installed.

When the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[4-1019]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Fixes to the standard signal level.

Fixes to the expanded signal level.

Misadjusted black level in the gray area may improve by selecting this item.

Note f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

Setting [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

132 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

3) Press as to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with

HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the payload ID added to the image signal. In such case, the

[PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to either [HDR ST2084-1000] or [HDR HLG].

Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Setting [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High

Dynamic Range) based on the payload ID added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].

Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Setting [RESOLUTION] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [RESOLUTION], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select an item, and press the <ENTER> button.

f Select [AUTO], [1920x1080i], [1920x1080p], [2048x1080p], [3840x2160p], or [4096x2160p] when the single link signal is being input.

f Select [AUTO], [3840x2160p], or [4096x2160p] when the quad link signal is being input.

Setting [4K DIVISION] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

Set the transmission method in the 4K division when the quad link signal is input to display 4K image.

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [4K DIVISION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[SQUARE]

[INTERLEAVE]

Automatically selects [SQUARE] or [INTERLEAVE].

Fixes the transmission method to Square Division.

Fixes the transmission method to 2-Sample Interleave Division.

ENGLISH - 133

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Setting [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[RGB]

[YP

B

P

R

4:4:4]

[YP

B

P

R

4:2:2]

Automatically selects [RGB], [YP

B

Fixes to [RGB].

P

R

4:4:4], or [YP

B

P

R

4:2:2].

Fixes to [YP

B

P

R

4:4:4].

Fixes to [YP

B

P

R

4:2:2].

Setting [BIT DEPTH] in [SLOT IN] (SDI input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[12-bit]

[10-bit]

Automatically selects [12-bit] or [10-bit].

Fixes to [12-bit].

Fixes to [10-bit].

When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed

Set this item according to the input and output signals when this Function Board is installed in the slot.

Setting [SDI OPT OUT] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

Set whether or not to output the signal from the <SDI OPT OUT> terminal.

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT OUT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the input signal to the <SDI OPT 1 IN> terminal or the <SDI OPT 2 IN> terminal that is selected for input is to be output from the <SDI OPT OUT> terminal.

Does not output the signal from the <SDI OPT OUT> terminal.

134 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT 1] or [SDI OPT 2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The detailed settings screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[4-1019]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Fixes to the standard signal level.

Fixes to the expanded signal level.

Misadjusted black level in the gray area may improve by selecting this item.

Note f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

Setting [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT 1] or [SDI OPT 2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The detailed settings screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with

HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the Payload ID added to the image signal. In such case, the

[PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-1000], or [HDR HLG].

Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Setting [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT 1] or [SDI OPT 2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The detailed settings screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High

Dynamic Range) based on the Payload ID added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].

Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

ENGLISH - 135

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Setting [RESOLUTION] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT 1] or [SDI OPT 2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The detailed settings screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [RESOLUTION], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select an item, and press the <ENTER> button.

f Select [AUTO], [1280x720p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080sF], [2048x1080p], [3840x2160p], or

[4096x2160p].

Setting [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT 1] or [SDI OPT 2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The detailed settings screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[RGB]

[YP

B

P

R

4:4:4]

[YP

B

P

R

4:2:2]

Automatically selects [RGB], [YP

B

Fixes to [RGB].

P

R

4:4:4], or [YP

B

P

R

4:2:2].

Fixes to [YP

B

P

R

4:4:4].

Fixes to [YP

B

P

R

4:2:2].

Setting [BIT DEPTH] in [SLOT IN] (OPT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI OPT 1] or [SDI OPT 2], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The detailed settings screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[12-bit]

[10-bit]

Automatically selects [12-bit] or [10-bit].

Fixes to [12-bit].

Fixes to [10-bit].

When the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

136 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[0-1023]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a Bluray disc player) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

Select this item when the signal output from the DVI-D terminal or HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

Note f

The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

Setting [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with

HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-500], [HDR ST2084-1000], or

[HDR HLG].

Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Note f Even if [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the gamma mode is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Setting [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High

Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the

[PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].

Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

ENGLISH - 137

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Note f Even if [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the color space is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Setting [EDID SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2K]

[4K/30p/HDR]

[4K/30p/SDR]

[4K/60p]

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).

This is EDID supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).

This is EDID supporting SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). This does not support HDR (High Dynamic

Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

Note f Switch the setting to [4K/30p/HDR] or [4K/30p/SDR] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K image signal is input.

f Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/30p/HDR], [4K/30p/SDR], or [4K/60p] and the 2K image signal or lower is input.

f

For details of the signal described in EDID of [2K], [4K/30p/HDR], [4K/30p/SDR], or [4K/60p], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” ( x page 296).

Setting [EDID MODE] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DIGITAL LINK EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

138 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[DEFAULT]

[SCREEN FIT]

[USER]

Standard setting.

Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.

Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.

f

Proceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].

f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p],

[1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1200p], [2048x1080p],

[2560x1080p], [2560x1440p], [2560x1600p], or [3840x2400p].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].

f The setting is fixed to [30Hz] when [3840x2400p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [2048x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [120Hz], [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for

[RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].

g [3840x2400p], [2048x1080p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].

f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.

f The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after configuring settings.

f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video device.

Setting [DIGITAL LINK OUT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK OUT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item to output the DIGITAL LINK signal (including the audio signal) input to the <DIGITAL

LINK IN/LAN> terminal from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

Select this item not to output the DIGITAL LINK signal from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

Note f The DIGITAL LINK signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is output from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal only when the projector is in projection mode. It will not be output when the projector is in standby mode.

ENGLISH - 139

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

When the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (PressIT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[0-1023]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Fixes to [64-940].

Fixes to [0-1023].

When the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[0-1023]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Fixes to [64-940].

Fixes to [0-1023].

Note f The optimal setting varies depending on the installed Function Board and the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the

Operating Instructions of the Function Board and the external devices.

Setting [EQUALIZER] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EQUALIZER].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

f Adjust while viewing the image.

[0] - [7]

Change the setting when the projected image does not stabilize. The higher the value, correction by the equalizer becomes stronger.

(Factory default setting: [0])

Setting [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

140 - ENGLISH

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with

HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-500], [HDR ST2084-1000], or

[HDR HLG].

Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Note f Even if [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the gamma mode is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Setting [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High

Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the

[PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].

Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Note f Even if [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the color space is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Setting [EDID SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2K]

[4K/60p/HDR]

[4K/60p/SDR]

[4K/30p]

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

This is EDID supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

This is EDID supporting SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). This does not support HDR (High Dynamic

Range).

Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).

ENGLISH - 141

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Note f Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR] or [4K/60p/SDR] and the 4K image signal is input.

f Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p] and the 2K image signal or lower is input.

f

For details of the signal described in EDID of [2K], [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” ( x page 296).

Setting [EDID MODE] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)

1) Press as to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SLOT EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT]

[SCREEN FIT]

[USER]

Standard setting.

Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.

Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.

f

Proceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].

f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p],

[1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1200p], [2048x1080p],

[2560x1080p], [2560x1440p], [2560x1600p], [3440x1440p], or [3840x2400p].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [30Hz] when [3840x2400p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [2048x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [120Hz], [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for

[RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].

g [3840x2400p], [2048x1080p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].

f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.

f The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after configuring settings.

f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video device.

142 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

Set the on-screen display.

Setting [OSD POSITION]

Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [OSD POSITION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Sets to the center left of the screen.

Sets to the bottom left of the screen.

Sets to the top center of the screen.

Sets to the center of the screen.

Sets to the bottom center of the screen.

Sets to the upper right of the screen.

Sets to the center right of the screen.

Sets to the bottom right of the screen.

Sets to the upper left of the screen.

Setting [OSD ROTATION]

Set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [OSD ROTATION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[CLOCKWISE]

[COUNTERCLOCKWISE]

Does not rotate the screen.

Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.

Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.

Setting [OSD COLOR]

Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [OSD COLOR].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

ENGLISH - 143

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Sets to yellow.

Sets to blue.

Sets to white.

Sets to green.

Sets to peach.

Sets to brown.

Setting [OSD MEMORY]

Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ON]

[OFF]

Holds the cursor position.

Does not hold the cursor position.

Note f The cursor position is not maintained even if [OSD MEMORY] is set to [ON].

Setting [INPUT GUIDE]

Set whether to display the input guide in the position set in [OSD POSITION].

Input guide is a screen to display information such as the currently selected input name, signal name, memory number, [BACKUP INPUT STATUS], etc.

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ON]

[OFF]

Displays the input guide.

Hides the input guide.

Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]

Set the display/hide of the warning message.

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ON]

[OFF]

Displays the warning message.

Hides the warning message.

144 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Note f If [OFF] is set, the warning message will not be displayed on the projected image even when warning condition such as [TEMPERATURE

WARNING] is detected while using the projector. Also, the following countdown message is not displayed: the message until the power is turned off after the no signal shut‑off function is executed; the message until the light source is turned off after the no signal lights‑out function is executed

[MENU MODE]

Set the display mode of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press as to select [MENU MODE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NORMAL]

[SIMPLE]

Displays all menu items.

Displays some of the menu items that are used for basic setting or adjustment.

Note f

For the menu items that are displayed when [SIMPLE] is set, refer to “Main menu” ( x

page 92), “Sub-menu” ( x page 93).

[BACK COLOR]

Set the display of the projection screen when a signal is not input.

1) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[BLUE]

[BLACK]

[DEFAULT LOGO]

[USER LOGO]

Displays blue in the entire projection screen.

Displays black in the entire projection screen.

Displays the Panasonic logo in the projection screen.

Displays the image registered by the user in the projection screen.

Note f The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACK COLOR] f To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), setting for “NO

SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.

[STARTUP LOGO]

Set the logo display when the power is turned on.

1) Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT LOGO]

[USER LOGO]

[NONE]

Displays the Panasonic logo.

Displays the image registered by the user.

Disables the startup logo display.

Note f When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.

f To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), setting for “NO

SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.

f When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the startup logo is not displayed when the projection is started before the specified time has elapsed after going into the standby mode.

The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].

ENGLISH - 145

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[UNIFORMITY]

Correct the brightness unevenness and color unevenness of the whole image.

Setting [GRADIENT CORRECTION]

Correction is performed in vertical and horizontal directions to approach the even condition when unevenness in one direction is occurring throughout the whole image.

1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

4) Press qw to adjust the level.

Item

[VERTICAL]

[HORIZONTAL]

Press w .

Press q .

Press w .

Press q .

Operation Adjustment

The lower-side color becomes pale, or the upper-side color becomes dark.

The upper-side color becomes pale, or the lower-side color becomes dark.

The left-side color becomes pale, or the right-side color becomes dark.

The right-side color becomes pale, or the left-side color becomes dark.

Range of adjustment

-127 - +127

Setting [FLEXIBLE CORRECTION]

Correct the topical brightness unevenness and color unevenness using the correction value in the projector.

1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [FLEXIBLE CORRECTION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[GEOMETRY UNLINKED]

[OFF]

[GEOMETRY LINKED]

Corrects the brightness unevenness and color unevenness using the correction value in the projector.

The shape of the projected image and the compensation area of uniformity are not linked.

Select this item to correct the brightness unevenness and the color unevenness of the light irradiated from the projection lens.

Does not perform correction using the correction value in the projector. Select this item to prioritize the brightness of the whole projected image.

Corrects the brightness unevenness and color unevenness using the correction value in the projector. When the geometric adjustment is performed, the shape of the projected image and the compensation area of uniformity are linked.

Select this item when projecting at an angle against the flat screen, or when projecting on a curved screen.

f

Proceed to Step 5) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

5) Press as to select [MODE].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[CHROMA ONLY]

[LUMINANCE/CHROMA]

Corrects only the color unevenness. Select this item to prioritize the brightness of the whole projected image.

Corrects the brightness unevenness and the color unevenness.

146 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

Note f When [GEOMETRY LINKED] is selected, set the projection method and perform geometric adjustment, and then correct the uniformity.

f The correction value in the projector can be changed using the “Geometric & Setup Management Software”.

“Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/

It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.

[SHUTTER SETTING]

The operation of the shutter function is set.

Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]

Set the image fade-in and fade-out when the shutter function operates.

1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[FADE-IN]

[FADE-OUT]

Item

[OFF]

[0.5s] - [10.0s]

Adjustment

Does not set fade-in or fade-out.

Sets the fade-in or fade-out time.

Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -

[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.

Note f Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.

Setting [STARTUP]

Automatically enable/disable the shutter function (shutter: closed/opened) when the power is turned on.

1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [STARTUP].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[OPEN]

[CLOSE]

The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the power is turned on.

The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the power is turned on.

Setting the shutter synchronization function

The shutter synchronization function is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out operation can be synchronized.

To use the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect the projectors targeted for synchronization in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <MULTI SYNC IN> / <MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals or the

<SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals. For details of how to connect the projectors, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function” ( x page 65).

1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

ENGLISH - 147

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [MODE].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[MAIN]

[SUB]

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function are not used.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

Set this item only on one of the linked projectors that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].

f When anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if

[MODE] is correctly set.

[LINKED]

[NO LINK]

All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.

The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.

7) Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].

8) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.

Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.

Note f

The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g

The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

For details on contrast synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] ( x

page 176).

f

The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.

g

All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors) g

[MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].

g

[SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].

f

It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.

f

The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER

SETTING] on the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].

f

When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to

1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.

f

The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. The shutter operation at this time will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.

[FREEZE]

Use the freeze function to pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device.

1) Press as to select [FREEZE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f Projected image is paused.

f Press the <MENU> button to release.

Note f [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.

148 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[WAVEFORM MONITOR]

Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output

(luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust.

1) Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

[OFF]

[ON]

Does not display the waveform monitor.

Displays the waveform monitor.

3) Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.

4) Press as to select any horizontal line.

5) Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.

f Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> button is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed.

“Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.

“Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.

“Select line (green)”

“Select line (blue)”

Displayed in green waveform.

Displayed in blue waveform.

Note f Setting is also available from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].

f The waveform monitor is not displayed when on‑screen display is hidden (off).

Adjusting the waveform

Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and adjust.

Image displayable area

Image position

1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.

2) Adjust black level.

f Adjust the black level 0 % of the image signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor using the

[PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS].

3) Adjust white level.

f Adjust the white level 100 % of the image signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor using the

[PICTURE] menu → [CONTRAST].

Adjusting red, green, and blue

1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2] ( x page 98).

2) Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.

3) Adjust dark red areas.

f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the image signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.

ENGLISH - 149

Chapter 4   Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

4) Adjust bright red areas.

f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the image signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor.

5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].

Note f Confirm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting of the input signal is correct before adjusting the black level.

Check the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting in following menu in accordance with the input.

g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] / [DisplayPort IN] / [SLOT IN] → [SIGNAL LEVEL] f When [SCREEN SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3], the signal outside the display area is displayed as a waveform in the waveform monitor with the signal level 0 %.

[CUT OFF]

Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.

1) Press as to select [CUT OFF].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[OFF]

[ON]

Disables cutoff.

Enables cutoff.

Note f

When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).

150 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

[PROJECTOR ID]

The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.

1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ALL]

[1] - [64]

Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.

Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.

Note f To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.

f When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer control.

If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID numbers.

f

Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” ( x page 89) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.

[PROJECTION METHOD]

Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.

Change the [FRONT/REAR] setting when the screen display is inverted.

Change the [FLOOR/CEILING] setting when the screen display is upside down.

Setting [FRONT/REAR]

1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [FRONT/REAR].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[FRONT]

[REAR]

Select this item when installing the projector in front of the screen.

Select this item when installing behind the screen (using translucent screen).

Setting [FLOOR/CEILING]

1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [FLOOR/CEILING].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

ENGLISH - 151

[AUTO]

[FLOOR]

[CEILING]

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Automatically detects the attitude of the projector by the built-in angle sensor.

Set [AUTO] normally.

Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.

Select this item when installing the projector with the top surface of the projector facing down such as ceiling attachment.

Projected image is inverted upside down.

Note f

Refer to “Angle sensor” ( x page 43) for details on the range of the installation attitude that can be detected by the built-in angle sensor.

[LENS]

Perform the setting and operation regarding the projection lens.

[LENS TYPE]

When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting.

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Confirm the type of the projection lens in [LENS TYPE].

Note f The information of the projection lens is automatically acquired when the projector is turned on. The acquired information is displayed in

[LENS TYPE].

f [---] is displayed in [LENS TYPE] if the automatic acquisition of the projection lens information fails.

f Turn off the projector and reattach the projection lens when [‑‑‑] is displayed in [LENS TYPE].

[LENS INFORMATION SETTING]

Confirming the projection lens information

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS INFORMATION SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

[LENS ID]

[LENS NAME]

[LENS TYPE]

Displays the set ID.

Displays the set name.

Displays the projection lens type.

Setting ID to the projection lens

Write the identification information unique to the projection lens into the EEPROM built in the projection lens. Set

ID if required.

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS INFORMATION SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

152 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

5) Press as to select [LENS ID].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ALL]

[1] - [255]

Select this item when the ID number is not to be specified.

Select this item when the ID number is to be set.

Note f [LENS ID] will not return to the factory default setting even when initialized by any of the following methods.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[INITIALIZE]

→ [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

Setting name to the projection lens

A name for identifying individual projection lens can be written into the EEPROM built in the projection lens. Set the name if required.

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS INFORMATION SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS NAME].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select the character, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the character.

8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Name of the projection lens is changed.

Note f Factory default name is [LENS01].

f [LENS NAME] will not return to the factory default setting even when initialized by any of the following methods.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[INITIALIZE]

[LENS MEMORY]

The adjusted lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, periphery focus position and zoom position) can be saved and loaded.

Saving lens position

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY SAVE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 153

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu f If the lens memory has already been saved, the name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION] / [HORIZONTAL POSITION] / [FOCUS POSITION] / [ZOOM

POSITION] / [PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.

7) Press as to select the item to save, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

f Current lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION] / [HORIZONTAL POSITION] / [FOCUS

POSITION] / [ZOOM POSITION] / [PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) is displayed in the confirmation screen.

8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.

9) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

10) After the name is input, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Saving of the lens memory is completed, and returns to the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.

f If you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the lens memory will not be saved.

f If you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the entered name will not be registered and the default name will be used.

f If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be used.

Note f The numeric value information of the periphery focus position is displayed only in following cases.

g ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500

Loading the lens position

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY LOAD].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen is displayed.

f The name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION] /

[HORIZONTAL POSITION] / [FOCUS POSITION] / [ZOOM POSITION] / [PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen.

7) Press as to select the item to load, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The lens will automatically move to the lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, zoom position and periphery focus position) of the loaded lens memory.

Note f Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100 % reproduced. Readjust the focus, periphery focus, zoom, and lens shift after loading the lens memory if required. f If the projection lens is replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION], readjust the focus, periphery focus, zoom, and lens shift, and save the lens memory again.

f The numeric value information of the periphery focus position is displayed only in following cases.

g ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500 f The saved lens memory is loaded in order every time the <FUNCTION> button is pressed when [LENS MEMORY LOAD] is assigned to the

<FUNCTION> button.

154 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Deleting a lens memory

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY DELETE].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen is displayed.

f The name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION] /

[HORIZONTAL POSITION] / [FOCUS POSITION] / [ZOOM POSITION] / [PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen.

9) Press as to select the item to delete, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The numeric value information of the periphery focus position is displayed only in following cases.

g ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500

Changing the lens memory name

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

f The name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION] /

[HORIZONTAL POSITION] / [FOCUS POSITION] / [ZOOM POSITION] / [PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.

9) Press as to select the name to change, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.

10) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

ENGLISH - 155

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

11) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Saving of the lens memory is completed, and returns to the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.

f If you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be registered.

f If you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be registered and the default name will be used.

f If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be used.

Note f The numeric value information of the periphery focus position is displayed only in following cases.

g ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500

[LENS HOME POSITION]

Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS HOME POSITION].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The projection lens is moved to the home position.

Note f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.

f The home position does not match with the optical image center position.

f [LENS HOME POSITION] can also be executed by pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the lens shift adjustment screen is displayed.

[LENS CALIBRATION]

Detect the lens shift adjustment limit value, and perform the calibration in the adjustment range. Execute the lens calibration after attaching the projection lens.

1) Press as to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The lens calibration is started.

f After completing the calibration in the adjustment range, the projection lens will move to the home position.

f To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Note f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu during lens calibration. The operation cannot be canceled during calibration.

f [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when the lens calibration is not performed correctly.

f The origin position of the lens mounter and the home position of the projection lens are automatically updated when the lens calibration is performed. The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result. It does not match with the optical image center position.

f Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration execution.

156 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[SLOT SETTING]

Set the power supply to the slot.

The content that can be set varies depending on the Function Board installed in the slot. This cannot be set when the Function Board is not installed.

[SLOT STANDBY]

Set the power supply during the standby mode.

1) Press as to select [SLOT STANDBY].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

The power is supplied to the Function Board even when the projector is in standby mode.

The power supply to the Function Board is stopped when the projector goes into standby mode.

Note f [SLOT STANDBY] is fixed to [DISABLE] when the following Function Board is installed.

g 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) g Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) g Function Board by other manufacturers

[SLOT POWER ON]

Start the power supply that was stopped.

1) Press as to select [SLOT POWER ON].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The power supply to the Function Board is started.

Note f [SLOT POWER ON] cannot be operated when the following Function Board is installed.

g 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) g g DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) g

Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB)

Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP)

[SLOT FORCED TERMINATION]

Forcefully stop the power supply.

1) Press as to select [SLOT FORCED TERMINATION].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The power supply to the Function Board is stopped.

Note f Use [SLOT FORCED TERMINATION] only when the operation of the Function Board needs to be shut down forcefully because it cannot be shut down by normal operation of the Function Board.

f [SLOT FORCED TERMINATION] cannot be operated when the following Function Board is installed.

g 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) g Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) g DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) g Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP)

ENGLISH - 157

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[OPERATION SETTING]

Set the operation method of the projector.

The settings are reflected when “Initial setting (operation setting)” ( x page 72) in the

[INITIAL SETTING] screen is already set.

If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the brightness decreases to half may shorten or the brightness may decrease.

Setting [OPERATING MODE]

1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NORMAL]

[ECO]

[QUIET]

Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours *1 .

The brightness will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to prioritize the life of the light source. The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours *1 .

The brightness will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but set this item to prioritize the operation with low noise. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours *1 .

[USER1]

[USER2]

[USER3]

Set [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] individually.

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust. The value of runtime is just an estimate, and is not the warranty period.

5) Press as to select [APPLY].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f If the consolidated runtime of the projector exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. The consolidated runtime can be confirmed in the [STATUS] screen. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] for details.

Setting [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]

Adjust the maximum level to correct screen brightness according to the changes in brightness of the light source.

1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

4) Press qw to adjust.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Increases the maximum level of brightness correction.

Decreases the maximum level of brightness correction.

Range of adjustment

5.0 % - 100.0 %

5) Press as to select [APPLY].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

158 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Note f [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] cannot be adjusted when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL], [ECO], or [QUIET].

f The brightness is corrected using this setting when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC].

Setting [LIGHT OUTPUT]

Adjust the brightness of light source.

The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LIGHT OUTPUT]. The most recent setting is reflected in both items.

1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].

4) Press qw to adjust.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Brightness

The screen becomes brighter.

Runtime

The runtime becomes shorter.

The screen becomes darker.

The runtime becomes longer.

Range of adjustment

5.0 % - 100.0 % *1

*1 The upper limit of the adjustment range is the value set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [MAX LIGHT

OUTPUT LEVEL].

5) Press as to select [APPLY].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].

f The uniformity of the brightness between multiple displays can be maintained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT] for each projector when structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.

Relationship between brightness and runtime

The projector can be operated with arbitrary brightness and runtime by combining the settings of [MAX LIGHT

OUTPUT LEVEL], [LIGHT OUTPUT], and [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].

The relationship between the [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting, brightness, and the estimated runtime is as follows. Make the setting depending on the desired brightness of the projected image and runtime.

The values of the brightness and the runtime are just an estimate, and the graph indicating the relationship is just an example. Also, these do not indicate the warranty period.

ENGLISH - 159

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu r

PT-REZ12

f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

100

90

80

70

60

50

Brightness (lm)

12 000

10 800

9 600

8 400

7 200

6 000

Estimated runtime

20 000

21 500

24 000

27 000

30 700

35 200

*1 (hours)

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

100.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20 000 23 040 26 080 29 120 32 160

Estimated runtime (hours) f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

80

70

60

50

40

Brightness (lm)

9 600

8 400

7 200

6 000

4 800

12 000

6 000

35 200

Estimated runtime *1 (hours)

10 400

21 400

34 100

48 800

66 400

*1 Estimated runtime is the time the brightness is maintained constant when the projector is used with the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC

CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust. The brightness will gradually decrease after exceeding this time.

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

10 400

9 600

4 800

21 600 32 800 44 000 55 200

Estimated runtime (hours) r

PT-REZ10

f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

100

90

80

70

60

50

66 400

Brightness (lm)

10 000

9 000

8 000

7 000

6 000

5 000

Start of use Estimated runtime

Image of brightness change over time

Hours

Estimated runtime

20 000

21 400

24 000

27 100

30 700

35 300

*1 (hours)

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

10 000 100.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20 000 23 060 26 120 29 180 32 240

Estimated runtime (hours)

5 000

35 300

160 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

80

70

60

50

40

Brightness (lm)

8 000

7 000

6 000

5 000

4 000

Estimated runtime *1 (hours)

10 700

22 000

35 000

50 100

68 000

*1 Estimated runtime is the time the brightness is maintained constant when the projector is used with the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC

CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust. The brightness will gradually decrease after exceeding this time.

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

10 700

8 000

4 000

22 160 33 620 45 080 56 540

Estimated runtime (hours) r

PT-REZ80

f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

100

90

80

70

60

50

68 000

Brightness (lm)

8 000

7 200

6 400

5 600

4 800

4 000

Start of use Estimated runtime

Image of brightness change over time

Hours

Estimated runtime

20 000

21 300

24 000

27 200

31 000

35 600

*1 (hours)

*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the

[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust.

100.0

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20 000 23 120 26 240 29 360

Estimated runtime (hours) f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]

32 480

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)

80

70

60

50

40

Brightness (lm)

6 400

5 600

4 800

4 000

3 200

8 000

35 600

4 000

Estimated runtime *1 (hours)

11 800

24 300

38 800

55 800

76 000

*1 Estimated runtime is the time the brightness is maintained constant when the projector is used with the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC

CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m 3 dust. The brightness will gradually decrease after exceeding this time.

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

11 800 24 640 37 480 50 320 63 160

Estimated runtime (hours)

6 400

3 200

76 000

Start of use Estimated runtime

Image of brightness change over time

Hours

ENGLISH - 161

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Note f Under influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation environment, etc., the runtime may be shorter than the estimation.

f If the consolidated runtime of the projector exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. The consolidated runtime can be confirmed in the [STATUS] screen. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] for details.

[LIGHT OUTPUT]

Adjust the brightness of light source.

The setting is reflected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” ( x page 72) in the

[INITIAL

SETTING] screen or with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [LIGHT OUTPUT].

The most recent setting is reflected in both items.

1) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].

2) Press qw to adjust.

Operation

Press w .

Press q .

Adjustment

Brightness

The screen becomes brighter.

Runtime

The runtime becomes shorter.

The screen becomes darker.

The runtime becomes longer.

Range of adjustment

5.0 % - 100.0 % *1

*1 The upper limit of the adjustment range is the value set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [MAX LIGHT

OUTPUT LEVEL].

Note f [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].

f The uniformity of the brightness between multiple displays can be maintained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT] for each projector when structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]

The projector has an internal brightness sensor to measure brightness and color of the light source, and is equipped with the brightness control function to correct brightness and white balance of the projected image according to the changes in brightness and color of the light source.

By using this function, in such a condition that multiple screens are configured using projected images of multiple projectors, you can reduce changes in overall brightness and white balance of the multiple screens due to aging of the light source and suppress variation in brightness and white balance to preserve uniformity.

To synchronize the brightness control function of multiple projectors, set the administrator account (user name and password) of all linked projectors to the same setting.

Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]

Set the operation of the brightness control function.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [CONSTANT MODE].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[AUTO]

[PC]

Does not perform automatic correction of the brightness and white balance.

Performs automatic correction to maintain the brightness and white balance based on the measurement result of the brightness sensor.

Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” *1 .

*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

162 - ENGLISH

[OFF]

[ON]

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu f

Proceed to Step 9) when [OFF] is selected.

f

Proceed to Step 11)

when [PC] is selected.

7) Press as to select [LINK].

8) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[GROUP A]

[GROUP B]

[GROUP C]

[GROUP D]

Performs automatic correction by this projector alone without synchronizing with other projectors.

The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of [LIGHT

OUTPUT] smaller.

Performs automatic correction by synchronizing multiple projectors.

Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function.

You can register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group.

f

Proceed to Step 11)

when [AUTO] is selected in Step 6)

.

9) Press as to select [STARTUP CALIBRATION].

10) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

Does not measure the brightness and color of the light source when the power is turned on.

Measures the brightness and color of the light source by the brightness sensor after the power is turned on and the light source is illuminated.

11) Press as to select [REGULAR CALIBRATION].

12) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Does not measure the brightness and color of the light source periodically.

Measures the brightness and color of the light source by the brightness sensor at the time specified by [CALIBRATION TIME].

f

Proceed to Step 17) when [OFF] is selected.

13) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].

14) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).

15) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a time.

f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.

16) Press the <ENTER> button.

f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.

17) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].

18) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ON]

[OFF]

Displays the time to complete the measurement while the brightness and color of the light source are measured by the brightness sensor.

Does not display a message during the measurement.

19) Press as to select [APPLY].

ENGLISH - 163

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

20) Press the <ENTER> button.

f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] and the <ENTER> button is pressed in following cases, the brightness and color of the light source at that time is set as the correction target for the brightness and white balance of the screen, and the automatic correction will start.

g When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] for the first time after purchasing the projector g When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] for the first time after executing the

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] f When [CONSTANT MODE] was previously set to anything other than [OFF], and the correction target for the brightness and the white balance is already set, pressing the <ENTER> button displays the confirmation screen. Proceed to Step

21)

.

f When [LINK] is set to [GROUP A] to [GROUP D] and the <ENTER> button is pressed, the group name is displayed on the screens of the projectors that have been set as the same group.

LINK GROUP A

21) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[YES]

[NO]

Maintains the previously set brightness and white balance as the correction target.

Reconfigures the current brightness and color of the light source as the correction target of the brightness and white balance of the screen.

22) Press the <ENTER> button.

f Starts the automatic correction.

Note f When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) for at least two minutes, since the brightness sensor will measure the brightness and color of the light source after the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting has been completed.

f If the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] set to [AUTO] or [PC], measurement of the brightness and color may not be possible when the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed) within 10 minutes after turning on the light source. If the measurement was not possible, correction of the brightness is performed approximately two minutes after the shutter function is disabled (shutter: opened).

f When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] set to [AUTO] or [PC], the brightness and color of the light source do not stabilize for approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. Therefore, the brightness and color of the light source will be automatically measured after approximately eight minutes have elapsed after the light source is turned on.

f When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] set to [AUTO], and [LINK] set to [OFF], the brightness will be corrected until it reaches the value set in [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

f The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation environment of the projector.

f When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the brightness control.

f When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set [REGULAR CALIBRATION] to [ON]. If it is not set, correction will not be performed automatically.

f The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not operate while measuring the brightness and color of the light source with the brightness sensor.

f The setting of each item in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] will be reflected by selecting [APPLY] and pressing the <ENTER> button.

f The [STARTUP CALIBRATION] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [STARTUP CALIBRATION] f The [REGULAR CALIBRATION] setting item is common with the following menu item.

f g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [REGULAR CALIBRATION]

The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [CALIBRATION TIME] f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [CALIBRATION MESSAGE]

Displaying [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]

Display the brightness control status.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS].

164 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen is displayed.

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen display example

When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]

The screen shows the status that the brightness control is disabled.

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS

CONSTANT MODE

PROJECTOR

OFF

1

MENU

RETURN

When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is set to [OFF]

The screen shows the status of the brightness control in one projector.

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS

LINK

PROJECTOR

OFF 5

1

6

MENU

RETURN

When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is set to [GROUP A] through [GROUP D]

The screen shows the status of the brightness control of synchronized projectors (up to eight units), including the projector being controlled through the on-screen menu.

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS

LINK

1:

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

UPDATE

PROJECTOR

PROJECTOR2

PROJECTOR3

GROUP A

192. 168. 30. 2

192. 168. 30. 3

192. 168. 30. 4

1

2

3

4

5

7

MENU SELECT

8

When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [PC]

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS

CONSTANT MODE

PROJECTOR

PC 5

1

6

MENU

RETURN

1 Display the name of the projector.

2 Display the synchronized group.

3 Display the IP address of the projector.

ENGLISH - 165

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

4 Display the names and IP addresses of projectors in same group detected over the network.

For IPv6 address, “(IPv6)” is displayed instead of the IP address.

5 Display the status by color.

Green: There is an allowance for brightness correction.

Yellow: There is little allowance for brightness correction.

Red: There is a brightness control error.

6 Display error detailed messages.

7 Display error messages.

When the message [Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.] appears, it means that synchronization with the projector displayed in red has failed.

Press as to select the projector displayed in red, and press the <ENTER> button to display the error details.

8 Update to the latest status information.

r

Error details

Error message

[Exceed maximum number of projectors.]

[Please check the COMMAND

CONTROL setting.]

Measures to take f Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight.

f

To synchronize nine or more projectors, use a computer and “Multi Monitoring & Control

Software” *1 .

f Set the password of the administrator account.

f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND CONTROL] to [ON] for the projector in error.

f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT] of all linked projectors to the same value.

f Set the administrator account (user name and password) of all linked projectors to the same setting.

[Please check the USER NAME and PASSWORD in the COMMAND

CONTROL setting.]

[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL. Please check projector status.]

[Brightness Sensor Error] f The projector is in standby. Switch on the power.

f There is a problem with the brightness sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the power, consult your dealer.

*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Note f If the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the list, check the following: g Are there devices with the same IP address on the network?

g

Are the LAN cables connected correctly? ( x page 216)

g Are the subnets of the projectors the same?

g Are the same [LINK] settings applied to a group?

f

Refer to [PROJECTOR NAME] ( x page 206) or

“[Network config] page” ( x page 234) on how to change the projector name.

Setting [STARTUP CALIBRATION]

Set whether to measure the brightness and color of the light source when the power is turned on.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [STARTUP CALIBRATION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Does not measure the brightness and color of the light source when the power is turned on.

Measures the brightness and color of the light source by the brightness sensor after the power is turned on and the light source is illuminated.

Note f The [STARTUP CALIBRATION] setting will be reflected at the time when the item is switched using qw .

f The [STARTUP CALIBRATION] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [STARTUP CALIBRATION]

166 - ENGLISH

[OFF]

[ON]

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Setting [REGULAR CALIBRATION]

Set whether to measure the brightness and color of the light source at a specified time.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [REGULAR CALIBRATION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

Does not measure the brightness and color of the light source periodically.

Measures the brightness and color of the light source by the brightness sensor at the time specified by [CALIBRATION TIME].

f

Proceed to Step 5) when [ON] is selected.

5) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).

7) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a time.

f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.

Note f The [REGULAR CALIBRATION] setting will be reflected at the time when the item is switched using qw .

f The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reflected at the time when you enter the time and then press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGULAR CALIBRATION] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [REGULAR CALIBRATION] f The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CALIBRATION TIME]

Setting [CALIBRATION MESSAGE]

Set whether to display the time to complete the measurement while the brightness and color of the light source are measured.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ON]

[OFF]

Displays the time to complete the measurement while the brightness and color of the light source are measured by the brightness sensor.

Does not display a message during the measurement.

Note f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reflected at the time when the item is switched using qw .

f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CALIBRATION MESSAGE]

ENGLISH - 167

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Brightness control adjustment procedure example

The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the brightness and white balance of eight projectors connected in a network.

1) Connect all projectors to a switching hub using LAN cables. ( x page 216)

2) Switch on all projectors and start projection.

3) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF], and select [APPLY], and then press the <ENTER> button.

4) Set [OPERATING MODE] of each projector to the same setting. ( x page 158)

5) Set the administrator account, [SUBNET MASK], and [IP ADDRESS] of each projector.

f Set the administrator account (user name and password) of all linked projectors to the same setting.

f To be able to communicate over the network, set the same value in [SUBNET MASK] for all projectors and set a different value in [IP ADDRESS] for each projector.

6) Wait for at least eight minutes after projection has started until the light source brightness becomes steady.

7) Set all items in the [PICTURE] menu of all projectors to the same values.

8) Adjust [COLOR MATCHING] to match colors.

9) Display the internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.

10) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all projectors to 100 % or the maximum value that can be set.

f Depending on the [OPERATING MODE] settings, [LIGHT OUTPUT] may not be able to be set to 100 %.

11) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of the projector with the least brightness to 90 % or 10 % lower than the maximum value that can be set.

12) Adjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of each projector.

f Adjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all the other projectors so that the brightness will be the same as the projector with the least brightness.

13) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A] in all projectors.

14) Select [APPLY] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] and press the <ENTER> button in all projectors.

f Automatic correction by the brightness control function starts.

Note f Automatic correction is performed whenever the light source lights up by switching on/off the projector, etc.

f When the variation in brightness or color has increased due to aging of the light source, or when the light source is replaced, reset

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].

[STANDBY MODE]

Set the power consumption during standby.

1) Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NORMAL]

[ECO]

Select this item when using the network function during standby.

Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.

Note f When [ECO] is set, the network function, the <SERIAL OUT> terminal, and some RS-232C commands become inoperable during standby.

When [NORMAL] is set, the network function and the <SERIAL OUT> terminal can be used during standby.

f When [ECO] is set, it may take approximately 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on, compared with when [NORMAL] is set.

f When [NORMAL] is set, power can be supplied using the <DC OUT> terminal even if the projector is in standby mode. If [ECO] is set, power cannot be supplied in standby mode.

168 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[QUICK STARTUP]

Set if the [QUICK STARTUP] function is enabled or disabled.

1) Press as to select [QUICK STARTUP].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the [QUICK STARTUP] function.

Enables the [QUICK STARTUP] function until the specified time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after the projector enters the standby mode. The time until the projection starts after the power is turned on will be reduced during the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid.

f

Proceed to Step 3) when [ON] is selected.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [QUICK STARTUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press qw to switch [VALID PERIOD].

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[30MIN.]

[60MIN.]

[90MIN.]

Sets the time until the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled after the projector enters the standby mode.

Select a desired valid period.

Note f [QUICK STARTUP] cannot be set when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].

f When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power consumption during standby becomes high during the period when the [QUICK

STARTUP] function is valid.

f When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled when the time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after the projector enters the standby mode. The startup time and power consumption will be the same as when [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].

f When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks red while in the standby mode during the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid. The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights up red when the specified time set in

[VALID PERIOD] elapses after the projector enters the standby mode.

f When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid is counted as the projector runtime.

[POWER MANAGEMENT]

Set the function to save power consumption when there is no input signal.

[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]

This is a function to automatically turn off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for specific period. The time until the light source is turned off can be set.

1) Press as to select [POWER MANAGEMENT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [POWER MANAGEMENT] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DISABLE]

[10SEC.] - [5MIN.]

Disables the no signal lights-out function.

Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period.

Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].

Note f The [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] f The fan will rotate to cool the projector while the no signal lights‑out function is operating and the light source is turned off. Also, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blink green slowly.

f When [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again from the condition that the light source has turned off by this function.

ENGLISH - 169

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu g When the signal is input g When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed g When the <POWER ON> button is pressed g When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: opened) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button g When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up f The no signal lights-out function is disabled in following case.

g When [BACK COLOR] is set to [DEFAULT LOGO] or [USER LOGO], and the Panasonic logo or the image registered by the user is displayed in the projected image

[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

This is a function to automatically set the power of the projector to standby mode when there is no input signal for specific period. The time before switching to standby can be set.

1) Press as to select [POWER MANAGEMENT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [POWER MANAGEMENT] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DISABLE]

[10MIN.] - [90MIN.]

Disables the no signal shut‑off function.

Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.

Note f The [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

[NO SIGNAL SETTING]

Set the operation of the function when there is no input signal.

[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]

Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input signal is disrupted.

1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [BACKUP INPUT MODE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.

Primary input

[HDMI1]

[OFF]

Secondary input

[HDMI2]

Disables the backup function.

Enables the backup function.

Details

8) Press the <MENU> button.

f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

9) Press as to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING].

f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF], [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected.

170 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

10) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Switches to the secondary input (primary input) automatically when the input signal for primary input

(secondary input) is disrupted.

Disables the automatic input switching function.

Note f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] f The backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] and same signal is input to the primary input and the secondary input.

f To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, make sure that the following three conditions are satisfied to be ready to use the function.

g Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to anything other than [OFF].

g Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.

g Display the image of the primary input or secondary input.

f If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to use the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input or secondary input.

f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the combination of that input is displayed in [PRIMARY INPUT] and

[SECONDARY INPUT] of the [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen.

f

[BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displayed in the input guide ( x page 144) and the

[STATUS] screen ( x

pages 89, 181 ) when [BACKUP

INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].

When the signal can be switched to the backup input signal using the backup function, [ACTIVE] is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].

When it is not possible, [INACTIVE] is displayed instead.

The secondary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary input is displayed.

The primary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary input is displayed.

f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the input is switched seamlessly if the input is switched between the primary input and the secondary input while it is possible to switch to the backup input signal.

f When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] shows [ACTIVE], the signal is switched to the backup input if a disruption occurs in the input signal.

f When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], the indication in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] will change to [INACTIVE] if the input signal is disrupted and automatically switched to the backup input. In this case, it is not possible to switch to the backup input signal until the original input signal is restored. If the input has switched to the backup input automatically, it is possible to switch to the backup input signal when the original signal has has been restored. In this case, the current input is maintained.

f The primary input setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA], and [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

[SECONDARY INPUT]

Set the secondary input switching function that will automatically switch to the specified input when the input signal of projecting image is discontinued.

1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SECONDARY INPUT].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECONDARY INPUT] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the input to be specified as the switching destination, and press the <ENTER> button.

[OFF]

[HDMI1]

[HDMI2]

[DisplayPort]

[SDI [SLOT]] *1

[SDI OPT1 [SLOT]] *2

[SDI OPT2 [SLOT]] *2

[DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]] *3

[PressIT [SLOT]] *5

[SLOT] *6

Disables the secondary input switching function.

Sets the secondary input to HDMI1.

Sets the secondary input to HDMI2.

Sets the secondary input to DisplayPort.

Sets the secondary input to SDI.

Sets the secondary input to SDI OPT1.

Sets the secondary input to SDI OPT2.

Sets the secondary input to DIGITAL LINK *4 .

Sets the secondary input to PressIT.

Sets the secondary input to SLOT.

ENGLISH - 171

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

*1 This item can be selected when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>.

*2 This item can be selected when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>.

*3 This item can be selected when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>.

*4 Individual input on the twisted‑pair‑cable transmitter or the DIGITAL LINK output supported device cannot be specified.

*5 This item can be selected when the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in <SLOT>.

*6 This item can be selected when the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in <SLOT>.

Note f When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the secondary input switching function will not operate even when [SECONDARY INPUT] is set to anything other than [OFF]. The backup input switching function is prioritized.

[BACK COLOR]

Set the display of the screen when a signal is not input.

1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[BLUE]

[BLACK]

[DEFAULT LOGO]

[USER LOGO]

Displays blue in the entire screen.

Displays black in the entire screen.

Displays the Panasonic logo in the screen.

Displays the image registered by the user in the screen.

Note f The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACK COLOR] f To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), setting for “NO

SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.

[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]

This is a function to automatically turn off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for specific period. The time until the light source is turned off can be set.

1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DISABLE]

[10SEC.] - [5MIN.]

Disables the no signal lights-out function.

Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period.

Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].

Note f The [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [POWER MANAGEMENT] → [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] f The fan will rotate to cool the projector while the no signal lights‑out function is operating and the light source is turned off. Also, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blink green slowly.

f When [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again from the condition that the light source has turned off by this function.

g g When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed g

When the signal is input

When the <POWER ON> button is pressed

172 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu g When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: opened) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button g When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up f The no signal lights-out function is disabled in following cases.

g When [BACK COLOR] is set to [DEFAULT LOGO] or [USER LOGO], and the Panasonic logo or the image registered by the user is displayed in the projected image

[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

A function that automatically switches the power source of the projector to standby if there is no input signal for a certain period of time. The time before switching to standby can be set.

1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DISABLE]

[10MIN.] - [90MIN.]

Disables the No signal shut‑off function.

Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.

Note f The [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [POWER MANAGEMENT] → [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

[INITIAL STARTUP]

Set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>.

1) Press as to select [INITIAL STARTUP].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[LAST MEMORY]

[STANDBY]

[ON]

Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.

Starts up the projector in standby.

Starts projecting immediately.

[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.

1) Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to select the input, and press the <ENTER> button.

[LAST USED]

[HDMI1]

[HDMI2]

[DisplayPort]

[SDI [SLOT]] *1

[SDI OPT1 [SLOT]] *2

[SDI OPT2 [SLOT]] *2

[DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]] *3

[PressIT [SLOT]] *4

[SLOT] *5

[INPUT1] - [INPUT10] *3 *6

Keeps the input selected last.

Sets the input to HDMI1.

Sets the input to HDMI2.

Sets the input to DisplayPort.

Sets the input to SDI.

Sets the input to SDI OPT1.

Sets the input to SDI OPT2.

Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.

Sets the input to PressIT.

Sets the input to SLOT.

Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device to the specified input.

*1 This item can be selected when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>.

*2 This item can be selected when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>.

ENGLISH - 173

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

*3 This item can be selected when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>.

*4 This item can be selected when the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in <SLOT>.

*5 This item can be selected when the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in <SLOT>.

*6 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in <SLOT>, its input name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.

[DATE AND TIME]

Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.

Setting the time zone

1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [TIME ZONE].

4) Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].

Note f The [TIME ZONE] setting is reset to the factory default setting when the projector is initialized by one of the following methods. However, the date and time based on the local date and time setting (Coordinated Universal Time, UTC, Universal Time, Coordinated) will be maintained without being initialized.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[INITIALIZE]

Setting the date and time manually

1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.

6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The setting of the date and time will be completed.

Note f The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult your dealer.

Setting the date and time automatically

To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.

1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].

174 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The setting of the date and time will be completed.

Note f If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON], [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to

[OFF]. If [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].

f

Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” ( x page 236) for details.

[SCHEDULE]

Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.

Enabling/disabling the schedule function

1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the schedule function.

Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” ( x page 175) or “How to set a program” ( x page 175) for how to set the schedule.

Note f When [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON] while the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the [STANDBY MODE] setting is forcibly switched to [NORMAL], and the setting cannot be changed to [ECO]. The [STANDBY MODE] setting will not return to original even if [SCHEDULE] is set to [OFF] in this condition.

How to assign a program

1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].

2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.

3) Select and assign a program to each day of week.

f Press as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.

f You can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “- - -” indicates that the program number has not been set.

How to set a program

Set up to 16 commands to each program.

1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].

2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].

4) Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.

5) Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button.

f You can change the page using qw .

6) Press asqw to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).

7) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a time, and then press the <ENTER> button.

8) Press asqw to select [COMMAND].

9) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 175

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

10) Press as to select a [COMMAND].

f For [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw .

f When [INPUT] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press asqw to select the input to be set.

[COMMAND]

[POWER ON]

[STANDBY]

[QUICK STARTUP]

[SHUTTER]

[INPUT]

[OPERATING MODE]

*7

Detailed settings of

[COMMAND]

[ON]

[OFF]

[OPEN]

[CLOSE]

[HDMI1]

[HDMI2]

[DisplayPort]

[SDI [SLOT]] *1

[SDI OPT1 [SLOT]] *2

[SDI OPT2 [SLOT]] *2

[DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]] *3

[PressIT [SLOT]] *4

[SLOT] *5

[INPUT1] - [INPUT10] *6

[NORMAL]

[ECO]

[QUIET]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[USER3]

Description

Switches on the projector.

Enters standby.

Enables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[QUICK STARTUP].

Disables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[QUICK STARTUP].

Disables the shutter function (shutter: opened).

Enables the shutter function (shutter: closed).

Switches the input to HDMI1.

Switches the input to HDMI2.

Switches the input to DisplayPort.

Switches the input to SDI.

Switches the input to SDI OPT1.

Switches the input to SDI OPT2.

Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.

Switches the input to PressIT.

Switches the input to SLOT.

Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the

DIGITAL LINK output supported device to the specified input.

Prioritizes brightness.

Prioritizes the life of the light source.

Prioritizes the operation with low noise.

Controls the power with the setting set to [USER1].

Controls the power with the setting set to [USER2].

Controls the power with the setting set to [USER3].

*1 This item can be selected when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>.

*2 This item can be selected when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>.

*3 This item can be selected when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>.

*4 This item can be selected when the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in <SLOT>.

*5 This item can be selected when the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in <SLOT>.

*6 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in <SLOT>, its input name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.

*7 If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the luminance decreases by half may shorten or the luminance may decrease.

11) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The command is fixed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.

f After the command is fixed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.

12) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f To delete a command that has been already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the screen in Step

5)

is displayed, or select [DELETE] at the screen in Step

6) and press the <ENTER> button.

f If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command number.

f

The operating time will be the local time. ( x page 174)

f If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in

[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with the schedule function may not be executed.

[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

Set the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function.

176 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of the image signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors. The shutter synchronization function is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out operation can be synchronized.

To use the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect the projectors targeted for synchronization in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <MULTI SYNC IN> /

<MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals or the <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals. For details of how to connect the

projectors, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function” ( x page 65).

Note f The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.

f The shutter synchronization function will operate even when there are different models within the linked projectors. However, the synchronization function will not operate when there is a DLP projector that is constructed with three DLP chips within the linked projectors.

f The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are the same as the following setting items.

g The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]

Setting the contrast synchronization function

1) Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [MODE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[MAIN]

[SUB]

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function are not used.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

Set this item only on one projector out of the projectors that are linked.

The projector set as the [MAIN] will calculate the brightness level of the image signal to become optimum on the whole combined screen for each frame. All the projectors targeted for contrast synchronization will control the dynamic contrast function based on the calculation result.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].

f When anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if

[MODE] or the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [CONTRAST MODE] is correctly set.

[LINKED]

[NO LINK]

All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.

The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.

5) Press as to select [CONTRAST MODE].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[1]

[2]

Select this item when misadjusted black level (grayish black) is bothersome in the dark scenes.

Performs conventional correction to adjust the black level by decreasing the general brightness.

Select this item when topical radiance is required even in dark scenes.

Performs standard correction of the projector that does not decrease the brightness too much.

(Factory default setting) f This setting item is common with the following menu item.

g The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [CONTRAST MODE]

7) Press as to select [CONTRAST SYNC].

ENGLISH - 177

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

8) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function is not used.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function is used.

Note f The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.

g All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors) g [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].

g [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].

g If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

g If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

f It is possible to set [CONTRAST SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.

Setting the shutter synchronization function

1) Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [MODE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[MAIN]

[SUB]

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function are not used.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

Set this item only on one of the linked projectors that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation.

Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].

f When anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if

[MODE] or the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [CONTRAST MODE] is correctly set.

[LINKED]

[NO LINK]

All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.

The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.

5) Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.

Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.

Note f The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.

g All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors) g [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].

g [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].

g If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [SHUTTER SYNC] setting.

g If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [SHUTTER SYNC] setting.

f It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.

178 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu f The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER

SETTING] on the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].

f When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to

1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.

f The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. The shutter operation at this time will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.

[TERMINAL SELECT]

Set the terminals to be used when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used.

1) Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [TERMINAL SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[BNC]

[SERIAL]

Uses the <MULTI SYNC IN> / <MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals (BNC).

Uses the <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals.

Note f [BNC] and [SERIAL] cannot be used simultaneously within the linked projectors.

[RS-232C]

Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminals. For details on the connection

method for RS-232C communication, refer to “<SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminal” ( x page 284).

Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL IN> terminal

1) Press as to select [RS-232C].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.

f

Proceed to Step 5) unless the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) or the

Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in the slot.

3) Press as to select [INPUT SELECT].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[PROJECTOR]

[DIGITAL LINK]

[SLOT]

Performs the RS-232C communication with the <SERIAL IN> terminal of the projector.

Performs the RS-232C communication via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model

No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) and the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL

LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot.

Performs communication via the Function Board by other manufacturers installed in the slot.

5) Press as to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[9600]

[19200]

[38400]

Select the proper speed.

7) Press as to select [(IN) PARITY].

8) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

ENGLISH - 179

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[NONE]

[EVEN]

[ODD]

Select the parity condition.

Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL OUT> terminal

1) Press as to select [RS-232C].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[9600]

[19200]

[38400]

Select the proper speed.

5) Press as to select [(OUT) PARITY].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NONE]

[EVEN]

[ODD]

Select the parity condition.

Setting the response

1) Press as to select [RS-232C].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[ON]

[OFF]

Returns the response when an ID is designated as ALL.

Does not return the response when an ID is designated as ALL.

5) Press as to select [GROUP].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

[A] - [Z]

Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS-232C. You can set groups from

[A] to [Z]. The projector responds when the ID of RS-232C matches the setting.

7) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].

8) Press qw to switch the item.

[ON]

[OFF]

Returns the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.

Does not return the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.

Note f When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication using the serial terminal is available only when the corresponding device

(such as the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot) is connected.

f When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication speed for input is fixed to 9 600 bps and the parity is fixed to “NONE”.

180 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[REMOTE2 MODE]

You can set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

1) Press as to select [REMOTE2 MODE].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DEFAULT]

[USER]

Uses pin assignment of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal in standard setting. ( x page 288)

Changes the setting of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

f

Proceed to Step 3) when [USER] is selected.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

4) Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.

[FUNCTION BUTTON]

Set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.

1) Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select a function.

[DISABLE]

[SUB MEMORY]

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

Disables the <FUNCTION> button.

Displays the sub memory list. ( x page 197)

Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting according to the input signal of the image being projected.

f When the input is SDI g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] f When the input is SDI OPT1 / SDI OPT2 of Function Board g The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] → [SDI OPT1] / [SDI OPT2] → [SYSTEM

SELECTOR] f

When the input is anything other than SDI / SDI OPT1 / SDI OPT2

The [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR]

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. ( x page 102)

[FREEZE]

Temporarily pauses the image. ( x page 148)

[WAVEFORM MONITOR]

[LENS MEMORY LOAD]

[ASPECT]

[PROJECTION METHOD]

[GEOMETRY]

[ANGLE MONITOR]

Displays the waveform of the input signal. (

Loads the registered lens memory. ( x

Switch the aspect ratio of the image. (

Switches the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting. (

Switches the [GEOMETRY] setting. (

page 153)

x

x

x page 149)

page 108)

page 110)

Displays the [ANGLE MONITOR] screen. ( x

x page 151)

page 185)

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen can also be displayed by holding down the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.

[STATUS]

Display the status of the projector.

1) Press as to select [STATUS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the pages.

f The page will change each time you press the button.

ENGLISH - 181

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[PROJECTOR TYPE]

[SERIAL NUMBER]

[PROJECTOR RUNTIME]

[LIGHT RUNTIME]

[CONTINUOUS LIGHTING

TIME]

[CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME]

[ANGLE INFORMATION]

*2

Displays the type of the projector.

Displays the serial number of the projector.

Displays the runtime of the projector.

Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.

Displays the elapsed time from when the light source is illuminated.

The elapsed time after the illumination of the light source can be confirmed when adjusting the focus.

The elapsed time is reset when the light source is temporarily turned off such as using the shutter function.

[FIRMWARE VERSION]

[INTAKE AIR TEMP.] *1 Displays the intake air temperature status.

[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.] *1 Displays the internal temperature status.

[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]

[LIGHT1 TEMP.] *1

*1

Displays the firmware version of the projector.

Displays the exhaust air temperature status.

Displays the light source 1 temperature status.

[LIGHT2 TEMP.] *1

[SELF TEST]

Displays the light source 2 temperature status.

Displays the self-diagnosis information.

[INPUT]

[SIGNAL NAME]

[MEMORY NO.]

Displays the input terminal currently selected.

Displays the representative input terminal when one image is displayed with multiple input signals.

Displays the input signal name.

Displays the memory number of the input signal.

[BACKUP INPUT STATUS]

Displays whether switching to the backup input signal is possible or not when [BACKUP INPUT

MODE] is set to [OFF]. ( x page 125)

[NUMBER OF REGISTERED

SIGNAL]

[COOLING CONDITION]

Displays the number of registered signals.

Displays the set cooling conditions.

[ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE] Displays the atmospheric pressure.

[REMOTE2 STATUS]

[AC VOLTAGE]

Displays the control status of the REMOTE2.

Displays the input supply voltage.

[LENS]

[ON COUNT]

[LENS TYPE]

[POWER ON TIMES]

Displays the projection lens type.

[UPGRADE KIT] [ET-NUK10]

Displays the number of times the power is turned on.

Displays the activation status by the NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.:

ET-NUK10).

Or, displays the status of the NFC function.

[ACTIVATED]: The NFC function can be used.

[NOT ACTIVATED]: The NFC function cannot be used.

[SLOT]

[OPERATING MODE]

Displays the product model number of the Function Board installed in <SLOT>.

Also, the firmware version is displayed after the product model number.

Displays the setting value of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] →

[OPERATING MODE].

[NORMAL]

[ECO]

[QUIET]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[USER3]

Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL].

Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [ECO].

Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [QUIET].

Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER1].

Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER2].

Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER3].

Converts the total runtime of the light sources with [OPERATING MODE] set to each item into the time used with the [NORMAL] setting.

The consolidated runtime is used for a rough indication about when to perform maintenance when the projector is used in combination of each item in [OPERATING MODE].

[ROLL ANGLE]

[PITCH ANGLE]

*3

*3

Displays the horizontal swing angle based on the detection result of the built-in angle sensor.

Displays the vertical tilt angle based on the detection result of the built-in angle sensor.

182 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[SIGNAL INFORMATION]

[INPUT]

[SIGNAL FORMAT]

[LINK]

[SAMPLING]

[BIT DEPTH]

[SIGNAL LEVEL]

[GAMMA]

[COLOR SPACE]

Displays the input terminal used for the projected image.

Displays the representative input terminal when one image is displayed with multiple input signals.

Displays the format of the input signal.

Displays the [SDI LINK] setting.

Displays the determination result of the signal when [AUTO] is set.

Displays the sampling information and the color format of the input signal.

Displays the gradation of the input signal.

Displays the signal level of the input signal.

Displays the [GAMMA] setting.

Displays the [COLOR SPACE] setting.

*1 The temperature status is indicated with text color (green/yellow/red) and bar scale. Use the projector within the range that the indication is green.

*2 [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME] can be obtained with the following calculation formula. Values obtained by the calculation formula contain a slight error.

*3 The angle value displayed is relative to the benchmark (zero calibration reset state / zero calibration implementation state) selected on the

[ANGLE MONITOR] screen.

Conversion formula for [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME]

A x 1.0 + B x 0.8

f A : Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL], [QUIET], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] f B : Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [ECO] r

[DETAILED INFORMATION]

[INPUT]

[SIGNAL FORMAT]

[SIGNAL FREQUENCY]

[SCAN TYPE]

[TOTAL DOTS]

[DISPLAY DOTS]

[TOTAL LINES]

[DISPLAY LINES]

[SAMPLING]

[BIT DEPTH]

[SIGNAL LEVEL]

[COLORIMETRY]

[HDCP STATUS]

[SDI ERROR STATUS]

Displays the input used for the projected image.

Displays the format of the input signal.

Displays the frequency of the input signal.

Displays the scan type of the input signal.

Displays the total dot count of the input signal.

Displays the number of input signal display dots.

Displays the total line count of the input signal.

Displays the number of input signal display lines.

Displays the sampling information and the color format of the input signal.

Displays the gradation of the input signal.

Displays the signal level of the input signal.

Displays the color gamut information of the input signal. The content of display is as follows.

[ITU-2020]: When the color gamut is compliant with ITU-R BT.2020 standard

[ITU-709]: When the color gamut is compliant with ITU-R BT.709 standard

[SMPTE 170M]: When the color gamut is compliant with SMPTE 170M standard

[---]: When there is no signal, when the color gamut information is not included in the InfoFrame information, or when the color gamut information other than [ITU-2020], [ITU-709], or [SMPTE 170M] is included

Displays the HDCP status of the input signal. The content of display is as follows.

[HDCP2.X]: When protected with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3

[HDCP1.X]: When protected with HDCP 1.X

[NONE]: When not protected with HDCP

[---]: When there is no signal

Displays the error status of the SDI input.

r

[CONTENT INFORMATION]

[EOTF]

[MASTERING DISPLAY

COLOR VOLUME]

Displays EOTF (Electro-Optical Transfer Function) out of the InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

[RED]

Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the primary color red out of the

InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

[GREEN]

[BLUE]

Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the primary color green out of the InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the primary color blue out of the

InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

[WHITE]

[MAX LUMINANCE]

[MIN LUMINANCE]

Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the white point out of the

InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

Displays the maximum brightness out of the InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

Displays the minimum brightness out of the InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

ENGLISH - 183

[CONTENT LIGHT LEVEL]

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[MaxCLL]

[MaxFALL]

Displays MaxCLL (Maximum Content Light Level) out of the InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

Displays MaxFALL (Maximum Frame Average Light Level) out of the

InfoFrame information added to the input signal.

Note f If any abnormality has occurred on the projector, press the <DEFAULT> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed to check the details of the error information.

f

For details on the contents displayed in [SELF TEST], refer to “Self-diagnosis display” ( x page 272).

f The values displayed in [ANGLE INFORMATION] are based on the results of the angle sensor detection and may differ from the actual tilt angle of the projector. The displayed values are for reference only and accuracy is not guaranteed.

f The relationship between the value displayed in [ROLL ANGLE] and the projector tilt status is shown as below. This is the case when

[PITCH ANGLE] is [0°] and [ANGLE MONITOR] is set to zero calibration reset state.

g [-1°] ~ [-30°]: The projector swings counterclockwise with the top surface facing upward and the screen set in front.

g [0°]: The projector is horizontal with the top surface facing upward.

g [+1°] ~ [+30°]: The projector swings clockwise with the top surface facing upward and the screen set in front.

g [-179°] ~ [-150°]: The projector swings clockwise with the top surface facing downward and the screen set in front.

g [+180°]: The projector is horizontal with the top surface facing downward.

g [+179°] ~ [+150°]: The projector swings counterclockwise with the top surface facing downward and the screen set in front.

f The relationship between the value displayed in [PITCH ANGLE] and the installation attitude of the projector is shown as below. This is the case when [ROLL ANGLE] is [0°] in the zero calibration reset state.

g [-1°] ~ [-30°]: The projector swings with the top surface facing upward and the projection lens side facing downward.

g [0°]: The projector is horizontal with the top surface facing upward.

g [+1°] ~ [+30°]: The projector swings with the top surface is facing upward and the projection lens side is facing upward.

g [-179°] ~ [-150°]: The projector swings with the top surface is facing downward and the projection lens side is facing upward.

g [+180°]: The projector is horizontal with the top surface facing downward.

g [+179°] ~ [+150°]: The projector swings with the top surface is facing downward and the projection lens side is facing downward.

f If you press the <ENTER> button while displaying [ANGLE INFORMATION] page of the [STATUS] screen (5/6 page), the [ANGLE

MONITOR] screen which graphically displays the tilt angle of the projector is displayed. For details of [ANGLE MONITOR] screen, refer to

“[ANGLE MONITOR] screen” ( x page 185).

f If you press the <ENTER> button while displaying [SIGNAL INFORMATION] in the page 6/6 of the [STATUS] screen, the [DETAILED

INFORMATION] screen can be displayed to view the detailed information of the input signal. Information for multiple input signals may be displayed depending on the projected image. Press qw to switch pages.

f While the [DETAILED INFORMATION] screen is displayed, press the <ENTER> button to display the [CONTENT INFORMATION] screen, and the contents of the InfoFrame information added to the input signal can be displayed.

f There are items that are displayed or not displayed in [SIGNAL INFORMATION], [DETAILED INFORMATION], and [CONTENT

INFORMATION] depending on the setting and the signal being input.

Sending status content via E-mail

The status content can be sent to the E-mail address (up to two addresses) set in “[E-mail set up] page”

( x page 247).

1) Press the <ENTER> button while the 1/6 to 4/6 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed.

f The selection screen is displayed.

2) Press as to select [SEND E-MAIL].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SELECT E-MAIL ADDRESS] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select the destination.

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

6) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The status content is sent.

Saving status content in USB memory

The status content can be saved in a USB memory attached to the <USB> terminal.

1) Press the <ENTER> button while the 1/6 to 4/6 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed.

f The selection screen is displayed.

2) Press as to select [SAVE TO USB MEMORY].

184 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

4) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The status content is saved.

[ANGLE MONITOR] screen

Displays the tilt angle of the projector graphically based on the angle information detected by the built-in angle sensor.

1) Press the <ENTER> button while 5/6 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed.

f The [ANGLE MONITOR] screen is displayed.

ANGLE MONITOR

+ 20

°

- 20

°

+30

+20

+10

+150

+160

+170

+150

+160

+170

+30

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-170

-160

-150

-170

-160

-150

-10

-20

-30

ZERO CALIBRATION

RESET RETURN

2) Press the <ENTER> button or the <DEFAULT> button.

f The angle benchmark will switch each time you press the button.

<ENTER> button Displays the angle of the zero calibration state representing the current installation attitude of the projector

<DEFAULT> button

Displays the angle of the zero calibration reset state.

Resets the zero calibration and displays the detection result of the angle sensor as it is.

Note f The illustration of the projector in the [ANGLE MONITOR] screen does not rotate and does not follow the attitude change of the projector.

f The illustration of the projector shows the monitor of the roll angle and the monitor of the pitch angle.

g The rear view illustration of the projector(left side): indicates the roll angle g The side view illustration of the projector(right side): indicates the pitch angle f

The green line intersecting the illustration of the projector indicates the angle to the benchmark selected in step 2)

. Read the left and right gauges.

f The red wq mark on the horizontal axis represents the benchmark surface (0°, +180°) selected in step

2) .

f The values shown at the top of of the roll angle monitor and the pitch angle monitor are common with the values displayed in [ROLL ANGLE] and [PITCH ANGLE] on the [STATUS] screen.

f

The benchmark selected in step 2)

remains unchanged even if the main power is turned off and on.

f

[ANGLE MONITOR] screen can be displayed directly by pressing the <FUNCTION> button when [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[FUNCTION BUTTON] is set to [ANGLE MONITOR] .

[INDICATOR SETTING]

Set the indicator‑off function that allows the projector can be used without the indicators (power indicator <ON (G)/

STANDBY (R)>, light source indicator <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2>, temperature indicator <TEMP>) lit or blink even when the projector is in standby mode or projection mode.

1) Press as to select [INDICATOR SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The warning message of the indicator‑off function is displayed.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [INDICATOR SETTING] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [INDICATOR MODE].

ENGLISH - 185

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

5) Press qw to switch the item.

[NORMAL]

[OFF]

[TIMEOUT]

Disables the indicator‑off function.

Each indicator lits or blinks depending on the status of the projector.

Enables the indicator‑off function.

Keep all the indicators off regardless of the status of the projector.

Automatically enables the indicator‑off function to turn off all the indicators if no operation is performed for the preset time.

f

Proceed to Step 6) when [TIMEOUT] is selected.

f

Proceed to Step 8) when [OFF] is selected.

6) Press as to select [NO ACTIVITY TIME].

7) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[1 MIN.] - [15 MIN.]

Sets the time until the the indicator‑off function is enabled.

Allows you to set in increments of 1 minute. (Factory default setting: [15 MIN.])

8) Press as to select [NOTIFICATION].

9) Press qw to switch the item.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

The light source indicator <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> will lit or blink immediately when there is an occurrence of error/warning in the projector even if the indicator‑off function is enabled, .

The indicators will not lit or blink to inform the occurrence of error/warning when the indicator‑off function is enabled.

Note f If any button on the remote control or on the control panel is pressed within the preset time in [NO ACTIVITY TIME] , the [TIMEOUT] setting does not function and the indicators do not lit or blink even the time set in [NO ACTIVITY TIME] has elapsed.

f In following cases, the indicators will temporarily lit or blink for operation check even if the indicator‑off function is enabled.

g right after pressing the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power g when [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], right after pressing the <POWER ON> button in standby mode

[DATA CLONING]

Perform the operation of the data cloning function. Data such as the settings and adjustment values of the projector can be copied to multiple projectors via LAN or using the USB memory.

For details of operation, refer to “Using the data cloning function” ( x page 253).

[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.

1) Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

4) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f [PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.

Note f

The data saved by executing [SAVE ALL USER DATA] does not include the data set with “Geometric & Setup Management Software”.

f

The data saved by executing [SAVE ALL USER DATA] is not deleted even if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY

RESET] is executed.

186 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.

1) Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

4) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The projector enters the standby mode to reflect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.

f The data loaded from [LOAD ALL USER DATA] does not include the data set with “Geometric & Setup Management Software”.

[HDMI CEC]

Sets the CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) function of HDMI.

CEC is a function that is realized by exchanging device control signals with external devices connected with an HDMI cable. Using the remote control of the projector, it is possible to operate the CEC-compatible external device (hereinafter referred to as "CEC‑compatible device") and to control the power on/off link status between the projector and the CEC-compatible device.

For details on how to use the CEC function, refer to “Using HDMI CEC function” ( x page 257).

1) Press as to select [HDMI CEC].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the CEC function.

Enables the CEC function.

Operating a CEC-compatible device

Operate the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal or Function

Board.

[HDMI-CEC OPERATION] can be operated when HDMI1 input, HDMI2 input or SLOT input is selected. Switch to the input that is corresponding to the CEC-compatible device you want to operate in advance.

1) Press as to select [HDMI CEC].

2) Press qw to select [ON].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2] or [SLOT].

f Select the input corresponding to the CEC-compatible device you want to operate.

f [SLOT] can be selected when the Function Board is installed in the slot. f Proceed to Step 6) when the device to operate is displayed.

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The devices will switch when multiple CEC-compatible devices are connected to one input.

f Select the device to operate.

6) Press as to select [HDMI-CEC OPERATION].

7) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The HDMI CEC operation screen is displayed.

8) Select the item displayed on the HDMI-CEC operation screen to operate the device.

f

Refer to the “Using HDMI CEC function” ( x page 257) for the operation details.

ENGLISH - 187

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Note f If no CEC-compatible device is connected to <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal or <SLOT> terminal, there is no device displayed at [HDMI 1], [HDMI 2] or [SLOT] and [----] is displayed.

f Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY‑SB01WP) supports the power on/power off link and the input switching related to the power link of the CEC function. It does not support the menu operation of the CEC-compatible device using the projector remote control.

f For the Function Board of other manufacturers and the CEC-compatible devices connected to the Function Board of other manufacturers, not all the operations are guaranteed.

f To exit the HDMI CEC operation, press the <MENU> button.

Changing the menu code

The menu code that calls up the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device varies depending on the device manufacturer. If you cannot call up the operation menu of a CEC-compatible device from the HDMI CEC operation screen, change the menu code setting.

1) Press as to select [HDMI CEC].

2) Press qw to select [ON].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [MENU CODE].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

f Select the menu code from [1] to [6].

Setting the power link

Make settings for the power link operations between the projector and CEC-compatible devices.

[PROJECTOR -> DEVICE]

Set the power link operation from the projector to the CEC-compatible device.

1) Press as to select [HDMI CEC].

2) Press qw to select [ON].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [PROJECTOR

->

DEVICE].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DISABLE]

[POWER OFF]

[POWER ON/OFF]

Disables the power link operation.

Select this item if you do not want the power status of the CEC-compatible device to react to the power status of the projector.

Enables power‑off link operation.

When you turn off the power of the projector and put it in standby mode, all CEC‑compatible devices connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal and Function Board will enter standby mode.

Power-on link operation is disabled.

Enables power‑on link operation and power‑off link operation.

If you turn on the projector and start projection, the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal or Function Board will turn on.

When you turn off the projector and put it in standby mode, all CEC‑compatible devices connected to the

<HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal and Function Board will enter standby mode.

[DEVICE -> PROJECTOR]

Set the power link operation from the CEC-compatible device to the projector.

1) Press as to select [HDMI CEC].

2) Press qw to select [ON].

188 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [DEVICE

->

PROJECTOR].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[DISABLE]

[POWER ON]

[POWER ON/OFF]

Disables the power link operation from the CEC-compatible device to the projector.

Select this item if you do not want the power status of the projector to react to the CEC-compatible device.

Enables power-on link operation.

While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI

IN 2> terminal or Function Board is turned on, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches to the input that the linked CEC-compatible device is connected.

While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches to the input that the linked CEC-compatible device is connected.

While the projector is turned on, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.

Power‑off link control is disabled.

Enables power‑on link operation and power‑off link operation.

While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI

IN 2> terminal or Function Board is turned on, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.

While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.

While the projector is turned on, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.

While the projector is turned on, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI

IN 2> terminal or Function Board is turned off, the projector turns off and enters standby mode.

The link operations are only available when the CEC-compatible device supports the respective operations.

Note f The connected CEC-compatible device may not support the link operation described in the manual. Not all the operations of the CECcompatible device are guaranteed.

[INITIALIZE]

Return the various user data settings to the factory default settings.

1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select an item to initialize.

[USER SETTINGS]

[REGISTERED SIGNAL ONLY]

[NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY]

[LOGO IMAGE ONLY]

[UNIFORMITY ONLY]

[FACTORY RESET]

The user data to return to factory default settings can be selected arbitrarily.

The projector goes into the standby status after executing [INITIALIZE].

For details of operation, refer to “Initializing the settings by selecting the items” ( x page 190).

Deletes all the signals registered in [SIGNAL LIST]. All the setting values saved for each registered signal are also deleted.

Returns all the setting items under the [NETWORK] menu and all the setting items under the operation page in the [Detailed set up] page and the Crestron Connected of the web control screen to the factory default settings.

f The items of [Time Zone], [Date], and [Time] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen do not return to the factory default settings.

f The information such as the self‑signed certificate already created in the [Certificate] page of the web control screen or the server certificate already installed is not deleted.

Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].

Sets the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY] to the factory default setting.

Returns all the user data settings to the factory default settings. The projector goes into the standby status after executing [FACTORY RESET].

f

Proceed to Step 5) when anything other than [USER SETTINGS] is selected.

ENGLISH - 189

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

6) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq f

To delete only a part of a registered signal, delete it following “Deleting the registered signal” ( x page 195).

f To return the setting of [Time Zone] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen and the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

→ [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the factory default settings, initialize them by one of the following methods.

g Initializing by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g Initializing by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[INITIALIZE] f The self‑signed certificate already created in the [Certificate] page of the web control screen or the information of the server certificate already installed can be deleted in the web control screen.

f If initialized by selecting [FACTORY RESET], the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed when the projection is started the next time.

Initializing the settings by selecting the items

1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [USER SETTINGS].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER SETTINGS] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select an item.

[OPERATION SETTING]

[STANDBY MODE]

[REGISTERED SIGNAL]

[NETWORK/E-MAIL]

The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [OPERATING MODE] and [MAX

LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] are initialized.

[LIGHT OUTPUT] is not initialized. The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is maintained.

The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is initialized.

All the signals registered in [SIGNAL LIST] are initialized.

All the setting items under the [NETWORK] menu and all the setting items under the operation page in the [Detailed set up] page and the Crestron Connected of the web control screen are initialized.

f The items of [Time Zone], [Date], and [Time] in the web control screen are not initialized.

f The information such as the self‑signed certificate already created in the [Certificate] page of the web control screen or the server certificate already installed is not initialized.

[LOGO IMAGE]

[UNIFORMITY]

Image registered in [USER LOGO] is initialized.

The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY] is initialized.

[OTHER USER SETTING] The user data other than mentioned above are initialized.

7) Press qw to switch the setting.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[KEEP]

[INITIALIZE]

Does not return to the factory default settings and maintains the current settings when initialization is executed by [USER SETTINGS].

Returns to the factory default settings when initialization is executed by [USER SETTINGS].

f Repeat Steps

6) to 7)

until the desired initialization items are set.

8) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].

9) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

190 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

Note f To return the setting in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LIGHT OUTPUT] to the factory default setting, initialize it by selecting [OTHER

USER SETTING].

f To return the setting of [Time Zone] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen and the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

→ [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the factory default settings, initialize them by one of the following methods.

g Initializing by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g Initializing by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[INITIALIZE]

[FIRMWARE UPDATE]

Rewriting of the firmware is possible by using a USB memory.

For details of operation, refer to “Updating the firmware using the USB memory” ( x page 264).

[SAVE LOG]

This function is used by a service person.

[SERVICE PASSWORD]

This function is used by a service person.

ENGLISH - 191

Chapter 4   Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu

[TEST PATTERN] menu

On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

[TEST PATTERN]

Display the test pattern.

Settings such as position and size will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to perform various adjustments while displaying the input image.

1) Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.

2) Press as to select the test pattern to display, and press the <ENTER> button.

01

[OFF]

[ALL WHITE]

Test pattern is not displayed.

02 [ALL BLACK]

05

06

03

04

[WINDOW]

[WINDOW(INVERSION)]

[COLOR BAR(VERTICAL)]

[COLOR BAR(HORIZONTAL)]

Displays the test pattern built-in to the projector.

To change the color of the cross hatch test pattern, refer

to “Changing the color of the cross hatch test pattern”

( x page 193).

07

08

09

[16:9/4:3 ASPECT FRAME]

[CIRCLE]

[CROSS HATCH]

10

11

12

13

[FOCUS]

[USER TEST PATTERN 1]

[USER TEST PATTERN 2]

[USER TEST PATTERN 3]

Displays the test pattern registered by the user.

For details, refer to “Registering the test pattern”

( x page 193).

f Selected test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

f To change the test pattern, proceed to Step 3) .

3) Press qw to switch the test pattern.

f The test pattern will switch each time you press qw .

Note f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format, toggle selection format) can be hidden by pressing the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed.

f Thumbnails of [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], and [USER TEST PATTERN 3] are not displayed.

f The [ALL BLACK] screen is displayed when [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3], in which a test pattern is not registered in Step 2) , is selected and the <ENTER> button is pressed.

f When switching the test pattern by pressing qw in Step 3) , [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], and [USER TEST

PATTERN 3] in which a test pattern is not registered are not displayed.

f Pressing qw while the [TEST PATTERN] menu is selected can also switch the test pattern.

f Perform the image adjustment when the projected image has stabilized.

It is recommended to adjust the image after at least 30 minutes have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed. For details of the test

pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” ( x page 192).

192 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu

Changing the color of the cross hatch test pattern

1) Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.

2) Press as to select [CROSS HATCH], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The cross hatch test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

3) Press the <ENTER> button again.

f The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The color of the cross hatch test pattern is changed to the selected color.

Note f The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] setting returns to [WHITE] when the projector is turned off and goes into standby mode .

f Colors of the test patterns other than cross hatch test patterns cannot be changed.

Registering the test pattern

1) Save the file for the test pattern to register in the projector into a USB memory.

2) Insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal.

3) Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.

4) Press as to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

f If the test pattern is not registered, the all black screen is displayed.

f If the test pattern is already registered, that test pattern is displayed.

5) Press the <ENTER> button again.

f The [USER TEST PATTERN ] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [SAVE USER TEST PATTERN], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SAVE USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.

f Proceed to Step 8) if the file for test pattern to register is saved in the root directory of the USB memory.

7) Press as to select the folder in which the file is saved, and press the <ENTER> button.

f Repeat the folder selection operation until the file for the test pattern to register is displayed.

8) Press as to select the file, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

For the procedure to register the user test pattern from the web control screen, refer to “Registering the user test pattern” ( x page 231).

f

For the USB memory that can be used with the projector and handling of the memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” ( x page 86).

f When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, the data registered in [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN

2], and [USER TEST PATTERN 3] are initialized.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to

[INITIALIZE] f The test pattern that can be registered in the projector is a still image data fulfilling following conditions.

g g For PNG format: 1/8/16/24/32/48/64 bits (however, α blending becomes invalid and the background image will not be transparent.) g

PNG format or BMP format file with resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less.

For BMP format: 1/8/24 bits

ENGLISH - 193

Chapter 4   Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu

Deleting the registered test pattern

1) Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.

2) Press as to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

3) Press the <ENTER> button again.

f The [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [DELETE USER TEST PATTERN], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The selected test pattern is deleted.

Note f

For the procedure to delete the user test pattern from the web control screen, refer to “Deleting the registered user test pattern”

( x page 232).

Changing the name of the test pattern

1) Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.

2) Press as to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

3) Press the <ENTER> button again.

f The [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [RENAME USER TEST PATTERN], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [RENAME USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.

5) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered.

6) After the name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The registration is completed and the [RENAME USER TEST PATTERN] screen returns.

Note f

For the procedure to change the name of the user test pattern from the web control screen, refer to “Changing the name of the user test pattern” ( x page 232).

194 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu

[SIGNAL LIST] menu

On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

r

Registered signal details

Memory number: A1 (1-2)

Sub memory number

When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered f

A name can be set for each sub memory ( x page 197).

Registering new signals

After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the registration is completed and the [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

Note f Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.

f There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.

f The name to be registered is automatically determined by the input signal.

f If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.

Renaming the registered signal

Registered signals can be renamed.

1) Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.

f The memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.

f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

6) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

7) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.

f When pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.

Deleting the registered signal

Registered signals can be deleted.

1) Press asqw to select the signal to delete.

2) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.

f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The selected signal will be deleted.

ENGLISH - 195

Chapter 4   Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu

Note f A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.

Expanding signal lock-in range

1) Press asqw to select the signal to set.

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[NARROW]

[WIDE]

Select in most cases.

Widens the lock-in range.

f An expansion icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK-IN

RANGE] is set to [WIDE].

A1: 720/60p-A1

A2: XXXXXX

A3: XGA75-A3

RGB2

XXXX

RGB2

Note f Switch the range where the signal to be input is determined to be the same signal as the already registered signal.

f To prioritize the determination that a signal is the same as the already registered signal, set this function to [WIDE].

Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.

f This function cannot be set for the SDI signal.

f When [WIDE] is set, the image may be distorted because a signal is recognized as the same even if its synchronizing frequency varies slightly.

f When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.

Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.

f When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.

f In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the setting is set to [WIDE].

Protecting the registered signal

1) Press asqw to select the signal to protect.

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [LOCK].

5) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

The signal is not protected.

The signal is protected.

f A lock icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK] is set to

[ON].

A1: 720/60p-A1

A2: XXXXXX

A3: XGA75-A3

RGB2

XXXX

RGB2

196 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu

Note f When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion and image adjustment are not available. To perform these operations, set [LOCK] to [OFF].

f A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.

f Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.

Sub memory

The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.

Use this function when you need to switch the aspect or adjust the picture quality such as the white balance while using the same signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal, such as the image aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] menu (items such as [CONTRAST] and

[BRIGHTNESS]).

Registering to the sub memory

1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw .

f The sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step

3) .

f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.

f The <FUNCTION> button on the remote control can be used instead of the qw button when [SUB

MEMORY] is selected from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].

2) Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f To rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps

6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal”

( x page 195).

Switching to the sub memory

1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw .

f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.

2) Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f This switches to the signal selected in Step

2)

.

Deleting the sub memory

1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw .

f The [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.

2) Press asqw to select the sub memory to be deleted, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.

f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The selected sub memory will be deleted.

ENGLISH - 197

Chapter 4   Settings — [SECURITY] menu

[SECURITY] menu

On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

f When the projector is used for the first time

Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.

Attention f When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is prompted. Enter the preset password and then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.

f When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.

f An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.

[SECURITY PASSWORD]

Display the [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen when the power is turned on with the <MAIN POWER> switch set to the <OFF> side. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted to the <STANDBY> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>).

1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the security password entry.

Enables the security password entry.

Note f The item is set to [OFF] by the factory default setting, or after initialized by one of the following methods. Set it to [ON] as necessary.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[INITIALIZE]

→ [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.

f The security password is enabled after setting [SECURITY PASSWORD] to [ON] and turning the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.

[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]

Change the security password.

1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password.

f Up to eight button operations can be set.

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

5) Re-enter the password for the confirmation.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.

f When numerical values are used for the security password, the security password is required to be initialized if the remote control is lost.

Consult your dealer for the method of initialization.

198 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [SECURITY] menu

[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]

Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.

1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].

[CONTROL PANEL]

[REMOTE CONTROL]

You can set the limitation on the control from the control panel.

You can set the limitation on the control from the remote control.

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].

6) Press qw to switch the item.

f You can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

[USER]

Enables all button operations.

Disables all button operations.

Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.

Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” ( x page 199) for details.

7) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Enabling/disabling any button

1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].

6) Press qw to switch [USER].

7) Press as to select the button item to set.

f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press as to select the button to set.

[POWER BUTTON]

[INPUT SELECT BUTTON]

[MENU BUTTON]

[LENS BUTTON]

[SHUTTER BUTTON]

[ON SCREEN BUTTON]

[OTHER BUTTON]

Buttons that can be set

[CONTROL PANEL]

<STANDBY> button, <POWER ON> button

<HDMI 1/2> button, <DISPLAYPORT> button,

<SLOT> button, <INPUT MENU> button

[REMOTE CONTROL]

<HDMI1> button, <HDMI2> button,

<DISPLAYPORT> button, <SLOT> button,

<INPUT MENU> button

<MENU> button

<LENS> button

<SHUTTER> button

<ON SCREEN> button

Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) asqw , <ENTER> button Buttons not listed above

ENGLISH - 199

8) Press qw to switch the item.

Chapter 4   Settings — [SECURITY] menu

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Enables button operations.

Disables button operations.

f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step

7)

, the item that can be set varies depending on the selected button.

Refer to “Item that can be set with [INPUT SELECT BUTTON]” ( x page 200) for details.

Once the switching of the item is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen.

9) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f When a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

Enter the control device password.

f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approximately 10 seconds.

f If the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE], the projector cannot be turned off (cannot enter standby).

f When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main menu.

f Even when button operations on the remote control are disabled, the operation of the <ID SET> button and <ID ALL> button on the remote control is enabled.

Item that can be set with [INPUT SELECT BUTTON]

When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7) of “Enabling/disabling any button” ( x page 199), the

item that can be selected varies depending on the button to set.

The item that can be selected when each button is set is as follows.

r

[HDMI1/2 BUTTON]

[TOGGLE]

[HDMI1]

[HDMI2]

[DISABLE]

Switches the items in following order when the button is operated.

[HDMI1] → [HDMI2]

Fixes to selection operation of the HDMI1 input.

Fixes to selection operation of the HDMI2 input.

Disables button operations.

r

[SLOT BUTTON]

[TOGGLE], [SDI OPT1 [SLOT]] and [SDI OPT2 [SLOT]] can be selected when the optional Function Board for

12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>.

[TOGGLE]

[SDI OPT1 [SLOT]]

[SDI OPT2 [SLOT]]

[DISABLE]

Switches the items in following order when the button is operated.

[SDI OPT1 [SLOT]] → [SDI OPT2 [SLOT]]

Fixes to selection operation of the SDI OPT1 input.

Fixes to selection operation of the SDI OPT2 input.

Disables button operations.

Note f [SLOT BUTTON] can be selected when the Function Board is installed in the slot.

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

The control device password can be changed.

1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

200 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [SECURITY] menu

4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Attention f The initial password is “AAAA” by the factory default setting, or after initialized by one of the following methods.

g When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] g When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[INITIALIZE]

→ [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.

f To initialize your password, consult your distributor.

ENGLISH - 201

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

[NETWORK] menu

On the menu screen, select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” ( x page 91) for the operation of the menu screen.

[ETHERNET TYPE]

Set the transmission path of the Ethernet signal.

This can be set when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is a terminal equipped on the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board

(Model No.: TY-SB01DL).

The <LAN> terminal is a terminal equipped on the projector as standard.

1) Press as to select [ETHERNET TYPE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ETHERNET TYPE] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select an item.

[LAN]

[DIGITAL LINK]

[LAN & DIGITAL LINK]

Select this item when using only the <LAN> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.

Select this item when using only the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.

Select this item when using the <LAN> terminal and the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note f When [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN], the Ethernet and serial control signals cannot be transmitted via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal.

f The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to

[LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

[DIGITAL LINK]

Perform the setting and operation regarding the DIGITAL LINK.

This can be set when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is a terminal equipped on the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board

(Model No.: TY-SB01DL).

[DIGITAL LINK MODE]

Switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal.

1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[DIGITAL LINK]

[LONG REACH]

[ETHERNET]

Switches the communication method automatically to DIGITAL LINK, long reach, or Ethernet.

Fixes the communication method to DIGITAL LINK.

Fixes the communication method to long reach.

Fixes the communication method to Ethernet.

r

Possible communication modes

l : Communication possible

―: Communication not possible

202 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

Setting

[AUTO]

[DIGITAL LINK]

[LONG REACH]

[ETHERNET]

For DIGITAL LINK

For long reach

For Ethernet

Video transfer

(100 m (328'1")) l

― l

Communication possible

Video transfer

(150 m (492'2"))

Ethernet l l l

― l l

*1 l

― l l *1

RS-232C l l

― l l

*1 Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly.

Note f For the signal with resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less, the maximum transmission distance is 100 m (328'1") when connected with the

DIGITAL LINK communication method. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance is 50 m (164'1").

f The maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method is 150 m (492'2"). In this case, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).

f When the communication method of the twist-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, the projector will connect with long-reach communication method when [DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [AUTO]. To connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.:

ET-YFB200G) with the long-reach communication method, set [DIGITAL LINK MODE] to [LONG REACH].

f Connection will not be made correctly if the twist-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the long-reach communication method even if

[DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [LONG REACH].

[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]

Display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment.

1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.

[LINK STATUS]

[HDCP STATUS]

[SIGNAL QUALITY]

The content of display is as follows.

[DIGITAL LINK]: Communicating in the DIGITAL LINK method.

[LONG REACH]: Communicating in the long reach method.

[ETHERNET]: Communicating in the Ethernet method.

[NO LINK]: Communication is not established.

The content of display is as follows.

[HDCP2.X]: When protected with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3

[HDCP1.X]: When protected with HDCP 1.X

[NONE]: When not protected with HDCP

[---]: When there is no signal

[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to green, yellow, or red depending on that value.

Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

f [MAX] / [MIN]: Maximum/minimum value of the amount of error f Green (-12 dB or lower) → normal signal quality level.

f Yellow (-11 to -8 dB) → caution level that noise may appear on the screen.

f

Red (-7 dB or higher) → abnormal level with interrupted synchronization and receiving not possible.

[DIGITAL LINK MENU]

When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal, the main menu of the connected DIGITAL LINK output supported device is displayed. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device for details.

Note f [DIGITAL LINK MENU] cannot be selected when [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON].

f The operation guidance for the “RETURN” button is in the menu screen of the Digital Interface Box and DIGITAL LINK Switcher. The projector does not have the “RETURN” button, but the same operation is available with the <MENU> button.

ENGLISH - 203

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

[EXTRON XTP]

Perform the connection setting for the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics.

1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EXTRON XTP].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Select this item when connecting the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.:

ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal.

Select this item when connecting the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK

IN/LAN> terminal.

Note f For details of the “XTP transmitter”, visit the following website of Extron Electronics.

https://www.extron.com/

[WIRED LAN]

Perform the connection setting to use the wired LAN.

1) Press as to select [WIRED LAN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [IP VERSION].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [IP VERSION] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the item to set, and press the <ENTER> button.

[IPv4]

[IPv6]

[IPv4 & IPv6]

Uses only the “IPv4” protocol.

Uses only the “IPv6” protocol.

Both the “IPv4” and the “IPv6” protocols can be used.

6) Press the <MENU> button.

f The [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.

f

Proceed to Step 12) when [IPv6] is selected.

7) Press as to select [IPv4 SETTINGS], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [IPv4 SETTINGS] screen is displayed.

8) Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the menu.

[DHCP]

[IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK]

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

[ON]

[OFF]

Enter the IP address.

Enter the subnet mask.

Enter the default gateway address.

Select this item when using the DHCP server that exists in the network to which the projector is to be connected. IPv4 address is automatically acquired.

Select this item when setting the IPv4 address manually.

Set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY].

9) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

204 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Setting for the IPv4 address is saved.

11) Press the <MENU> button.

f The [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.

12) Press as to select [IPv6 SETTINGS], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [IPv6 SETTINGS] screen is displayed.

13) Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the menu.

[AUTO CONFIGURATION]

[TEMPORARY ADDRESS]

[IP ADDRESS]

[PREFIX LENGTH]

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

[ON]

[OFF]

Select this item when assigning the IPv6 address automatically.

Set [TEMPORARY ADDRESS].

Select this item when setting the IPv6 address manually.

Set [IP ADDRESS], [PREFIX LENGTH], and [DEFAULT

GATEWAY].

[ON]

[OFF]

Enter the IP address.

Select this item when the temporary IPv6 address is used.

Select this item when the temporary IPv6 address is not used.

[1] - [128]

Select the prefix length.

(Factory default setting: [64])

Enter the default gateway address.

14) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

15) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Setting for the IPv6 address is saved.

Note f When using a DHCP server, confirm that the DHCP server is running.

f Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and prefix length.

f [IPv6] in [IP VERSION] cannot be set in following cases.

g When the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [Crestron Connected TM ] is set to [ON] g When the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net SETUP] is set to anything other than [OFF] f [IPv4 SETTINGS] cannot be set when the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net SETUP] is set to [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)].

f The network settings for the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard and the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal on the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) are common.

f Wired LAN and wireless LAN cannot be used in the same segment.

[WIRELESS LAN]

Set the connection method of wireless LAN and its details.

f To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module

(Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) to the <USB> terminal.

1) Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].

2) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Select this item when the wireless LAN is to be used.

A device such as a smartphone can be directly connected to the projector even if a wireless LAN access point is not set up separately because the projector is used as a simplified access point.

For setting procedure of the connection key, refer to “Setting the connection key” ( x page 206).

Select this item when the wireless LAN is not to be used.

Note f [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.

f Maximum number of devices that can be connected simultaneously to the projector via wireless LAN is four devices.

ENGLISH - 205

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

Setting the connection key

1) Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].

2) Press qw to select [ENABLE].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [WIRELESS LAN] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [KEY].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [KEY] screen is displayed.

6) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f The character string that can be registered as the connection key is as follows.

g 8 to 15 single-byte alphanumeric characters

7) After entering the connection key, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

8) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The factory default setting of the connection key is “spjcxxxx”. xxxx is the four digit number assigned for each product.

[PROJECTOR NAME]

Change the projector name. Enter the host name if it is required to use a DHCP server.

1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR NAME].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PROJECTOR NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Up to 12 characters can be entered.

4) After entering the projector name, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Note f The factory default setting of the projector name is “NAMExxxx”. xxxx is the four digit number assigned for each product.

[NETWORK STATUS]

Display the network information of the projector.

1) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the display screen.

f The page will change each time you press the button.

[WIRED LAN(IPv4)] (page 1/5), [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] (page 2/5, page 3/5), [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5, page 5/5)

206 - ENGLISH

[WIRED LAN(IPv4)]

[WIRED LAN(IPv6)]

[WIRELESS LAN]

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

[DHCP]

[IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK]

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

[DNS1]

Displays the [DHCP] setting.

Displays the [IP ADDRESS].

Displays the [SUBNET MASK].

Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].

Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.

[DNS2]

[MAC ADDRESS] Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.

[AUTO CONFIGURATION] Displays the [AUTO CONFIGURATION] setting.

[LINK LOCAL ADDRESS]

[STATEFUL ADDRESS]

Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.

Displays [LINK LOCAL ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].

Displays [STATEFUL ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].

[STATELESS ADDRESS]

[TEMPORARY ADDRESS] Displays [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].

[IP ADDRESS] Displays [IP ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

[DNS1]

Displays [STATELESS ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].

Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].

Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.

Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.

[DNS2]

[MAC ADDRESS]

[SSID]

Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.

[KEY]

Displays the string of SSID.

Displays the connection key.

Displays/hides the connection key by pressing the <ENTER> button.

[AUTHENTICATION]

[ENCRYPTION]

[IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK]

[MAC ADDRESS]

Displays the user authentication method.

Displays the encryption method.

Displays the [IP ADDRESS].

Displays the [SUBNET MASK].

Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wireless LAN.

Note f The [STATELESS ADDRESS] screen is displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] (page 2/5) is displayed, and details of the stateless address can be confirmed. Furthermore, the screen will be switched to the [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] screen by pressing qw , and details of the temporary address can be confirmed.

f There are items that are displayed or not displayed in the [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] page, depending on the setting in the [NETWORK] menu →

[WIRED LAN] → [IPv6 SETTINGS] → [AUTO CONFIGURATION].

f The [WIRED LAN(IPv4)] page in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed when the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP

VERSION] is set to [IPv6].

f The [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] page in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed when the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP

VERSION] is set to [IPv4].

f The [WIRELESS LAN] page in [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed in following cases.

g When the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal g When the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [DISABLE] f A QR code, which makes connection setting with a smartphone easier, is displayed in [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5). To directly connect a

smartphone to the projector using the QR code, refer to “Using the QR code” ( x page 219).

[NFC SETTING]

Set the operation of the NFC function when the application software “Smart Projector Control” which performs the setting and adjustment of the projector is used.

1) Press as to select [NFC SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NFC SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select an item, and press the <ENTER> button.

[READ/WRITE]

[READ ONLY]

[OFF]

Select this item when allowing to read and write the projector setting information.

Select this item when allowing only to read the projector setting information.

Select this item when not allowing to read and write the projector setting information.

ENGLISH - 207

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

Note f [NFC SETTING] cannot be set when the NFC function of the projector is disabled.

The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC

Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.

For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your dealer. https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ f The [NFC SETTING] setting is valid for the “Smart Projector Control” version 2.2.0 or later.

f For details of the “Smart Projector Control”, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]

Set the user name and password of the administrator account.

[PASSWORD POLICY]

Display a policy about the password of the administrator account.

1) Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD POLICY] screen is displayed.

PASSWORD POLICY

Reusing passwords is not recommended.

Password cannot be blank.

A password consisting of at least eight half-width characters and contaning characters of at least three of the following four types is recommended.

Uppercase letters

Lowercase letters

Digits

Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)

MENU

RETURN

Setting the administrator account for the first time

Set the user name and password of the account with administrator rights.

1) Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER NAME] screen is displayed.

f The factory default setting of the user name for the administrator account is set to “dispadmin”.

4) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Up to 16 characters can be entered.

5) After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Up to 16 characters can be entered.

f A password cannot be blank.

208 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

8) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

9) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

10) Enter the password entered in Step 7).

11) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

12) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

13) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

For limitation of the character string that can be set as a password, refer to “[PASSWORD POLICY]” ( x page 77).

f When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.

f

The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web control screen.

Changing the setting of the administrator account

Change the user name and password of the account with administrator rights.

1) Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [USER NAME] in [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER NAME] screen is displayed.

4) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the current user name.

5) After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the current password.

8) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

9) Press as to select [USER NAME] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER NAME] screen is displayed.

10) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the new user name.

f When not changing the user name, enter the current user name.

11) After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

12) Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

13) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the new password.

f Up to 16 characters can be entered.

f When not changing the password, enter the current password.

ENGLISH - 209

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

14) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

15) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

16) Enter the password entered in Step 13).

17) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.

18) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

19) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

For limitation of the character string that can be set as a password, refer to “[PASSWORD POLICY]” ( x page 77).

f

The user name and password of the administrator account can also be changed in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web control screen.

f

The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web control screen.

[NETWORK SECURITY]

Perform the setting to protect the projector from an external attack or abuse via LAN.

[COMMAND PROTECT]

Perform the setting regarding connection authentication when using the command control function.

1) Press as to select [NETWORK SECURITY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NETWORK SECURITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the [COMMAND PROTECT] setting.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Connects to the projector in protect mode.

Connection authentication is performed using the user name and password of the administrator account.

Connects to the projector in non-protect mode.

Connection authentication is not performed.

f The confirmation screen is displayed when the setting is switched.

4) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.

5) Press asqw to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [USER NAME] screen is displayed.

6) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the user name of the administrator account.

7) After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.

8) Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

9) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the password of the administrator account.

10) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.

11) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

210 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

Note f When [COMMAND PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE], the projector becomes vulnerable against a threat on the network because connection authentication will not be performed. Use this function by understanding the risk.

f When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), [COMMAND PROTECT] cannot be set.

f

For details on how to use the command control function, refer to “Control commands via LAN” ( x page 280).

[NETWORK CONTROL]

Set the controls of the projector via the network.

f To use the network function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account.

( x page 209)

1) Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.

[WEB CONTROL]

[COMMAND CONTROL]

[COMMAND PORT]

[Crestron Connected TM ]

[AMX D.D.]

Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.

Set to [ON] to control with the <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminal control command format

( x

page 287). Refer to “Control commands via LAN” ( x page 280).

Set the port number used for command control.

Set to [ON] to control with Crestron Connected of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.

Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, visit the following website of AMX Corporation.

https://www.amx.com/

4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

5) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.

f [Crestron Connected TM ] cannot be set when the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] is set to [IPv6].

[PJLink]

Set the PJLink function which controls and monitors the projector using the PJLink protocol.

f To use the PJLink function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account.

( x page 209)

Note f When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.

[PJLink PASSWORD]

Set the security authentication password required to connect to the projector.

1) Press as to select [PJLink].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PJLink PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

5) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the current PJLink password.

f The factory default setting of password is blank.

ENGLISH - 211

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

6) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

8) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

f Enter the new password.

f Up to 32 alphanumeric symbols can be entered.

9) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

10) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

11) Enter the password entered in Step 8).

12) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

13) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

14) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

The PJLink password can also be changed in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the

web control screen.

[PJLink CONTROL]

Enable/disable the control function using PJLink protocol.

1) Press as to select [PJLink].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PJLink CONTROL].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ON]

[OFF]

Select this item when controlling projectors with the PJLink protocol.

Select this item when not controlling projectors with the PJLink protocol.

[PJLink NOTIFICATION]

Enable/disable the notification function of the PJLink.

1) Press as to select [PJLink].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PJLink] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PJLink NOTIFICATION].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON]

Select this item when not using the notification function of the PJLink.

Select this item when using the notification function of the PJLink.

f

Proceed to Step 5) when [ON] is selected.

212 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

5) Press as to select [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 1], [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 2], [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS

1(IPv6)], or [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 2(IPv6)].

f Enter the IP address of the computer to be notified of the status of the projector.

[Art-Net]

Set the Art-Net function.

f To use the Art-Net function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account.

( x page 209)

Note f When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.

f The Art-Net function cannot be used using the “IPv6” protocol. Set the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to either [IPv4] or [IPv4 & IPv6] and assign the IP address for “IPv4”.

[Art-Net SETUP]

Make settings to use the Art-Net function.

1) Press as to select [Art-Net].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [Art-Net] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [Art-Net SETUP].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[OFF]

[ON(2.X.X.X)]

[ON(10.X.X.X)]

[ON(MANUAL)]

Disables the Art-Net function.

Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 2.X.X.X.

Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 10.X.X.X.

Enables the Art-Net function and uses the IP address set in [WIRED LAN].

f

Proceed to Step 5) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [Art-Net SETUP] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select an item, and press qw to switch the setting.

[NET]

[SUB NET]

[UNIVERSE]

[START ADDRESS]

Enter [NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.

Enter [SUB NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.

Enter [UNIVERSE] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.

Enter [START ADDRESS] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.

7) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f

If [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)] is selected, IP address is calculated and set automatically.

[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]

Set the assignment of the channel. Make settings to use the Art-Net function.

For the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art‑Net function, refer to

“Using Art-Net function” ( x page 276).

1) Press as to select [Art-Net].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [Art-Net] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 213

Chapter 4   Settings — [NETWORK] menu

3) Press as to select [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[2]

[USER]

[1]

Uses the channel assignment in standard setting.

Changes the channel assignment.

Uses the channel assignment with DZ21K series compatible.

DZ21K series: DZ21K series, DS20K series, DW17K series, DZ16K series f When anything other than [USER] is selected, the control details assigned to the channel is displayed by

pressing the <ENTER> button. For details, refer to “Using Art-Net function” ( x page 276).

f

Proceed to Step 5) when [USER] is selected.

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select the channel to set, and press qw to switch the item.

[LIGHT OUTPUT]

[INPUT SELECT]

[LENS POSITION]

[LENS H SHIFT]

[LENS V SHIFT]

[LENS FOCUS]

[PERIPHERY FOCUS]

[LENS ZOOM]

[POWER]

[SHUTTER]

[FADE-IN]

[FADE-OUT]

[GEOMETRY]

[CUSTOM MASKING]

[FREEZE]

[COLOR]

[TINT]

[RASTER PATTERN]

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

[NONE]

Adjusts the amount of light.

Switches the input.

Moves the lens position.

Adjusts the lens shift in the horizontal direction.

Adjusts the lens shift in the vertical direction.

Adjusts the focus.

Adjusts the periphery focus.

Adjusts the zoom.

Controls the power status.

Controls the shutter.

Sets the fade-in time.

Sets the fade-out time.

Performs geometric adjustment.

Performs geometric adjustment using a computer.

Freezes the projected image.

Adjusts the color saturation.

Adjusts the tint.

Displays the raster pattern.

Enables/disables the control of the projector with the Art-Net function.

No definition f The setting can be also made by pressing as to select the channel, pressing the <ENTER> button to display the item list, pressing asqw to select the item, and pressing the <ENTER> button.

f Same item cannot be set for multiple channels, except for [NONE].

[Art-Net STATUS]

Display the content of control assigned to each channel and the received data of that channel.

1) Press as to select [Art-Net].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [Art-Net] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [Art-Net STATUS].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [Art-Net STATUS] screen is displayed.

214 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5 Operations

This chapter describes how to use each function.

ENGLISH - 215

Chapter 5   Operations — Network connection

Network connection

The projector is equipped with the network function, and following is possible by connecting to a computer.

f Web control

Setting, adjustment, and displaying status of the projector are possible by accessing the projector from a computer.

Refer to “Using the web control function” ( x page 221) for details.

f Smart Projector Control

The application software “Smart Projector Control” can be used, which enables to set and adjust the projector connected via LAN using a smartphone or tablet device.

For details, visit the following website. https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ f Multi Monitoring & Control Software

“Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, a software application to monitor and control multiple display devices

(projector or flat panel display) connected to intranet, can be used.

Plug-in software “Early Warning Software”, which monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals within an intranet, and notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality, can also be used.

For details, visit the following website. https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ f PJLink

Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the PJLink protocol.

Refer to “Using PJLink function” ( x page 274) for details.

f Art-Net

Setting of the projector can be operated by the DMX controller or application software using the Art-Net protocol.

Refer to “Using Art-Net function” ( x page 276) for details.

f Command control

Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the control command.

Refer to “Control commands via LAN” ( x page 280) for details.

Note f

To use the network function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. ( x page 209)

When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.

Connecting via wired LAN

This projector can receive the Ethernet signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter via the LAN cable by installing the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) in the slot.

Example of general network connection

Computer

Projector

LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)

Switching hub

Attention f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.

216 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Network connection

Note f A LAN cable is required to use the network function.

f Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher. Either the straight or the crossover cable, or both cables can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The projector will determine the type of the cable

(straight or crossover) automatically.

f Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.

Example of network connections via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter

Computer

Projector

LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)

Switching hub

Twisted-pair-cable transmitter

Attention f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.

Note f For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria: g Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards g Shielded type (including connectors) g Straight-through g Single wire g Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.) f The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance is 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz) for the long-reach communication method. If these distances are exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN communication.

f When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with

CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.

When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.

f Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.

f To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET

TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

f To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL

LINK].

f The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK IN/

LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

f Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.

f To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector without any loops.

f Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.

f When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.

f After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL

QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality.

f For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic

Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.

ENGLISH - 217

Chapter 5   Operations — Network connection

Setting the projector

1) Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.

2) Turn on the power of the projector.

3) Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.

f The [NETWORK] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [WIRED LAN], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.

5) Perform the [WIRED LAN] setting.

f

Refer to [WIRED LAN] ( x page 204) for details.

Note f To connect to an existing network, perform after consulting your network administrator.

r

Factory default setting

f Following setting has been made as a factory default.

[DHCP]

[IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK]

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

[DNS1] / [DNS2]

OFF

192.168.0.8

255.255.255.0

192.168.0.1

None

Operating the computer

1) Turn on the power of the computer.

2) Perform the network setting following the instruction of your network administrator.

f Operation from the computer is possible by configuring the network setting of the computer as follows if the projector is in the factory default setting.

[IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK]

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

192.168.0.10

255.255.255.0

192.168.0.1

Connecting via wireless LAN

To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model

No.: AJ-WM50 Series) to the <USB> terminal.

Connecting example

IEEE802.11b/g/n

Optional Wireless Module

(Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series)

Preparing and confirming the projector

1) Insert the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) all the way into the <USB> terminal.

218 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Network connection

2) Turn on the projector.

3) Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.

f The [NETWORK] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].

5) Press qw to set [ENABLE].

f

For details, refer to [WIRELESS LAN] ( x page 205).

6) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to display [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5).

f Confirm [SSID] and [KEY].

Note f [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.

f Attach the Wireless Module to the <USB> terminal directly without using a USB extension cable or USB hub.

f The indicator on the Wireless Module blinks in blue while the main power of the projector is turned on.

f If the indicator on the Wireless Module does not blink even when the projector is turned on, re-insert the Wireless Module into the <USB> terminal.

Operating the computer

1) Turn on the computer.

2) Perform the network setting.

f Perform the network setting on the computer following the instruction of the network administrator so that it can be connected to the projector.

3) Connect the Wireless Module to the projector via wireless LAN.

f When connecting, confirm the [WIRELESS LAN] setting displayed in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen of the projector.

Using the QR code

A smartphone can be connected to the projector via wireless LAN just by reading the QR code that the projector displays with the camera on a smartphone.

r

Compatible devices

iPhone: iOS 12 or later

Android devices: Android 9.0 or later

Note f A device supporting reading of a QR code and application software of the camera supporting reading of a QR code are required.

f For the devices that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic

Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.

r

Displaying the QR code in OSD

The following is the operation of the projector when reading the QR code displayed in the on-screen menu (OSD).

1) Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.

f The [NETWORK] screen is displayed.

2) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 219

Chapter 5   Operations — Network connection

3) Press qw to switch the displayed screen and display [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5).

f The QR code is displayed.

4/5 NETWORK STATUS

WIRELESS LAN

SSID

KEY

AUTHENTICATION

ENCRYPTION

Proj1234_xxxxxxxxxxxxx

********

WPA2-PSK

AES

MENU

CHANGE

RETURN

ENTER

DISPLAY KEY

Note f The [WIRELESS LAN] page in [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed in following cases.

g When the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.

g When the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [DISABLE] r

Operation of a smartphone

1) Start application software of the camera supporting reading of a QR code.

2) Read the QR code displayed in the OSD with the camera.

3) Tap the notification displayed on the smartphone screen.

f Tap “Join” or “Connect” if a message to confirm the connection is displayed.

f The smartphone will be connected to the projector via wireless LAN.

220 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Using the web control function

Following operation is possible from a computer using the web control function.

f Setting and adjustment of the projector f Display of the projector status f Sending E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector

The projector supports “Crestron Connected”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc. can be used.

f Crestron Fusion

Note f Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Confirm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.

f “Crestron Connected” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems connected to a network using a computer.

f For details of the “Crestron Connected”, visit the following website of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

https://www.crestron.com/

Computer that can be used for setting

To use the web control function, a web browser is required. Confirm that the web browser can be used in advance.

Windows

Mac OS iOS

Android

OS Compatible browser

Microsoft Edge

Safari 12.0/13.0/14.0/15.0/16.0

Safari (equipped with version iOS 12, iOS 13, iOS 14, iOS 15, or iOS 16)

Google Chrome (equipped with version Android 9.0/10.0/11.0/12.0/13.0)

Accessing from the web browser

1) Start up the web browser on the computer.

2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.

f When a user name and password are already set for the administrator account in the initial setting screen

( x page 77) or in the [NETWORK] menu

[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] ( x page 208), proceed to

Step

7) .

f When the administrator account is not set, the [Set up password] page is displayed.

3) In [User name], enter the user name to be used as the administrator account.

f The factory default setting of the user name for the administrator account is set to “dispadmin”.

4) In [Password], enter the password to be set for the administrator account.

f A password cannot be blank.

f A password consisting of at least eight half-width characters is recommended.

f A password containing characters of at least three of the following four character types is recommended.

g Uppercase letters g g Digits g

Lowercase letters

Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)

ENGLISH - 221

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

5) In [Password(Retype)], enter the password entered in Step 4).

6) Click [Change].

f The setting of the administrator account will be completed.

7) Enter the user name and password in the displayed login screen.

f Enter the user name and password of an account with administrator rights or the user name and password of a standard user account without administrator rights.

f After logging in with the administrator account, set the user name and password of the standard user

account using the [Set up password] page. For details, refer to “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250).

8) Click [Sign in] or [OK].

Attention f The entry screen for the user name and password may be hidden by other window that is already opened. In such case, minimize the window in front to display the entry screen.

Note f If you use a web browser to control the projector, set the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [WEB CONTROL] to [ON].

f Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple computers.

f Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.

f Some items on the projector setting page use the JavaScript function of the web browser. Correct control may not be possible when the web browser is set not to use this function.

f If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.

f While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may appear white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.

f Click [License] at the top right of the [Set up password] page to display the download page of the open source software license.

f Screenshot of a computer

The size or the display of the screen may be different from this manual depending on the OS or the web browser, or the type of computer in use.

222 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Rights for each account

The administrator account can use all functions. The standard user account has limits on the functions it can use.

Select the account to use depending on the purpose.

The function that has l in the administrator/standard user column indicates that it can be operated with that account.

Item

[Status]

[Projector control]

[Detailed set up]

[Set up password]

Function

[Remote preview lite]

[Projector status]

Error information page

[Network status]

[Access error log]

[Mail error log]

[Basic control]

[Detail control]

[Network config]

[Adjust clock]

[Ping test]

[Certificate]

[HTTPS set up]

[Crestron Connected]

[E-mail set up]

[Authentication set up]

[User function set up]

[Status notification]

[Network security]

User name of [Administrator]

User name of [User]

Password of [Administrator]

Password of [User]

Password of [PJLink]

License download page

Administrator l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

Standard user l l l

*1 l

― l

― l

― l

248

249

249

250

251

251

251

251,

252

252

252

236

237

237

243

243

247

Page

225

228

229

229

229

230

230

231

234

[License] *2

*1 Available only when [Detailed set up] → [User function set up] → [Remote preview lite] is set to [Enable]. When [Disable] is set, the [Remote preview lite] page cannot be displayed or operated with the standard user account.

*2 Even if an administrator account is not set, the license can be downloaded from the [Set up password] page that is displayed when accessing the projector.

ENGLISH - 223

Descriptions of items

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

1

2

3

4

5

6

1 Page tab

Switches pages by clicking this item.

2 [Status]

The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item.

3 [Projector control]

The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item.

4 [Detailed set up]

The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item.

5 [Set up password]

The [Set up password] page is displayed by clicking this item.

6 [License]

The download page of the open source software license is displayed by clicking this item.

224 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Status]

[Remote preview lite] page

The input image to the projector can be simply viewed on the web control screen.

Click [Status] → [Remote preview lite].

3

6

7

8

9

4

5

1

2

1 Preview window

Simply displays the image corresponding to the input image to the projector.

Color of the outside border of the preview window indicates the projection status from the projector.

Red: Image from the projector is not projected.

Green: Image from the projector is being projected.

2 [INPUT SELECT]

Displays the operation menu for switching input.

For details, refer to “Switching the input” ( x page 227).

3 [STATUS]

Displays the status of the projector.

4 [SHUTTER]

Displays the status of the shutter.

5 [POWER]

Displays the status of the power.

6 [OSD]

Displays the status of the on-screen display function.

7 [PROJECTOR TYPE]

Displays the type of the projector.

8 [SERIAL NUMBER]

Displays the serial number of the projector.

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

9 [AC VOLTAGE]

Displays the input supply voltage.

10 Signal information

Displays the signal information of the selected input.

11 [INTAKE AIR]

Displays the intake air temperature status.

12 [GEOMETRY]

Displays the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY].

13 [LIGHT SOURCE]

Displays the illumination status (icon) and the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.

14 [ERROR]

Displays the occurrence status of error/warning in icon.

This will be blank if there is no occurrence of error/warning.

15 [Pre-Show Mode]

Switches the Pre-Show mode.

In the Pre-Show mode, the input image to the projector can be viewed without projecting even if the projector is in the standby status.

[Pre-Show Mode] is not displayed in the projection mode.

16 [Detail]

A button is displayed when there is an occurrence of error/ warning.

Click “Error information page” ( x page 229) to display.

Note f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks red in frequency of 2.95 seconds illuminating → 0.25 seconds off during the Pre-Show mode.

f The runtime in [PROJECTOR RUNTIME] continues to add up even if the projector is in the standby status while in the Pre-Show mode.

f In case of this projector, the input image to the projector can be displayed in the preview window in simplified manner even if [Detailed set up] → [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. However, it may not be displayed depending on the web browser in use when the self-signed certificate is used as the security certificate to be used for the HTTPS communication.

f There are following restrictions on the image to be displayed in the preview window.

g The adjustment results for each item in the [PICTURE] menu, [POSITION] menu, and [ADVANCED MENU] menu are not reflected.

However, some of the items such as [CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], or [SHIFT] are reflected.

g When an image is projected with a different aspect ratio from the input image using [ASPECT] or [ZOOM], the image may be displayed with a different aspect ratio from the actual projected image.

g The effects set in [BACK COLOR] or [STARTUP LOGO] are not reflected.

f The test pattern built-in to the projector is displayed in the preview window if it is being projected.

ENGLISH - 225

r

Status display icon

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

The power is switched off. (Standby status)

[POWER]

[SHUTTER]

[OSD]

[GEOMETRY]

In the projection mode

The shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed).

The shutter function is disabled (shutter: opened).

The on-screen display is set to on (display).

The on-screen display is set to off (hide).

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [OFF].

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [KEYSTONE].

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [CORNER

CORRECTION].

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [CURVED

CORRECTION].

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-1].

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-2].

The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-3].

Corresponding light source is illuminated.

[LIGHT SOURCE]

Corresponding light source is not illuminated.

[ERROR]

The light source is in warning status.

The light source is in error status.

The temperature is in warning status.

The temperature is in error status.

A warning other than light source or temperature has occurred.

An error other than light source or temperature has occurred.

226 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Switching the input

Click [INPUT SELECT] in the [Remote preview lite] page.

1

2

4

1 [INPUT SELECT]

Switches to the input to view the image.

The display content for the input selection button varies depending on the Function Board installed in the slot.

2 [INPUT]

Displays the input terminal currently selected.

3 [SIGNAL NAME]

Displays the input signal name.

4 [SIGNAL FREQUENCY]

Displays the frequency of the input signal.

Note f View the input image in the Pre-Show mode, and turn on the power in [Projector control] → [Basic control] page/[Detail control] page if there is no problem to project.

ENGLISH - 227

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Projector status] page

Click [Status] → [Projector status].

Display the status of the projector for the following items.

3

4

1

2

5

6

1 [PROJECTOR TYPE]

Displays the type of the projector.

2 [FIRMWARE VERSION]

Displays the firmware version of the projector.

3 [POWER]

Displays the status of the power.

4 [SHUTTER]

Displays the status of the shutter. ([CLOSE]: Shutter function enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)

5 [OPERATING MODE]

Displays the setting status of [OPERATING MODE].

6 [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]

Displays the setting status of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

7 [SERIAL NUMBER]

Displays the serial number of the projector.

8 [REMOTE2 STATUS]

Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

9 [OSD]

Displays the status of on-screen display function. ([ON]:

Display; [OFF]: Hide)

10 [AC VOLTAGE]

Displays the input supply voltage.

11

12

13

14

15

7

8

9

10

16

17

18

19

20

21

11 [LIGHT OUTPUT]

Displays the setting status of [LIGHT OUTPUT].

12 [INPUT]

Displays the status of the selected input.

13 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]

Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.

14 [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]

Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.

15 [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]

Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the projector.

16 [LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE]

Displays the temperature status of light source 1.

17 [LIGHT2 TEMPERATURE]

Displays the temperature status of light source 2.

18 [LIGHT1]

Displays the lighting status and runtime of light source 1.

19 [LIGHT2]

Displays the lighting status and runtime of light source 2.

20 [SELF TEST]

Displays the self-diagnosis information.

21 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]

Displays the runtime of the projector.

228 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Error information page

When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the [SELF TEST] display field of the [Projector status] screen, click it to display the content of the error/warning.

f The projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.

1

2

1 Display of error information

Displays the alphanumeric symbols and content of errors/ warnings that occur.

Refer to “Self-diagnosis display” ( x page 272) for the display

details.

[Network status] page

Click [Status] → [Network status].

The current network setting status is displayed.

2 Error code

1

4

1

2

2

3

3

1 [WIRED LAN(IPv4)]

Displays the settings of wired LAN (IPv4).

2 [WIRED LAN(IPv6)]

Displays the settings of wired LAN (IPv6).

3 [WIRED LAN COMMON INFORMATION]

Displays the information common for the wired LAN (IPv4) and the wired LAN (IPv6).

4 [WIRELESS LAN]

Displays the settings of wireless LAN when the optional

Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is attached.

[Access error log] page

Click [Status] → [Access error log].

The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with unauthorized user names or passwords.

ENGLISH - 229

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Mail error log] page

Click [Status] → [Mail error log].

E-mail error log is displayed if periodic E-mail sending has failed.

Note f

[Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many accesses/requests are made at once.

f

Logs in [Access error log] and [Mail error log] are deleted from the oldest when exceeding a certain amount.

f

Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.

[Projector control]

[Basic control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].

1

2

3

4

5

1 [POWER]

Turns off/on the power.

2 [SHUTTER]

Switches the status of the shutter. ([CLOSE]: Shutter function enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)

3 [OSD]

Switches the status of the on-screen display function. ([OFF]:

Hide; [ON]: Display)

4 [SYSTEM]

Switches the system method.

6

5 On-screen display of the projector

Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is set to off (hide).

However, the contents of the on-screen display is not updated if accessed with the standard user account.

6 [INPUT SELECT]

Switches the input of the image to project.

The display content for the input selection button varies depending on the Function Board installed in the slot.

230 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Detail control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].

3

4

5

6

1

2

7

8

9

10

11

1 Control of the projector

The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the onscreen display of the projector at the right of the control page is updated.

2 [SUB MEMORY]

Switches the sub memory.

3 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

Switches to system daylight view settings.

4 [FREEZE]

Temporarily pauses the image.

5 [WAVEFORM MONITOR]

Displays the waveform of the input signal.

6 [PROJECTION METHOD]

Switches the setting of the projection method.

7 [OSD POSITION]

Switches the OSD position setting.

8 [GEOMETRY]

Switches the geometric adjustment setting.

9 [LENS]

Displays the [LENS] page.( x page 233)

10 [TEST PATTERN]

Displays the test pattern.

Click the test pattern to display in the projected image from the pattern buttons displayed on the right side of the control page.

The display of the test pattern disappears if [Exit] is clicked.

11 [GET OSD]

Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the control page.

Registering the user test pattern

1) Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN].

f The test pattern selection buttons are displayed at the right side of the control page and [USER TEST

PATTERN LIST] is displayed on the bottom right.

2) Click the [ADD] button of the user test pattern number to be registered.

f Up to three user test patterns can be registered.

f Number that user test pattern is not registered is displayed as [No such file.], and the [ADD] button is displayed.

f Number that user test pattern is already registered is displayed as the user test pattern name, and the

[EDIT] button is displayed.

f Click the [ADD] button of the register destination to display the file selection screen.

3) Select the file of a test pattern to register, and click [Open].

f The user test pattern name is displayed, and the registration is completed.

Note f To register a new test pattern to the number with the user test pattern already registered, delete the registered test pattern first, and then

perform the registration again. Registration by overwriting is not possible. For the procedure to delete, refer to “Deleting the registered user test pattern” ( x page 232).

ENGLISH - 231

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Deleting the registered user test pattern

1) Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN].

f The test pattern selection buttons are displayed at the right side of the control page and [USER TEST

PATTERN LIST] is displayed on the bottom right.

f Number that user test pattern is registered is displayed as the user test pattern name, and the [EDIT] button is displayed.

2) Click the [EDIT] button of the user test pattern number to be deleted.

f The edit screen is displayed at the lower part of the [USER TEST PATTERN LIST].

3) Click the [DELETE] button in the edit screen.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

4) Click [OK].

f Deleting of the user test pattern is completed.

Note f The edit screen can be displayed by clicking [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] registered with test pattern in the test pattern selection buttons displayed on the right side of the control page.

Changing the name of the user test pattern

1) Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN].

f The test pattern selection buttons are displayed at the right side of the control page and [USER TEST

PATTERN LIST] is displayed on the bottom right.

f Number that user test pattern is registered is displayed as the user test pattern name, and the [EDIT] button is displayed.

2) Click the [EDIT] button of the user test pattern number to change the name.

f The edit screen is displayed at the lower part of the [USER TEST PATTERN LIST].

3) Enter the new name in the text box of the edit screen.

f Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered.

4) After entering of the name is completed, click [RENAME].

f Changing of the name is completed, and the name will be reflected in [USER TEST PATTERN LIST].

232 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Note f The edit screen can be displayed by clicking [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] registered with test pattern in the test pattern selection buttons displayed on the right side of the control page.

[LENS] page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS].

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

1 [CALIBRATION]

The calibration execution page ( x page 234) is displayed.

2 [SET POSITION]

The lens position setting page ( x page 234) is displayed.

3 [HOME POSITION]

Moves the projection lens to the home position.

4 Slider bar

Adjusts the lens shift, zoom, focus and periphery focus by dragging the slide button in the center over the slide rail. The operation speed will become faster when the drag position is further away from the center.

5 Adjustment buttons

Click asqw to adjust the lens shift, zoom, focus and periphery focus.

6 [PERIPHERY FOCUS]

Use the slider bar or as to adjust the periphery focus.

The adjustment can be performed in two operating speeds by the position which the slide button is dragged to.

Click as to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down.

7 [FOCUS]

Use the slider bar or as

to adjust the focus.

The adjustment can be performed in two operating speeds by the position which the slide button is dragged to.

Click as

to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down.

8 [ZOOM]

Use the slider bar or as to adjust the zoom.

The adjustment can be performed in two operating speeds by the position which the slide button is dragged to.

Click as to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down.

9 [SHIFT]

Use the slider bar or asqw to adjust the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position).

The adjustment can be performed in three operating speeds by the position which the slide button is dragged to.

Click asqw to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be performed faster by holding the button for three seconds or longer.

10 [SAVE]

Saves the current lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, periphery focus position and zoom position) by selecting the number of the lens memory. Operate following the instruction displayed in the screen.

11 [LOAD]

Loads the lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, periphery focus position and zoom position) saved in the specified lens memory, and automatically moves to that position. Operate following the instruction displayed in the screen.

12 [Back]

Returns to the [Detail control] page.

Note f [PERIPHERY FOCUS] is displayed only when following projection lens is attached.

Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500)

ENGLISH - 233

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Calibration execution page

1) Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [CALIBRATION].

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

2) Click [OK].

f The calibrations for the lens shift and focus are started.

Lens position setting page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [SET POSITION].

1

2

4

1 [Get]

Acquires the current lens position and displays the acquired values in the lens position information field.

2 Lens position information field

Enters the lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, zoom position and periphery focus position).

Note

3 [Back]

Returns to the [LENS] page.

4 [Apply]

Moves to the lens position displayed in the lens position information field.

f Periphery focus is displayed in lens position information field only when following projection lens is attached.

Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1U100, ET-C1W300, ET-C1W400, ET-C1W500)

[Detailed set up]

[Network config] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Network config].

1) Click [Network config].

f Click [Network config] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.

234 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

2) Select the item to change the setting.

f The [WIRELESS LAN] setting can be selected only when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.:

AJ-WM50 Series) is attached.

3) Click [Next].

f The current settings are displayed.

4) Click [Change].

f The setting change screen is displayed.

For wired LAN connection

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

10

11

12

14

1 [PROJECTOR NAME]

Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is required when using a DHCP server etc.

2 [IP VERSION]

[IPv4]: Uses only the “IPv4” protocol.

[IPv6]: Uses only the “IPv6” protocol.

[IPv4 & IPv6]: Both the “IPv4” and the “IPv6” protocols can be used.

3 [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF]

To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON].

4 [IP ADDRESS]

Enter the IPv4 address if a DHCP server is not used.

5 [SUBNET MASK]

Enter the subnet mask if a DHCP server is not used.

6 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]

Enter the default gateway address for IPv4 if a DHCP server is not used.

7 [DNS1]

Enter the DNS1 server address (primary) for IPv4.

Allowed characters:

Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)

8 [DNS2]

Enter the DNS2 server address (secondary) for IPv4.

Allowed characters:

Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)

Note

9 [AUTO CONFIGURATION ON], [AUTO CONFIGURATION

OFF]

Select [AUTO CONFIGURATION ON] to automatically assign

IPv6 address.

10 [TEMPORARY ADDRESS]

Select [ON] to use the temporary IPv6 address.

11 [IP ADDRESS]

Enter the IPv6 address when the IPv6 address is not automatically assigned.

12 [PREFIX LENGTH]

Enter the prefix length when the IPv6 address is not automatically assigned.

13 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]

Enter the default gateway address for IPv6 when the IPv6 address is not automatically assigned.

14 [DNS1]

Enter the DNS1 server address (primary) for IPv6.

Allowed characters: Hexadecimal numbers (0 to f), colon (:)

15 [DNS2]

Enter the DNS2 server address (secondary) for IPv6.

Allowed characters: Hexadecimal numbers (0 to f), colon (:)

16 [Back], [Next]

Click [Back] to return to the original screen. Click [Next] to display the setting confirmation screen. Click [Submit] to update the setting.

f When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click

[Network config] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.

f Changing LAN settings while connected to the LAN may cause the connection to disconnect.

ENGLISH - 235

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

For wireless LAN connection

(Available only when the Wireless Module is attached to the projector)

1

2

1 [KEY]

Sets the connection key.

Enter 8 to 15 characters of single-byte alphanumeric.

[Adjust clock] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].

2 [Back], [Next]

Click [Back] to return to the original screen. Click [Next] to display the setting confirmation screen. Click [Submit] to update the setting.

1

2

6

7

4

5

1 [Time Zone]

Select the time zone.

2 [Set time zone]

Updates the time zone setting.

3 [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]

Set to [ON] when setting the date and time automatically.

4 [NTP SERVER NAME]

Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when you set to adjust the date and time manually.

(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)

Note

5 [Date]

Enter the date to change when [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [OFF].

6 [Time]

Enter the time to change when [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [OFF].

7 [Set date and time]

Updates the date and time settings.

f The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult your dealer.

236 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Ping test] page

Check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].

1

2 3

4

1 [Input IP address]

Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.

2 [Submit]

Executes the connection test.

3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded

4 Example of display when the connection has failed

[Certificate] page

To perform the HTTPS communication or use the control system or application software of Crestron Electronics,

Inc., it is necessary to install the certificate for authentication into the projector.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Certificate].

Choose File No file chosen

Choose File No file chosen

1

2

3

1 [CRT Key generate]

Generates the CRT (Certificate) key.

The page to generate the CRT key is displayed by clicking

[Execute].

For details, refer to “Generating the CRT key” ( x page 238).

2 [Self-signed Certificate]

[Generate]:

Generates the self-signed certificate by the projector.

The page to generate the self-signed certificate is displayed by clicking [Execute].

For details, refer to

“Generating the self-signed certificate”

( x page 242).

[Information]:

Displays the status of the self-signed certificate.

f [Not generated]: Self-signed certificate is not generated.

f [(host name)]: Self-signed certificate is generated and valid.

The host name registered in the self-signed certificate is displayed.

f [Invalid (Reason: Server Certificate installed)]: The server certificate is valid, so the generated self-signed certificate is invalid.

Information of the generated self-signed certificate is displayed by clicking [Confirm].

The generated self-signed certificate can be deleted by clicking

[Delete].

For details, refer to

“Confirming the information of the selfsigned certificate” ( x page 242).

3 [Server Certificate]

[Generate Certificate Signing Request]:

Generates signing request (Certificate Signing Request).

The page to generate the signing request is displayed by clicking [Execute].

For details, refer to “Generating the signing request”

( x page 240).

[Server Certificate install] / [Intermediate Certificate install]:

Installs the server certificate and the intermediate certificate.

The certificate is installed into the projector by specifying the certificate file and clicking [Execute].

For details, refer to

“Installing the certificate” ( x page 241).

[Information]:

Displays the status of the server certificate.

f [Invalid]: The server certificate is not installed. Or, the current CRT key is different from the CRT key used for requesting the installed server certificate.

f [(host name)]: The server certificate is installed and valid.

The host name registered in the server certificate is displayed.

f [Expired]: Valid period of the server certificate has expired.

The host name registered in the server certificate is displayed when the server certificate is installed and valid.

Information of the installed server certificate is displayed by clicking [Confirm].

The installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate can be deleted by clicking [Delete].

For details, refer to

“Confirming the information of the server certificate” ( x page 241).

ENGLISH - 237

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Note f Installation operation of the certificate may not be possible depending on the computer or web browser in use.

r

Flow for setting

The flow for setting differs depending on which certificate is to be used as the security certificate, either the server certificate or the self-signed certificate.

Generate the CRT key.

When using the server certificate When using the self-signed certificate

Generate the signing request.

Acquire the server certificate.

Install the certificate.

Generate the self-signed certificate.

Select the connection method.

Set the HTTPS port number.

Click [Set].

Note f When using the server certificate, the procedure from application to the certification organization to issuing of the server certificate is required to be performed between the customer and the certification organization. For the application method, etc., contact the certification organization.

Generating the CRT key

Generate the CRT key used for encryption with the RSA (Rivest-Shamir-Adleman cryptosystem) public key encryption method. CRT key is a type of the private key.

1) Click [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute].

f The page to generate the CRT key is displayed.

2) Click [Execute].

f When generating the CRT key for the first time, the following message is displayed after the CRT is

generated. Proceed to Step 4) .

“CRT key - Generated” f When generating the CRT key for the second time or later, the following message is displayed.

“The CRT key will be generated. In updating the CRT key, the Server Certificate corresponds to the current

CRT key will become unavailable. Continue?”

238 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

3) Click [OK].

f CRT key will be generated and the following message will be displayed.

“CRT key - Generated”

4) Click [OK].

f Clicking [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute] again can confirm the key length and generation date and time of the current CRT key with the [RSA key size] and [Last modified] of [Current CRT key] at the upper row of the CRT key generation page.

Note f [Not generated] displayed in [Last modified] indicates that the CRT has not been generated.

f [RSA key size] is fixed to [2048bit]. The server certificate may not be issued depending on the certification organization to apply if the key length is 2048-bit.

f Generation of the CRT key may take up to approximately two minutes.

f When the CRT key is updated, apply for the server certificate or generate the self-signed certificate again using that CRT key. A certificate linked to the CRT key is required.

f

Previously generated CRT key information is saved even if the CRT key is updated. To return to the previous CRT key, refer to “Cancelling the update of the CRT key” ( x page 239).

Cancelling the update of the CRT key

It is possible to return to the previously generated CRT key only once even if the CRT key is updated.

1) Click [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute].

f The page to generate the CRT key is displayed.

2) Click [History].

f Following contents are displayed.

3) Confirm [RSA key size] and [Last modified] of the CRT key to restore.

4) Click [Apply].

f Following confirmation message is displayed.

“The previous CRT key will be loaded. Please generate Self-signed Certificate or install the Server

Certificate corresponds to the CRT key. Continue?”

5) Click [OK].

f Previously generated CRT key is reflected as the current CRT key.

Note f When returned to the previously generated CRT key, a certificate linked to that CRT key is required.

ENGLISH - 239

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Generating the signing request

When using the server certificate issued by the certification organization as a security certificate, generate a signing request necessary for application of issuing to the certification organization. Generate the signing request after generating the CRT key.

1) Click [Certificate] → [Generate Certificate Signing Request] → [Execute].

f The page to generate the signing request is displayed.

2) Enter the information required for application.

f The details of each item are as follows. Enter the information following the requirement of the certification organization to apply.

Item

[Common Name]

[Country]

[State]

[Locality]

[Organization]

[Organization Unit]

[CRT key]

Details

Enter the projector name or the IP address set in the projector.

Enter the country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets).

Enter the State, etc.

Enter the locality.

Enter the organization name.

Enter the organization unit name.

[RSA key size]

[Last modified]

The key length of the current CRT key is displayed.

The generation date and time of the current

CRT key is displayed.

Character length limit

64 characters

128 characters

128 characters

64 characters

64 characters

3) Click [OK].

f The signing request file is generated. Enter a file name and save the file in the desired folder.

4) Enter a file name and click [Save].

f The file for signing request is saved in the specified folder.

Note f

The characters that can be input are as follows.

g

Single-byte numbers: 0 to 9 g

Single-byte alphabets: A to Z, a to z g

Single-byte symbols: - . _ , + / ( ) f

The signing request generated by the projector is PEM format (file extension: pem).

f

Apply issuing of the server certificate to the certification organization using the saved signing request file (PEM format).

240 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Installing the certificate

Install the server certificate and the intermediate certificate issued by the certification organization into the projector.

1) Click [Certificate] → [Server Certificate install] → [Choose File].

f A dialog to select the file is displayed.

2) Select the server certificate file and click [Open].

f If the intermediate certificate is issued from the certification organization together with the server certificate, proceed to Step

3) .

f If only the server certificate is issued from the certification organization, proceed to Step

5)

.

3) Click [Choose File] in [Intermediate Certificate install].

f A dialog to select the file is displayed.

4) Select the intermediate certificate file and click [Open].

5) Click [Execute].

f The server certificate and the intermediate certificate are installed into the projector.

6) Click [OK].

Note f

To confirm the information of the installed server certificate, refer to “Confirming the information of the server certificate” ( x page 241).

Confirming the information of the server certificate

Confirm the information of the server certificate installed in the projector.

1) Click [Certificate] → [Server Certificate] → [Information] → [Confirm].

f The information of the installed server certificate is displayed. The details of each item are as follows.

Item

[Common Name]

[Country]

[State]

[Locality]

[Organization]

[Organization Unit]

[Not Before]

[Not After]

[CRT key]

Details

The projector name or the IP address is displayed.

The country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets) is displayed.

The State, etc. is displayed.

The locality is displayed.

The organization name is displayed.

The organization unit name is not displayed. It is displayed as an asterisk.

Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate was issued.

Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate will expire.

[RSA key size] The key length of the CRT key is displayed.

[Last modified] The generation date and time of the CRT key is displayed.

Note f The installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate can be deleted by clicking [Certificate] → [Server Certificate] → [Delete].

However, it cannot be deleted when [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. Delete it after changing the setting to perform the

HTTP communication.

To delete the server certificate within the valid period, confirm that the certificate file used for installing is available on hand. It will be necessary when installing the server certificate again.

ENGLISH - 241

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Generating the self-signed certificate

When the server certificate issued by the certification organization is not to be used as the security certificate, it is possible to use the self-signed certificate generated in the projector. Generate the self-signed certificate after generating the CRT key.

1) Click [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Generate] → [Execute].

f The page to generate the self-signed certificate is displayed.

2) Enter the information required for generation.

f The details of each item are as follows.

Item

[Common Name]

[Country]

[State]

[Locality]

[Organization]

[Organization Unit]

[CRT key]

Details

Enter the projector name or the IP address set in the projector.

Enter the country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets).

Enter the State, etc.

Enter the locality.

Enter the organization name.

Enter the organization unit name.

[RSA key size]

[Last modified]

The key length of the current CRT key is displayed.

The generation date and time of the current

CRT key is displayed.

Character length limit

64 characters

128 characters

128 characters

64 characters

64 characters

3) Click [OK].

f Self-signed certificate is generated.

Note f The characters that can be input are as follows.

g Single-byte numbers: 0 to 9 g Single-byte alphabets: A to Z, a to z g Single-byte symbols: - . _ , + / ( )

Confirming the information of the self-signed certificate

Confirm the information of the self-signed certificate generated by the projector.

1) Click [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Information] → [Confirm].

f The information of the generated self-signed certificate is displayed. The details of each item are as follows.

Item

[Common Name]

[Country]

[State]

[Locality]

[Organization]

[Organization Unit]

[Not Before]

[Not After]

[CRT key]

Details

The projector name or the IP address is displayed.

The country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets) is displayed.

The State, etc. is displayed.

The locality is displayed.

The organization name is displayed.

The organization unit name is displayed.

Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate was issued.

Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate will expire (local time corresponding to

23:59, December 31, 2035 in Greenwich Mean Time).

[RSA key size]

[Last modified]

The key length of the CRT key is displayed.

The generation date and time of the CRT key is displayed.

242 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Note f The generated self-signed certificate can be deleted by clicking [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Delete].

However, it cannot be deleted when [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. Delete it after changing the setting to perform the

HTTP communication.

[HTTPS set up] page

Set this page when HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) communication encrypted with the SSL/TLS protocol is to be performed between the computer and the projector while the web control function is used.

Click [Detailed set up] → [HTTPS set up].

To perform the HTTPS communication, it is necessary to install the certificate for authentication into the projector

in advance. For details of installing the certificate, refer to “[Certificate] page” ( x page 237).

1

2

3

1 [Connection]

Sets the connection method to the projector.

f

[HTTP]: Uses the HTTP communication. (Factory default setting) f

[HTTPS]: Uses the HTTPS communication.

2 [HTTPS port]

Sets the port number to be used with the HTTPS communication.

Allowed port number: 1 to 65535

Factory default setting: 443

3 [Set]

Enables the setting.

Note f When the [Connection] setting is changed from [HTTPS] to [HTTP], the screen may not be displayed when the operation or update of the web control screen is performed. In such case, delete the cache of the web browser.

[Crestron Connected] page

Set the information required for connecting the control system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. to the projector, and the information to monitor/control the projector using the control system of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

When the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [Crestron Connected TM ] is set to [OFF], the [Crestron

Connected] page cannot be set.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Crestron Connected].

ENGLISH - 243

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function r

[Control System]

Configure the setting for the control system required to connect to the projector as a client.

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

10

1 [Use TLS]

Sets the secure communication.

[Disable]:

Performs the unsecured communication.

[Enable]:

Performs the secure communication using TLS (Transport

Layer Security).

2 [IP Address / Hostname]

Enter the IP address or the host name of the connection destination.

3 [IP ID]

Sets the IP ID used to determine the projector on the network.

(A number up to four digits)

Default value: 3

4 [Room ID]

Sets the Room ID used to determine the projector on the network. (Up to 32 half-width characters)

5 [Non Secure Port]

Sets the port number to be used with the unsecured communication.

Default value: 41794

Note

6 [Secure Port]

Sets the port number to be used with the secure communication.

Default value: 41796

7 [Authentication]

Select the authentication with the connection destination used with the secure communication.

[Disable]:

Does not perform the connection authentication.

[Enable]:

Performs the connection authentication.

8 [User Name]

Enter the user name used for the connection authentication.

(Up to 20 half-width characters)

9 [Password]

Enter the password used for the connection authentication. (Up to 20 half-width characters)

10 [Submit]

Updates the [Control System] setting.

f When [Use TLS] is set to [Disable], [Authentication] is fixed to [Disable], and [Secure Port] cannot be set.

244 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function r

[Server]

Configure the setting required to access the projector assigned to a server using the control system.

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

10

1 [Use TLS]

Sets the secure communication.

[Disable]:

Performs the unsecured communication.

[Enable]:

Performs the secure communication using TLS (Transport

Layer Security).

2 [IP ID]

Sets the IP ID used to determine the projector on the network.

(A number up to four digits)

3 [Non Secure Port]

Sets the port number to be used with the unsecured communication.

Default value: 41794

4 [Secure Port]

Sets the port number to be used with the secure communication.

Default value: 41796

5 [Authentication]

Select the authentication with the connection destination used with the secure communication.

[Disable]:

Does not perform the connection authentication.

[Enable]:

Performs the connection authentication.

6 [User Name]

Enter the user name used for the connection authentication.

(Up to 20 half-width characters)

7 [Password]

Enter the password used for the connection authentication. (Up to 20 half-width characters)

8 [Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)]

Sets whether to use the Fusion server in the Cloud.

[Disable]:

Does not use the Fusion server in the Cloud.

[Enable]:

Uses the Fusion server in the Cloud.

9 [FITC URL]

Enter the URL of the Fusion server in the Cloud.

10 [Submit]

Updates the [Server] setting.

Note f [Use TLS] will be fixed to [Disable] if neither the server certificate nor the self-signed certificate is installed.

f When [Use TLS] is set to [Disable], [Authentication] is fixed to [Disable], and [Secure Port] cannot be set.

f When [Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)] is set to [Disable], [FITC URL] cannot be entered.

r

[Auto Discovery]

Set the standby process against the search protocol of the control system and the application software.

1

1 [Auto Discovery]

[Disable]:

Disables the standby process.

[Enable]:

Enables the standby process and enables the automatic detection of the projector.

2

2 [Submit]

Update the [Auto Discovery] setting.

ENGLISH - 245

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function r

[XiO Cloud]

Configure the setting to manage the devices using the XiO Cloud.

1

2

1 [XiO Cloud]

[Disable]:

Disables the XiO Cloud function.

[Enable]:

Enables the XiO Cloud function.

r

[Proxy]

Configure the proxy server setting.

1 [Proxy]

[Disable]:

Does not use the proxy server.

[Enable]:

Uses the proxy server.

1

2

3

4

2 [Submit]

Updates the [XiO Cloud] setting.

2 [Proxy Server Name]

Enter the proxy server name or the IPv4 address.

3 [Proxy Server Port No.]

Enter the port number of the proxy server.

4 [Submit]

Updates the [Proxy] setting.

Note f [Proxy Server Name] does not support the IPv6 address.

246 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[E-mail set up] page

Send an E-mail to preset E-mail addresses (up to two addresses) when a problem has occurred.

Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].

3

4

1

2

5

6

1 [ENABLE]

Select [Enable] to use the E-mail function.

2 [SMTP SERVER NAME]

Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server

(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.

3 [MAIL FROM]

Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters in single byte)

4 [MEMO]

Enter information such as the location of the projector that notifies the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single byte)

5 [MINIMUM TIME]

Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning

E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another

E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning temperature.

6 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]

Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the temperature exceeds this value.

7 [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2]

Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS

2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used.

7

8

7

8

9

8 Settings of the conditions to send E-mail

Select the conditions to send E-mail.

[MAIL CONTENTS]:

Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].

f [NORMAL]: Select this item when sending detailed information including the status of the projector.

f [SIMPLE]: Select this item when sending minimal information such as error information.

[ERROR]:

Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.

[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:

Send an E-mail when the intake air temperature has reached the value set at the above field.

[PERIODIC REPORT]:

Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.

An E-mail will be sent on the day and time with the check mark.

9 [Submit]

Updates the settings and sends the details by E-mail.

ENGLISH - 247

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Authentication set up] page

Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

8

1 [Auth]

Select the authentication method specified by your Internet service provider.

2 [SMTP Auth]

Set when the SMTP authentication is selected.

3 [POP server name]

Enter the POP server name.

Allowed characters:

Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)

Minus sign (-) period (.) colon (:)

4 [User name]

Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.

Contents of E-mail sent

5 [Password]

Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.

6 [SMTP server port]

Enter the port number of the SMTP server.

(Normally 25)

7 [POP server port]

Enter the port number of the POP server.

(Normally 110)

8 [Submit]

Update the settings.

Example of the E-mail sent when E-mail is set

The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.

f Example: When [MAIL CONTENTS] is set to [SIMPLE] in the [E-mail set up] page

=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===

Projector Type

Serial No

: PT-REZ12

: 123456789012

----- E-mail setup data -----

TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP

MINIMUM TIME

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE at [ 60] minutes interval

Over [ 46 degC / 114 degF ]

ERROR

PERIODIC REPORT

Sunday

Thursday

[ OFF ]

[ OFF ]

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

Monday

Friday

[ OFF ]

[ OFF ]

[ OFF ]

[ OFF ]

Tuesday

Saturday

[ OFF ]

[ OFF ]

00:00 [ OFF ] 01:00 [ OFF ] 02:00 [ OFF ] 03:00 [ OFF ]

04:00 [ OFF ] 05:00 [ OFF ] 06:00 [ OFF ] 07:00 [ OFF ]

08:00 [ OFF ] 09:00 [ OFF ] 10:00 [ OFF ] 11:00 [ OFF ]

12:00 [ OFF ] 13:00 [ OFF ] 14:00 [ OFF ] 15:00 [ OFF ]

16:00 [ OFF ] 17:00 [ OFF ] 18:00 [ OFF ] 19:00 [ OFF ]

20:00 [ OFF ] 21:00 [ OFF ] 22:00 [ OFF ] 23:00 [ OFF ]

----- Wired network configuration (IPv4) -----

DHCP Client

IP address

MAC address

OFF

192.168.0.8

00:0B:97:41:E7:E5

----- Wired network configuration (IPv6) -----

Auto Configuration

ON

Link Local Address

fe80::20b:97ff:fe41:e7e5

MAC address 00:0B:97:41:E7:E5

----- Wireless network configuration -----

IP address

MAC address

192.168.13.45

12:34:56:78:90:12

----- Error information -----

SELF TEST : NO ERRORS

Wed Apr 20 04:05:18 20XX

----- Memo -----

Wednesday [ OFF ]

248 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

Example of the E-mail sent for an error

The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.

f Example: When [MAIL CONTENTS] is set to [SIMPLE] in the [E-mail set up] page

=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===

Projector Type

Serial No

: PT-REZ12

: 123456789012

----- Wired network configuration (IPv4) -----

DHCP Client

IP address

MAC address

OFF

192.168.0.8

00:0B:97:41:E7:E5

----- Wired network configuration (IPv6) -----

Auto Configuration

ON

Link Local Address

fe80::20b:97ff:fe41:e7e5

MAC address 00:0B:97:41:E7:E5

----- Wireless network configuration -----

IP address

MAC address

192.168.13.45

12:34:56:78:90:12

----- Error information -----

SELF TEST : WARNING

U081 Low AC voltage warning (below 90V)

Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX

----- Memo -----

[User function set up] page

Set the function limitation for the user rights.

Click [Detailed set up] → [User function set up].

1

2

1 [Remote preview lite]

To disable the remote preview lite function with the user rights, set [Disable].

2 [Submit]

Updates the setting.

[Status notification] page

Set the push notification function. A push notification of updated information is sent to the application software linked to the projector, such as the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, when there is a change in status, such as occurrence of an error in the projector.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Status notification].

3

4

1

2

1 [Error alert notification]

Set to [Enable] to use the push notification function.

2 [Notification IP address]

Enter the IP address of the notification destination.

3 [Notification port]

Enter the port number of the notification destination.

4 [Submit]

Updates the setting.

ENGLISH - 249

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Network security] page

Perform the setting to protect the projector from an external attack or abuse via LAN.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Network security].

1

2

1 [COMMAND PROTECT]

Performs the setting regarding connection authentication when using the command control function.

[DISABLE]:

Connects to the projector in non-protect mode.

Connection authentication is not performed.

[ENABLE]:

Connects to the projector in protect mode.

Connection authentication is performed using the user name and password of the administrator account.

Note

2 [Submit]

Updates the setting.

The confirmation screen is displayed when [Submit] is clicked with [DISABLE] selected for [COMMAND PROTECT]. Update of the setting is performed by clicking [OK] in the confirmation screen.

f When [COMMAND PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE], the projector becomes vulnerable against a threat on the network because connection authentication will not be performed. Use this function by understanding the risk.

f

For details on how to use the command control function, refer to “Control commands via LAN” ( x page 280).

[Set up password]

[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)

Click [Set up password].

3

4

1

2

1 [Administrator]

Select this item when changing the setting of the administrator account.

2 [User]

Select this item when changing the setting of the standard user account.

3 [PJLink]

Select this item when changing the setting of the PJLink account.

4 [Next]

Displays the screen to change the setting of the password.

250 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[Administrator]

Set the user name and password of the administrator account.

1

2

3

4

1 [Account]

Displays the account to change.

2 [Current]

[User name]:

Enter the current user name.

[Password]:

Enter the current password.

3 [New]

[User name]:

Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

[Password]:

Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

[Password(Retype)]:

Enter the desired new password again.

4 [Change]

Determines the change of password.

Note f To change the setting of the administrator account, entry of [User name] and [Password] in [Current] is required.

f When the projector is already registered in application software (such as “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” and “Smart Projector

Control”) which uses the communication control via LAN, communication with the projector will become impossible if a user name or password for [Administrator] is changed. If a user name or password for [Administrator] is changed, update the registration information of the application software in use.

[User]

1

2

3

1 [Account]

Displays the account to change.

2 [New]

[User name]:

Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

[Password]:

Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

[Password(Retype)]:

Enter the desired new password again.

3 [Change]

Determines the change of password.

ENGLISH - 251

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the web control function

[PJLink]

Change the user name and password of the PJLink account.

1

2

3

1 [Account]

Displays the account to change.

2 [New]

[Password]:

Enter the desired new password. (Up to 32 half-width characters)

3 [Change]

Determines the change of password.

[Set up password] (when accessed by standard user account)

Change the user name and password of the standard user account.

3

4

1

2

1 [Old Password]

Enter the current password.

2 [New Password]

Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

License download page

3 [Retype]

Enter the desired new password again.

4 [Change]

Determines the change of password.

1

1 [Download]

The license for the open source software used in the projector is downloaded by clicking this item. Specify the destination to save and download the license.

Note f Provided license is a text file, and it is saved in the firmware of the projector in zip format compressed file.

File name: License.zip

252 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the data cloning function

Using the data cloning function

Perform the operation of the data cloning function. Data such as the settings and adjustment values of the projector can be copied to multiple projectors via LAN or using the USB memory.

r

Data that cannot be copied

The following settings cannot be copied. Set these in each projector.

f The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] (excluding [RESET]) f The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY] f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID] f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [ADJUST CLOCK] f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT] f The [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD] f The [SECURITY] menu → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] f The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] f The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] f The [NETWORK] menu → [PROJECTOR NAME] f The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] f Security password f Control device password f

Password set in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web

control screen f CRT key, the self-signed certificate information, and the installed server certificate information generated in

“[Certificate] page” ( x page 237) of the web control screen

f

“[Network security] page” ( x page 250) in the web control screen

f

“[E-mail set up] page” ( x page 247) in the web control screen

f

“[Authentication set up] page” ( x page 248) in the web control screen

f

“[Crestron Connected] page” ( x page 243) in the web control screen

r

Supported device

f Commercially available USB memory is supported.

The USB memory with a security function is not supported.

f Only the cards formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 can be used.

f Only the single partition structure is supported.

Note f The data cloning function will not operate when the models of the projectors are different. For example, data of PT-REZ12 can be copied to other PT-REZ12 projectors, but it cannot be copied to PT-REZ10. Data cloning is limited to the same model.

Copying the data to another projector via LAN

Make the following settings on the projector of the copy destination in advance. For details, refer to “Setting

[WRITE PROTECT]” ( x page 254).

f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT] → [OFF]

Note f

To use the network function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. ( x page 209)

When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. To copy the data via LAN, set the passwords for the copy source projector and the copy destination projector.

1) Connect all projectors to a switching hub using LAN cables. ( x page 216)

2) Turn on all the projectors.

3) Press as to select [DATA CLONING] on the copy source projector.

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 253

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the data cloning function

5) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [LAN].

7) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LAN DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.

8) Press as to select [SELECT PROJECTOR].

9) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The projectors in the same subnet are displayed as a list.

10) Press as to select the copy destination projector.

11) Press the <ENTER> button.

f

To select multiple projectors, repeat Steps 10) to 11) .

12) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

13) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Copy of the data between the projectors is started.

Once the copy is completed, results are displayed as a list in the [LAN DATA CLONING] screen.

Meanings of the marks displayed in the list are as follows.

g Green: Data copy has succeeded.

g Red: Data copy has failed. Confirm the connection of the LAN cable and power status of the copy destination projector.

f Data is copied to the copy destination projector in the standby mode.

If the copy destination projector is in the projection mode, the LAN data cloning request message is displayed, and then the copy destination projector automatically shifts to the standby mode to start copy of data.

14) Turn on the copy destination projector.

f The copied content is reflected to the projector.

Note f The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq f The light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> of the copy destination projector blink while copying the data. Confirm that the blinking of the indicators stops, and then turn on the projector.

Setting [WRITE PROTECT]

Set if the copy of data via LAN is permitted or not.

1) Press as to select [DATA CLONING] on the copy destination projector.

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [LAN].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [LAN DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [WRITE PROTECT].

7) Press qw to switch the item.

f The items will switch each time you press the button.

254 - ENGLISH

[OFF]

[ON]

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the data cloning function

Permits operations of [DATA CLONING] from another projector via LAN.

Does not permit the operations of [DATA CLONING] from another projector via LAN.

f Data copy will not be possible when [ON] is set. When it is not necessary to copy data, set [ON] so that the data is not changed by mistake.

Note f The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq

Copying the data to another projector using USB

Copying projector data to USB memory

1) Insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal.

2) Press as to select [DATA CLONING].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

4) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [USB MEMORY].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SELECT COPY TYPE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [PROJECTOR -> USB MEMORY].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Copying of data to the USB memory is started.

Once the copying of data is completed, [Data copy finished.] is displayed.

10) Once the copying of the data is completed, disconnect the USB memory from the <USB> terminal.

Note f The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq f

For the USB memory that can be used with the projector and handling of the memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” ( x page 86).

f An error message is displayed when saving or reading data to/from the USB memory has failed.

Copying data in the USB memory to the projector

1) Insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal.

2) Press as to select [DATA CLONING].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

4) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [USB MEMORY].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SELECT COPY TYPE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [USB MEMORY -> PROJECTOR].

ENGLISH - 255

Chapter 5   Operations — Using the data cloning function

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The confirmation screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The projector automatically enters standby state and starts copying data from the USB memory to the projector.

10) Once the copying of the data is completed, disconnect the USB memory from the <USB> terminal.

11) Turn on the power of the projector.

f The copied content is reflected to the projector.

Note f The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq f The light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> of the copy destination projector blink while copying the data. Confirm that the blinking of the indicators stops, and then turn on the projector.

256 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Using HDMI CEC function

Using HDMI CEC function

HDMI CEC function allows to operate the CEC-compatible device with the projector remote control and allows the power on/off link operations between the projector and CEC-compatible device.

Connecting a CEC-compatible device

Connect a CEC-compatible device to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal or Function Board.

CEC-compatible device

Blu-ray disc player (example) HDMI cable

(commercially available)

CEC-compatible device

Blu-ray disc player (example)

Repeater

Connection example with CEC-compatible device

Setting the projector and CEC-compatible device

Before using the HDMI CEC function, you need to configure the settings on the projector and the CEC-compatible device.

f CEC-compatible device: enable the HDMI CEC function.

f Projector: Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[HDMI CEC] to [ON]. ( x page 187)

Note f After switching on the CEC-compatible device, switch on the projector and select HDMI1 input, HDMI2 input or SLOT input, then check that the image from the CEC-compatible device is projected correctly.

Operating the CEC-compatible device with the projector remote control

You can operate the device using the projector remote control by calling up the operation menu of the CECcompatible device from the HDMI CEC operation screen. Use the number buttons (<2>, <4>, <6>, <8>) on the remote control to select the operation item on the HDMI CEC operation screen.

About the HDMI CEC operation screen, refer to “Operating a CEC-compatible device” ( x page 187).

( Device name )

2 MENU

4 POWER ON

6 POWER OFF

8 RETURN

1

4

5

2

3

1 Displays the device name to be operated.

2 [MENU]

Call up the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device.

3 [POWER ON]

Switch on the device.

HDMI CEC operation screen

4 [POWER OFF]

Switch off the device.

5 [RETURN]

Returns the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device to the previous screen.

Note f If the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device cannot be called up from the HDMI CEC operation screen, change the menu code

setting. For the operation details, refer to “Changing the menu code” ( x page 188).

f If you cannot operate the operation menu of a CEC-compatible device, try setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [HDMI CEC] to [OFF] and [ON] again. It may be improved.

f Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) supports the CEC function of the power on/power off link and the CEC function of input switching with the power link. It does not support the menu operation of the CEC-compatible device using the projector remote control.

ENGLISH - 257

Chapter 5   Operations — Using HDMI CEC function

Menu operation of CEC-compatible device

When the setting menu of the CEC-compatible device is displayed, you can use the ▲▼◀▶ buttons and

<ENTER> button of the remote control to operate the menu.

About the power link operations

By setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [HDMI CEC] → [PROJECTOR -> DEVICE] / [DEVICE ->

PROJECTOR] to a setting other than [DISABLE], the following operations can be achieved.

The link setting of [PROJECTOR -> DEVICE]

r

When the setting is [POWER OFF] or [POWER ON / OFF]

f When you turn off the power of the projector and put it in standby mode, all CEC-compatible devices connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal and Function Board will enter standby mode.

r

When the setting is [POWER ON / OFF]

f If you turn on the projector and start projection, the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI IN 2> terminal or Function Board will turn on.

The link setting of [DEVICE -> PROJECTOR]

r

When the setting is [POWER ON] or [POWER ON / OFF]

f While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI

IN 2> terminal or Function Board is turned on, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected. f While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected. f While the projector is turned on, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.

r

When the setting is [POWER ON / OFF]

f While the projector is turned on, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal, <HDMI

IN 2> terminal or Function Board is turned off, the projector turns off and enters standby mode.

Note f When [DEVICE -> PROJECTOR] menu is set to [POWER ON / OFF], the link operations are only available when the

CEC-compatible devices supports.

f Depending on the status of the device, it may not operate normally such as when the projector or the CEC-compatible device is starting up.

f The connected CEC-compatible device may not support the link operation described in the manual. Not all the operations of the CECcompatible device are warranted.

258 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware

Updating the firmware

The firmware of the projector can be updated via LAN or using a USB memory.

Firmware that can be uploaded can be downloaded from the following website (“Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website”). Customer can update the firmware if a newer version than the current firmware version is published.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/

It is necessary to register and log in to PASS *1 to confirm the availability of the firmware that can be updated or to download the firmware.

*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website r

How to confirm the firmware version

Current firmware version can be confirmed by pressing the <STATUS> button on the remote control and displaying the [STATUS] screen.

The firmware version can also be confirmed in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS].

1/6 STATUS

PROJECTOR TYPE

SERIAL NUMBER

PROJECTOR RUNTIME

LIGHT RUNTIME

CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME

FIRMWARE VERSION

INTAKE AIR TEMP.

OPTICS MODULE TEMP.

EXHAUST AIR TEMP.

LIGHT1 TEMP.

LIGHT2 TEMP.

SELF TEST

PT-REZ12

123456789012

10000h

10000h / 10000h

1h 23m

1.00

31°C/87°F

27°C/80°F

31°C/87°F

31°C/87°F

31°C/87°F

NO ERRORS

ENTER

E-MAIL/USB

CHANGE

MENU

EXIT

Note f A LAN cable is required to connect to the network via wired LAN.

Updating the firmware via LAN

Example of network connection

Computer

Projector

LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)

Switching hub

Attention f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.

Note f A LAN cable is required to connect to the network via wired LAN.

f Connect the LAN cable to the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard or the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional

DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot.

f Update cannot be performed using the “IPv6” protocol. Set the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to either [IPv4] or

[IPv4 & IPv6] and assign the IP address for “IPv4”.

ENGLISH - 259

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware f To connect to the network using the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.:

TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

f The <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot and the

<LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET

TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

f Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher for the LAN cable to connect to the <LAN> terminal. Either the straight or the crossover cable, or both cables can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The projector will determine the type of the cable (straight or crossover) automatically.

f Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter as the LAN cable to connect to the <LAN> terminal.

f For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria: g Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards g Shielded type (including connectors) g Straight-through g Single wire g Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.) f The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is normally 100 m (328'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method.

f Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.

Computer used for updating the firmware

Prepare a computer compatible with the following OS equipped with a LAN terminal.

f Microsoft Windows 11

Windows 11 Pro 64 bit, Windows 11 Home 64 bit f Microsoft Windows 10

Windows 10 Pro 32 bit/64 bit, Windows 10 Home 32 bit/64 bit

Note f The operation is not guaranteed when used in an environment outside the conditions described in this section, or when a home-made computer is used.

f This does not guarantee the operation on all computers even if it is used in the environment fulfilling the conditions described in this section.

f Connection with the projector or the data transfer of the firmware may fail in following cases. If it has failed, change the software setting or change the [Power Options] setting in Windows OS, and try the update again.

g When security software such as firewall or the utility software for the LAN adapter is installed g When other software has started up or operating g When the computer has gone into sleep/pause status

Acquiring the firmware

Download the firmware update tool for this projector (compressed file in zip format) from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/ f File name (example): FirmUpdateTool_REZ12_101.zip

(Update tool for PT-REZ12/PT-REZ10/PT-REZ80 with version 1.01)

Confirming the setting of the projector

Confirm the setting of the projector to be updated in advance.

f The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT] f The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS] → [WIRED LAN(IPv4)] g [DHCP] g [IP ADDRESS] g [SUBNET MASK] g [DEFAULT GATEWAY] f [User name] and [Password] of the administrator account

Confirming the computer setting

Confirm the network setting of the computer to be used for update, and make it possible to connect with the projector to be updated via network.

260 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware

Updating the firmware

1) Extract the compressed file downloaded from the website.

f The firmware update tool (executable file in exe format) is generated.

File name (example): FirmUpdateTool_REZ12_101.exe

(Update tool for PT-REZ12/PT-REZ10/PT-REZ80 with version 1.01)

2) Double-click the executable file generated by extracting.

f The update tool is started up, and the confirmation screen is displayed.

3) Confirm the status of the projector.

f Confirm that the projector to be updated is in the standby mode.

4) Confirm the connection status.

f Confirm that the projector to be updated and the computer to be used for update are correctly connected to

LAN.

5) Click [Next].

f The license agreement screen is displayed.

f Confirm the content of the license agreement.

f The update tool will end by clicking [Close].

ENGLISH - 261

6) Select [I accept].

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware

7) Click [Next].

f The connection setting screen is displayed.

8) Enter the setting details of the projector.

f Enter the details set in the projector to be updated.

Item

[IP Address]

[Command Port]

[User Name]

[Password]

Details

The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS] → [WIRED LAN(IPv4)] → [IP ADDRESS]

The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]

[User name] of the administrator account

[Password] of the administrator account

262 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware

9) Click [Next].

f The update confirmation screen is displayed.

10) Click [Start].

f Update is started.

f The light source indicator <LIGHT1> and the light source indicator <LIGHT2> on the projector blink red alternately while updating.

f Elapsed time and rough progress can be confirmed in the update status display screen. The required time is approximately 20 minutes.

11) Confirm the completion of the update.

f Once the update is completed, the completion confirmation screen is displayed.

f To continue to update the firmware of another projector, click [Yes]. The connection setting screen in Step

7) is displayed.

f To end the update tool, click [No].

12) Confirm the firmware version.

f Turn on the power of the projector and confirm the firmware version in the [STATUS] screen.

Attention f Do not turn off the main power of the projector or disconnect the LAN cable while updating.

ENGLISH - 263

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware

Note f If the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update from the beginning.

f If the power of the projector is turned off by a power outage or other reason during the update, the update is automatically restarted after the power outage is restored or right after the power of the projector is turned on again.

Updating the firmware using the USB memory

Supported device

f Commercially available USB memory is supported.

The USB memory with a security function is not supported.

f Only the cards formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 can be used.

f Only the single partition structure is supported.

Acquiring the firmware

Download the firmware data for this projector (compressed file in zip format) from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/ f File name (example) g REZ12_USER_101.zip

(Firmware data for PT-REZ12/PT-REZ10/PT-REZ80 with version 1.01)

Preparing the USB memory

Prepare the USB memory to be used for update.

1) Extract the compressed file downloaded from the website.

f The firmware data (file in rom format) is generated.

File name (example): g REZ12_USER_101.rom

(Firmware data for PT-REZ12/PT-REZ10/PT-REZ80 with version 1.01)

2) Save the firmware data generated by extracting into the USB memory.

f Save in the root directory of the formatted USB memory.

Note f Delete everything other than the firmware data to be used for update from the USB memory.

f

For the handling of the USB memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” ( x page 86).

Operating the OSD to update the firmware

1) Insert the USB memory with the firmware data saved into the <USB> terminal of the projector.

2) Turn on the power of the projector.

3) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

5) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

6) Press as to select [FIRMWARE UPDATE].

7) Press the <ENTER> button.

f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

8) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [FIRMWARE UPDATE] screen is displayed.

9) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

f Update is started.

264 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5   Operations — Updating the firmware f The projector goes into the standby mode once the update is started, and the light source indicator

<LIGHT1> and the light source indicator <LIGHT2> blink red alternately.

10) Confirm the firmware version.

f Update is completed when the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> stop blinking and turn off.

f Turn on the power of the projector and confirm the firmware version in the [STATUS] screen.

Attention f Do not disconnect the main power supply of the projector while updating.

Note f If the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update from the beginning.

f If the power of the projector is turned off by a power outage or other reason during the update, the update is automatically restarted after the power outage is restored or right after the power of the projector is turned on again.

Update in standby mode

Rewriting of the firmware can be performed by operating the buttons on the control panel even if the projector is in the standby mode.

Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] to [NORMAL] in advance. If [ECO] is set, the firmware cannot be updated in standby mode.

1) Insert the USB memory with the firmware data saved into the <USB> terminal of the projector.

2) Confirm that the projector is in the standby mode.

3) Press in order of aass on the control panel, and press the <ENTER> button.

f The projector will go into the update ready state.

f Once the projector goes into the update ready state, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will turn off, and the light source indicator <LIGHT1> and the light source indicator <LIGHT2> will light up red.

4) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

f Update is started.

f Once the update is started, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will light up red, and the light source indicator <LIGHT1> and the light source indicator <LIGHT2> will blink red alternately.

f Update is completed when the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> stop blinking and turn off.

Attention f Do not disconnect the main power supply of the projector while updating.

Note f The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].

Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq f If the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update from the beginning.

f If the power of the projector is turned off by a power outage or other reason during the update, the update is automatically restarted after the power outage is restored or right after the power of the projector is turned on again.

f If the security password is not entered for approximately 60 seconds in the update ready state, the update ready state will be canceled and the projector will go into standby mode.

ENGLISH - 265

Chapter 6 Maintenance

This chapter describes inspection methods when there are problems, and maintenance methods.

266 - ENGLISH

Chapter 6   Maintenance — Light source/temperature indicators

Light source/temperature indicators

When an indicator lights up

If a problem occurs inside the projector, the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> or temperature indicator

<TEMP> will inform you by lighting or blinking red. Check the status of the indicators and take following measures.

Attention f

When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” ( x page 79).

Note f When [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INDICATOR SETTING] → [INDICATOR MODE] is set to [OFF] / [TIMEOUT], [NOTIFICATION] is set to [DISABLE] and the indicator-off function is enabled, the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> or temperature indicator

<TEMP> will not lit or blink even if any abnormality has occurred on the projector.

Temperature indicator <TEMP>

Light source indicator <LIGHT2>

Light source indicator <LIGHT1>

Light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2>

Indicator status

Blinking red

(1 time)

Blinking red

(2 times)

Blinking red

(3 times)

Status

The light source on one side is turned off since the projection lens cannot be detected.

f Some of the elements of the light source are defective and the light output has decreased.

f The light source does not light up, or the light source turns off while the projector is in use.

Solution f

Turn off the power and mount the projection lens again. ( x page 51)

f

Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> ( x page 79), and turn on the

power again.

f

Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> ( x page 79), and turn on the

power again.

Note f If the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> are still lit or blinking after taking the measures, set the <MAIN POWER> switch to

<OFF>, and ask your dealer for repairs.

f The light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> will light up green if the projector is in projection mode and there is no indication of problem by lighting or blinking red.

ENGLISH - 267

Chapter 6   Maintenance — Light source/temperature indicators

Temperature indicator <TEMP>

Indicator status

Lighting red

Blinking red

(2 times)

Blinking red

(3 times) f f Internal temperature is high

(warning).

f Internal temperature is high (standby status).

f

Status

Warm-up status

The cooling fan has stopped.

Solution f Wait five minutes when the power is turned on while the temperature is low

(approximately 0 °C (32 °F)).

f Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature *1 .

f Remove any objects if they are blocking the intake/exhaust vents.

f Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature *1 .

f Do not install the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') or higher above sea level. (Altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level is the maximum height that the performance of this projector is guaranteed.) f

Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> ( x page 79), and consult

your dealer.

*1

For the operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating environment” ( x page 291).

Note f If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.

268 - ENGLISH

Chapter 6   Maintenance — Maintenance

Maintenance

Before maintenance

f Make sure to turn off the power before performing the maintenance of the projector.

f

When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”

( x page 79).

Maintenance

Outer case

Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.

f If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with a dry cloth.

f Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may deteriorate the outer case.

f When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.

Lens front surface

Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.

f Do not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.

f Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.

Attention f The lens may become damaged by hitting with a hard object or by wiping the front surface of the lens with excessive force. Handle with care.

Note f

Dust may accumulate around the intake vent depending on the environment and operating condition when used in an environment with excessive dust. This may adversely affect the ventilation, cooling, and heat dissipation inside the projector, thus causing reduced brightness.

ENGLISH - 269

Chapter 6   Maintenance — Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.

Menu screen does not appear.

Buttons on the control panel do not operate.

Image from HDMI compatible device does not appear or is disrupted.

Lens shift cannot be adjusted.

Problems

Power does not turn on.

No image appears.

Image is fuzzy.

Color is pale or grayish.

Remote control does not respond.

Image does not display correctly.

Image from a computer does not appear.

Image output from

DisplayPort of the computer does not appear.

Points to be checked f Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet?

f Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>?

f Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?

f Have the circuit breakers tripped?

f Are the light source indicators <LIGHT1> / <LIGHT2> or the temperature indicator

<TEMP> lighting or blinking?

f Are connections to external devices correctly performed?

f Is the image input selected correctly?

f Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum?

f Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?

f Is the shutter function in use?

f Is the lens cover still attached to the lens?

f Is the lens focus set correctly?

f Is the projection distance appropriate?

f Is the lens dirty?

f Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?

f Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly?

f Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly?

f Are the batteries depleted?

f Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly?

f Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver of the projector?

f Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range?

f Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection?

f Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to

[DISABLE]?

f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control?

f Is the ID number setting operation correct?

f Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)?

f Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to

[DISABLE]?

f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control?

f Is the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] selection set correctly?

f Is there a problem with the external device to output images?

f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?

f Are the settings for [HDMI IN], [DisplayPort IN], and [SLOT IN] made correctly?

f Is the cable too long?

f Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” or “Fn” + “F10” simultaneously. Since the method varies depending on the computer type, refer to the user manual provided with your computer.) f Is the HDMI cable connected securely?

f Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on.

f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?

f If connecting the projector to a computer that uses an early-type chipset or graphics card compatible with DisplayPort, the projector or computer may not be operated properly.

f The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated to the latest version.

f Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on.

f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?

f Perform [LENS CALIBRATION].

59

294

59

294

156

34

34

34

199

98

40

44

30

59

80

97

87

70

82

Page

79

267

288

89

87

199

288

105 ,

134

294

270 - ENGLISH

Chapter 6   Maintenance — Troubleshooting

Operation noise became loud.

Problems

Cannot control the projector with Art-Net.

The DIGITAL LINK input image is not displayed.

Cannot switch to the input of the Function Board.

Points to be checked f Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?

f Is [Art-Net SETUP] set to other than [OFF]?

f Are [NET], [SUB NET], [UNIVERSE], and [START ADDRESS] set correctly?

f Is the cable compatible to the condition of the projector used?

f Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector or an external device correctly done?

f Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO], [DIGITAL LINK], or [LONG REACH]? Is it set to [ETHERNET]?

f Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input?

f Is the Function Board correctly installed in the slot?

If the temperature inside the projector becomes high, the speed of the internal cooling fan increases automatically and the operation noise becomes loud. If the internal temperature reaches the abnormal value, the indicators will light up or blink.

f Is the ambient temperature high?

f Are the intake/exhaust vents blocked?

Attention f If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.

Page

213

213

63

202

54

268

25, 291

26

ENGLISH - 271

Chapter 6   Maintenance — Self-diagnosis display

Self-diagnosis display

When an error or a warning occurs, a symbol for that is displayed in [SELF TEST] of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS].

The following list shows the alphanumeric symbol that is displayed when an error or a warning has occurred and

its details. Confirm “Action number”

, and follow the measure in

“Measure for error and warning” ( x page 272).

The input supply voltage is displayed only with the numeric value.

Error/warning alphanumeric symbol

U081

U084

U200

U201

U202 - U256

U280

U300

U301

U302 - U356

U380

U510, U511

F015

F016

F018

F061, F062

F085, F086

Low AC voltage warning (below 90 V)

USB power supply error

Intake air temperature warning

Exhaust air temperature warning

Other high temperature warnings

Low temperature warning

Intake air temperature error

Exhaust air temperature error

Other high temperature errors

Low temperature error

Function Board power supply error

Luminance sensor error

Angle sensor error

Air pressure sensor error

Light source driver communication error

Color wheel error

Error/warning alphanumeric symbol content

F096

F098

F110, F111

F200 - F207

F250 - F253

F300 - F307

F350 - F353

Lens mounter error

Lens EEPROM error

Phosphor wheel error

Fan warning

Liquid cooling pump warning

Fan error

Liquid cooling pump error

F400, F401, F450, F451,

F500, F501

Light source error

F511 - F515, F517, F518 Circuit board power supply error

H001 Battery replacement for the internal clock

H011 - H016, H029 Temperature sensor error

Action number

6

6

6

6

8

6

2

1

3

1

2

1

4

6

3

1

6

6

6

6

7

6

6

6

6

5

6

Note f The displayed error/warning symbol may differ from the actual defect.

f For errors and warnings that are not described in the table, consult your dealer.

r

Measure for error and warning

Action number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Measure

The operating environment temperature is too high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature *1 .

The operating environment temperature is too high, or the exhaust vent may be blocked. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature *1 . Or remove any objects that are blocking the exhaust vent.

The operating environment temperature is too low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature *1 .

The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector.

Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.

If the display does not clear after switching the main power off and on, consult your dealer.

The projection lens information cannot be acquired. If the display does not clear after switching the power off and on, consult your dealer.

There is an error in the Function Board power supply. Replace the Function Board.

*1

For the operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating environment” ( x page 291).

272 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7 Appendix

This chapter describes specifications and after-sales service for the projector.

ENGLISH - 273

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Technical information

1

2

2

Using PJLink function

The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1 and class 2, and setting of the projector or querying of the projector status can be performed from the computer using the PJLink protocol.

Note f

To use the PJLink function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. ( x page 209)

PJLink commands

The following table lists the PJLink commands supported by the projector.

f x characters in tables are non-specific characters.

1

1

1, 2

1

1

1

1, 2

1

1

1

1

Class Command

POWR

POWR ?

INPT

INPT ?

AVMT

AVMT ?

ERST ?

LAMP ?

Control details

Power supply control

Power supply status query

Input selection

Input selection query

Shutter control

Shutter status query

Error status query

Light source status query

1

2

31

32

33

34

35

30

31

1

0

0

Parameter/response string xxxxxx

AAAA X BBBB Y

Remark

Standby

Power on

Standby

Power on

Preparing for switching off the projector

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

SDI *1 /SDI OPT1 *2 /DIGITAL LINK *3 /PressIT *4 /SLOT *5

SDI OPT2 *2

Shutter function disabled (shutter: opened)

Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed)

1st byte

Indicates fan errors, and returns 0 - 2.

f 0 = No error is detected f 1 = Warning f 2 = Error

2nd byte

3rd byte

Indicates light source errors, and returns 0 or 2.

Indicates temperature errors, and returns 0 - 2.

Returns 0.

4th byte

5th byte

6th byte

Returns 0.

Indicates other errors, and returns 0 - 2.

AAAA: Light source 1 runtime

X: 0 = Light source 1 off, 1 = Light source 1 on

BBBB: Light source 2 runtime

Y: 0 = Light source 2 off, 1 = Light source 2 on

INST ?

Input selection list query

31 32 33 34 35

NAME ?

Projector name query xxxxx

Returns the name set in the [NETWORK] menu

[PROJECTOR NAME].

INF1 ?

Manufacturer name query

Panasonic

INF2 ?

Model name query

PT-REZ12

PT-REZ10

PT-REZ80

INF0 ?

CLSS ?

Other information queries

Class information query xxxxx

2

SNUM ?

Serial number query xxxxxxxxx

SVER ?

Software version query xxxxxxxxx

Returns manufacturer name.

Returns model name.

Returns information such as version number.

Returns class for PJLink.

Returns serial number.

Returns firmware version information.

274 - ENGLISH

2

Class Command

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Control details

Parameter/response string

31 / HDMI1

32 / HDMI2

33 / DISPLAYPORT

34 / SDI[SLOT]

Remark

Input name of the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.:

TY-SB01QS) installed in <SLOT>

INNM ?

Input terminal name query 34 / DIGITAL

LINK[SLOT]

34 / PressIT[SLOT]

34 / SLOT

Input name of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model

No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in <SLOT>

Input name of the optional Wireless Presentation System

Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) installed in <SLOT>

Input name of the Function Board by other manufacturers installed in <SLOT>

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

IRES ?

RRES ?

FREZ

FREZ ?

POWR

ERST

LKUP

INPT

Input signal resolution query

Recommended resolution query

Freeze control

Freeze status query

Cooling notification

Warmup notification

Error notification

Link up notification

Input switch completion notification

AAAAxBBBB

1920x1200

0

1

0

1 xxxxxx xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

31

32

33

34

35

Projector search

AAAA: Horizontal resolution

BBBB: Vertical resolution

Returns display resolution.

Freeze clear

Freeze (stop)

Notifies when the power is turned off.

Notifies when the power is turned on.

Notifies when an error occurs.

Notifies the MAC address when the PJLink communication becomes possible.

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

SDI *1 /SDI OPT1 *2 /DIGITAL LINK *3 /PressIT *4 /SLOT *5

SDI OPT2 *2

2 SRCH

*1 When the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>

*2 When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>

*3 When the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>

*4 When the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in <SLOT>

*5 When the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in <SLOT>

PJLink security authentication

A PJLink password for security authentication procedure is required for communication of the PJLink command.

The PJLink password can be set in the [NETWORK] menu → [PJLink] →

[PJLink PASSWORD] ( x page 211), or

in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” ( x page 250) of the web control screen.

When communicating the PJLink command without authentication procedure, set the PJLink password as blank.

The factory default setting of the PJLink password is blank.

f For specifications related to PJLink, visit the following website of Japan Business Machine and Information

System Industries Association.

https://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/

ENGLISH - 275

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Using Art-Net function

Since the network function of the projector supports the Art-Net function, you can control the projector settings with the DMX controller and application software using the Art-Net protocol.

Note f

To use the Art-Net function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. ( x page 209)

f The Art-Net function cannot be used using the “IPv6” protocol. Set the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to either [IPv4] or [IPv4 & IPv6] and assign the IP address for “IPv4”.

Channel definition

The following table lists the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function.

Channel settings can be switched using the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] →

[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]

( x page 213).

The control details assigned to each channel are listed in the following table.

f Channel assignment for [USER] is in factory default setting. Assignment can be changed.

Channel

CHANNEL1

CHANNEL2

CHANNEL3

CHANNEL4

CHANNEL5

CHANNEL6

CHANNEL7

CHANNEL8

CHANNEL9

CHANNEL10

CHANNEL11

CHANNEL12

[1]

SHUTTER

INPUT SELECT

LENS FUNCTION SELECT

LENS CONTROL

POWER

LIGHT OUTPUT

ENABLE/DISABLE

FADE-IN

FADE-OUT

CUSTOM MASKING

GEOMETRY

NONE

Control details

[2]

LIGHT OUTPUT

INPUT SELECT

LENS POSITION

LENS H SHIFT

LENS V SHIFT

LENS FOCUS

LENS ZOOM

POWER

GEOMETRY

CUSTOM MASKING

ENABLE/DISABLE

NONE

[USER]

LIGHT OUTPUT

INPUT SELECT

LENS POSITION

LENS H SHIFT

LENS V SHIFT

LENS FOCUS

LENS ZOOM

POWER

GEOMETRY

CUSTOM MASKING

ENABLE/DISABLE

NONE

Content that can be controlled by each Art-Net channel setting l : Can be controlled

Control details

LIGHT OUTPUT

INPUT SELECT

LENS FUNCTION SELECT

LENS CONTROL

LENS POSITION

LENS H SHIFT

LENS V SHIFT

LENS FOCUS

PERIPHERY FOCUS

LENS ZOOM

POWER

SHUTTER

FADE-IN

FADE-OUT

GEOMETRY

CUSTOM MASKING

FREEZE

COLOR

TINT

RASTER PATTERN

ENABLE/DISABLE l l

― l

[1] l l l l l l l

― l

Art-Net channel setting

[2] l l

― l l l l

― l l

― l l

― l

276 - ENGLISH l l l l l l l l

[USER] l l

― l l l l l l l l l

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Control details r

LIGHT OUTPUT

This can be set in 256 steps between 100 % and 0 %.

Performance

100 %

0 %

0

255

Parameter r

INPUT SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])

Performance Parameter

No operation

HDMI1

No operation

0-39

40-47

48-255

Default value

0

Default value

0 r

INPUT SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to anything other than [1])

Performance Parameter Default value

No operation

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

No operation

SLOT-1 *1

SLOT-2 *2

No operation

0-31

32-39

40-47

48-55

56-79

80-87

88-95

96-255

0

*1 Switches the input to SDI, SDI OPT1, DIGITAL LINK, PressIT, or SLOT.

SDI: When the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>

SDI OPT1: When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>

DIGITAL LINK: When the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>

PressIT: When the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in <SLOT>

SLOT: When the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in <SLOT>

*2 Switches the input to SDI OPT2 when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>.

r

LENS FUNCTION SELECT

Operate together with LENS CONTROL.

No operation

LENS H SHIFT

LENS V SHIFT

LENS FOCUS

LENS ZOOM

Move to the home position

Load LENS MEMORY 1

Load LENS MEMORY 2

Load LENS MEMORY 3

No operation

Performance

0-15

16-31

32-47

48-63

64-79

80-95

96-111

112-127

128-143

144-255

Parameter Default value

0 r

LENS CONTROL

Operate together with LENS FUNCTION SELECT.

ENGLISH - 277

Lens adjustment

Operation stop

Lens adjustment

Execute command action

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Performance

() High speed

() Low speed

() Fine adjustment

(+) Fine adjustment

(+) Low speed

(+) High speed

0-31

32-63

64-95

96-127

128-159

160-191

192-223

224-255

Parameter r

LENS POSITION

No operation

Move to the home position

Load LENS MEMORY 1

Load LENS MEMORY 2

Load LENS MEMORY 3

Load LENS MEMORY 4

Load LENS MEMORY 5

Load LENS MEMORY 6

Load LENS MEMORY 7

Load LENS MEMORY 8

Load LENS MEMORY 9

Load LENS MEMORY 10

No operation

Performance

0-31

32-63

64-79

80-95

96-111

112-127

128-143

144-159

160-175

176-191

192-207

208-223

224-255

Parameter

Default value

100

Default value

0 r

LENS H SHIFT, LENS V SHIFT, LENS FOCUS, PERIPHERY FOCUS, LENS ZOOM

Lens adjustment

Operation stop

Lens adjustment

Performance

() High speed

() Low speed

() Fine adjustment

(+) Fine adjustment

(+) Low speed

(+) High speed

0-31

32-63

64-95

96-159

160-191

192-223

224-255

Parameter Default value

128 r

POWER

Standby

No operation

Power on r

SHUTTER

Performance

0-63

64-191

192-255

Parameter Default value

128

SHUTTER: Opened

No operation

SHUTTER: Closed

Performance

0-63

64-191

192-255

Parameter Default value

128

278 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information r

FADE-IN, FADE-OUT

Operate together with SHUTTER.

Performance

OFF

0.5s

1.0s

1.5s

2.0s

2.5s

3.0s

3.5s

4.0s

5.0s

7.0s

10.0s

No operation

0-15

16-31

32-47

48-63

64-79

80-95

96-111

112-127

128-143

144-159

160-175

176-191

192-255

Parameter r

GEOMETRY

OFF

KEYSTONE

CURVED CORRECTION

PC-1

PC-2

PC-3

CORNER CORRECTION

No operation

Performance r

CUSTOM MASKING

Performance

OFF

PC-1

PC-2

PC-3

No operation

0-15

16-31

32-47

48-63

64-79

80-95

96-111

112-255

Parameter

0-31

32-63

64-95

96-127

128-255

Parameter r

FREEZE

No operation

OFF

No operation

ON

No operation r

COLOR, TINT

Performance

0-31

32-95

96-159

160-223

224-255

Parameter

No operation

Factory default setting

31

0

+31

No operation

Performance

0-31

32-63

64

128-129

191

192-255

Parameter

Default value

255

Default value

255

Default value

255

Default value

128

Default value

0

ENGLISH - 279

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information r

RASTER PATTERN

Performance

No operation

OFF

WHITE

YELLOW

CYAN

GREEN

MAGENTA

RED

BLUE

BLACK

USER LOGO

No operation

0-15

16-31

32-47

48-63

64-79

80-95

96-111

112-127

128-143

144-159

160-175

176-255

Parameter Default value

0 r

ENABLE/DISABLE

Operation for all channels is not accepted when set to “Disable”.

Performance

Disable

Enable

0-127

128-255

Parameter Default value

0

Note f If the projector is operated using the remote control or the control panel, or by the control command while controlling the projector using the

Art-Net function, the setting of the DMX controller or computer application may be different from the projector status. To reflect the controls

of all channels to the projector, set “ENABLE/DISABLE” of channel 11 to “Disable” and then back to “Enable”.

f To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.

https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Control commands via LAN

The projector can be controlled via the <LAN> terminal equipped on the projector as standard or the <DIGITAL

LINK IN/LAN> terminal of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in the slot by using the control command format via the <SERIAL IN> terminal.

For examples of the available commands, refer to “Control command” ( x page 287).

Note f

To send/receive the command via LAN, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. ( x page 209)

When connecting in protect mode

Connecting

Following is the connection method when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND

PROTECT] is set to [ENABLE].

1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a connection to the projector.

f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.

IP address

Port number

Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].

Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].

2) Check the response from the projector.

280 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Command example

Data length

Data section

“NTCONTROL”

(ASCII string)

9 bytes

Blank

‘ ’

0x20

1 byte

Mode

‘1’

0x31

1 byte

Blank

‘ ’

0x20

1 byte

Random number section

“zzzzzzzz”

(ASCII code hex number)

8 bytes f Mode: 1 = Protect mode f Example: Response during protect mode (random number section is undefined value)

“NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR)

3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.

f “xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz” xxxxxx yyyyy zzzzzzzz

The user name for the administrator account

The password for the administrator account

8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.

r

Transmitted data

Command example

Data length

Hash value

“Connecting” ( x page 280)

32 bytes

Header

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte f Example: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command (hash value is calculated from the user name and password of the administrator account, and acquired random number)

“dbdd2dabd3d4d68c5dd970ec0c29fa6400QPW” (CR) r

Received data

Header

Command example

Data length

‘0’

0x30

1 byte f Example: The projector is powered on

“00001” (CR) r

Error response

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Termination symbol

Message

Data length

String

“ERR1”

“ERR2”

“ERR3”

“ERR4”

“ERR5”

“ERRA”

4 bytes

Undefined control command

Out of parameter range

Busy state or no-acceptable period

Timeout or no-acceptable period

Wrong data length

Password mismatch

Details

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Note f The projector will automatically disconnect the connection with the network right after sending the command. This is the specification based on the security view point to prevent unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party. To send commands continuously,

execute the network connection request every time the command is to be sent. For details, refer to “Communication flow between server and client” ( x page 283).

ENGLISH - 281

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

When connecting in non-protect mode

Connecting

Following is the connection method when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND

PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE].

1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a connection to the projector.

f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.

IP address

Port number

Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].

Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].

2) Check the response from the projector.

Command example

Data length

Data section

“NTCONTROL”

(ASCII string)

9 bytes f Mode: 0 = Non-protect mode f Example: Response during non-protect mode

“NTCONTROL 0” (CR)

Blank

‘ ’

0x20

1 byte

Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.

r

Transmitted data

Mode

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Header

Command example

Data length

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

‘0’

0x30

1 byte f Example: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command

“00QPW” (CR) r

Received data

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Header

Command example

Data length

‘0’

0x30

1 byte f Example: The projector is in standby status

“00000” (CR) r

Error response

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Termination symbol

Message

Data length

String

“ERR1”

“ERR2”

“ERR3”

“ERR4”

“ERR5”

4 bytes

Undefined control command

Out of parameter range

Busy state or no-acceptable period

Timeout or no-acceptable period

Wrong data length

Details

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

282 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Note f The projector will automatically disconnect the connection with the network right after sending the command. This is the specification based on the security view point to prevent unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party. To send commands continuously,

execute the network connection request every time the command is to be sent. For details, refer to “Communication flow between server and client” ( x page 283).

Communication flow between server and client

To send/receive a command via LAN, refer to the communication flow indicated below.

Server : Projector

Client : Control device such as a computer

Client Server

Session 1

Connection request

Sending of key

Sending of command 1

Responding to command 1

Disconnection

Session 2

Connection request

Sending of key

Sending of command 2

Responding to command 2

Disconnection

ENGLISH - 283

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

<SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminal

The <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminal of the projector conforms with RS-232C so that the projector can be connected to and controlled from a computer.

Connection

Single projector

Projector connecting terminals

D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male) Computer

D-Sub 9p (male)

Communication cable (straight)

Multiple projectors

Connecting terminals on projector 1

D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)

Connecting terminals on projector 2

D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)

Computer

D-Sub 9p (male) D-Sub 9p (female)

Communication cable Communication cable

When connecting using DIGITAL LINK compatible device

Projector connecting terminals *1 DIGITAL LINK compatible device

DIGITAL LINK DIGITAL LINK D-Sub 9p (female)

D-Sub 9p (male)

Computer

D-Sub 9p (male)

LAN cable (straight) Communication cable (straight)

*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot

Note f

The destination of [RS-232C] ( x page 179) must be set according to the connection method.

f To control the projector with standby mode when connecting utilizing the DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] to [NORMAL].

When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the projector cannot be control during standby.

f When using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function with <SERIAL IN> / <SERIAL OUT> terminal, refer to

“Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function” ( x page 65) for details.

Pin assignments and signal names

D-Sub 9-pin (female)

Outside view

(6)

(1)

(9)

(5)

Pin No.

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name

TXD

RXD

GND

CTS

RTS

Details

NC

Transmitted data

Received data

NC

Earth

NC

Connected internally

NC

284 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

D-Sub 9-pin (male)

Outside view

(9)

(5)

(6)

(1)

Pin No.

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Signal name

RXD

TXD

GND

RTS

CTS

Details

NC

Received data

Transmitted data

NC

Earth

NC

Connected internally

NC

Note f

A cable with pin (4) connected to each other such as full wired straight cable is required as the cable when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function. Pin.(4) is used for data communication of contrast synchronization function/ shutter synchronization.

Communication conditions (Factory default)

Signal level

Sync. method

Baud rate

Parity

Character length

Stop bit

X parameter

S parameter

RS-232C-compliant

Asynchronous

9 600 bps

None

8 bits

1 bit

None

None

Basic format

Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this order. Add parameters according to the details of control.

ID designate

ZZ, 01 to 64 and 0A to 0Z

(2 bytes)

Colon (1 byte)

3 command characters (3 bytes)

Semi-colon (1 byte)

2 ID characters (2 bytes)

End (1 byte)

Parameter (undefined length)

Start (1 byte)

ENGLISH - 285

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Basic format (has subcommands)

Same as the basic format

Sub command (5 bytes) Parameter (6 bytes) *1

Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5 bytes)

Operation (1 byte) *1

“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)

*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.

Attention f If a command is sent after the light source starts lighting, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.

f When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.

Note f If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.

f If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.

f ID transmission in RS-232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.

f If a command is sent with an ID designated, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.

g It matches the projector ID g ID is designated as ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON] g ID is designated as GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON] f STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.

When multiple projectors are controlled

When multiple projectors are all controlled

When controlling multiple projectors together via RS-232C, perform the following settings.

1) Set a different ID for each projector.

2) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.

3) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).

When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit

When controlling multiple projectors by group unit via RS-232C, perform the following settings.

1) Set a different ID for each projector.

2) Set the same setting for [GROUP] in each group.

3) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector.

4) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 3).

Note f Response is not made correctly if [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON] in two or more projectors.

f When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.

Response is not made correctly if [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON] in two or more projectors of the same group.

286 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information

Cable specification

When connected to a computer

Projector

(<SERIAL IN> terminal)

1 NC NC 1

2 2

3 3

4 NC NC 4

5 5

6 NC NC 6

7 7

8 8

9 NC NC 9

Computer

(DTE specifications)

When multiple projectors are connected

Projector 1

(<SERIAL OUT> terminal)

1 NC NC 1

2 2

3 3

4 NC NC 4

5 5

6 NC NC 6

7 7

8 8

9 NC NC 9

Projector 2

(<SERIAL IN> terminal)

Note f A cable with pin (4) connected to each other such as full wired straight cable is required as the cable when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function.

Control command

The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.

r

Projector control command

Command

PON

POF

QPW

Details

Power on

Power standby

Power query

Parameter/response string

Remark (parameter)

To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.

IIS

OSH

QSH

VSE

QSE

Switching the input signal

Shutter control

Shutter status query

Aspect ratio switch

Aspect ratio settings query

000

001

HD1

HD2

DP1

DM1,SD1 *1

DM1,OP1 *2

DM1,OP2 *2

DM1,DL1 *3

DM1,WP1 *4

2

5

6

9

10

0

1

DM1,TP1 *5

0

1

STANDBY

Power on

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

SDI

SDI OPT1

SDI OPT2

DIGITAL LINK

PressIT

SLOT

Opened

Closed

DEFAULT

4:3

16:9

THROUGH

HV FIT

H FIT

V FIT

OCS

QSB

Sub memory switch

Sub memory status query

01 - 96 Sub memory number

*1 When the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in <SLOT>

*2 When the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in <SLOT>

*3 When the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in <SLOT>

*4 When the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in <SLOT>

*5 When the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in <SLOT>

ENGLISH - 287

Chapter 7   Appendix — Technical information r

Lens control command

Command

VXX

VXX

VXX

VXX

VXX

Sub command

LNSI2

LNSI3

LNSI4

LNSIG

LNSI5

Details

Lens H shift

Lens V shift

Lens focus

Lens periphery focus

Lens zoom

Remark

+00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1 , +00100

= Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2 , +00200 = Coarse adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment -

<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

It is possible to control the projector remotely (by contact control) from a control board located away from the projector where remote control signals cannot reach.

Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control board.

Remote control Contact control

Remote control/contact control

Standby

Light source

Lit

HDMI1 HDMI2

DisplayPort SLOT

Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc.

Pin assignments and signal names

Remote control board in another location

Outside view

(6)

(1)

(9)

(5)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Signal name

GND

POWER

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

None

None

SHUTTER

ENABLE / DISABLE

Open (H)

OFF

Other

Other

Other

OFF

Controlled by remote control

Short (L)

GND

ON

HDMI1

HDMI2

DisplayPort

ON

Controlled by external contact

Attention f

When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).

f

When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for

RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.

g

<POWER ON> button, <STANDBY> button, <SHUTTER> button f

When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.

g

<POWER ON> button, <STANDBY> button, <HDMI1> button, <HDMI2> button, <HDMI 1/2> button, <SLOT> button,

<INPUT MENU> button, <SHUTTER> button

Note f

To change the settings of pins (2) to (8), set [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER]. ( x page 181)

288 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Specifications

The specifications of the projector are as follows.

Display system 1-chip DLP projection system

Display device

Projection lens

Light source

Screen size

Light output

Contrast ratio *1*2

Center to corner zone ratio *1

Displayable scanning frequency

*1*2

Size of effective display area

Number of pixels

Supplied projection lens

Zoom

Focus

Lens shift

Changeable lens

Horizontal

Vertical

20.3 mm (0.8") x 1 (aspect ratio 16:10)

2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ10,

PT-REZ80

PT-REZ12L, PT-REZ10L,

PT-REZ80L

Powered

Powered

Powered (Horizontal/Vertical)

Yes

27 kHz to 148.1 kHz

24 Hz to 120.0 Hz

Standard zoom lens f Zoom magnification: 1.54 x f Focal length: 23.9 mm to 37.2 mm f F number: 1.84 to 2.31

Optional

Laser diode

1.78 m (70") to 17.78 m (700")

2.54 m (100") to 25.40 m (1000") with ET-C1U100

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ12L

12 000 lm

(when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL])

9 600 lm

(when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [ECO] or [QUIET])

PT-REZ10, PT-REZ10L

PT-REZ80, PT-REZ80L

25 000:1

90 %

10 000 lm

(when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL])

8 000 lm

(when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [ECO] or [QUIET])

8 000 lm

(when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL])

6 400 lm

(when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [ECO] or [QUIET]) when [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3]

*1 Measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation all comply with ISO/IEC 21118:2020 international standards.

*2 This is the value when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-C1S600) is used. The value varies depending on the lens.

ENGLISH - 289

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Input compatibility

Connecting terminal/slot

HDMI signal input

Video signal resolution:

480/60p, 576/50p to 4 096 x 2 160/60p

Computer signal resolution:

640 x 480 to 3 840 x 2 400 (non-interlace)

Dot clock frequency:

25 MHz to 594 MHz

DisplayPort signal input

DIGITAL LINK signal input *3

Video signal resolution:

720/50p to 4 096 x 2 160/60p

Computer signal resolution:

640 x 480 to 3 840 x 2 400 (non-interlace)

Dot clock frequency:

25 MHz to 594 MHz

SDI signal input *1 HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, 12G-SDI signal

SDI OPT signal input *2 HD-SDI signal, 3G-SDI signal, 12G-SDI signal

Video signal resolution:

480/60p, 576/50p to 4 096 x 2 160/60p

Computer signal resolution:

640 x 480 to 3 840 x 2 400 (non-interlace)

Dot clock frequency:

25 MHz to 297 MHz

<HDMI IN 1> terminal

<HDMI IN 2> terminal

<DisplayPort IN> terminal

<MULTI SYNC IN> terminal

<MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal

HDMI x 2, HDCP 2.3 compatible, Deep Color compatible

DisplayPort x 1, HDCP 2.3 compatible, Deep Color compatible

BNC x 1, TTL high impedance

BNC x 1, TTL output: Maximum 10 mA

<SERIAL IN> terminal D-Sub 9 p x 1, RS-232C compliant, for computer control

<SERIAL OUT> terminal D-Sub 9 p x 1, RS-232C compliant, for computer control

<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal

<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal

<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

M3 stereo mini jack x 1, for remote control (wired)/for projector connection control

M3 stereo mini jack x 1, for remote control (wired)/for projector connection control

D-Sub 9 p x 1, for contact control

<LAN> terminal

RJ-45 x 1, for network connection, PJLink (class 2) compatible, 10Base-T/100Base-TX,

Art-Net compatible

<USB> terminal

USB connector (type A) x 1, for connecting the optional Wireless Module (Model No.:

AJ-WM50 Series), for connecting USB memory

<DC OUT> terminal

<SLOT>

USB connector (type A) x 1, for power supply only (DC 5 V, maximum 2 A)

SLOT x 1, Intel ® Smart Display Module specification, for installing the Function Board

*1 This is supported when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in the slot.

*2 This is supported when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot.

*3 This is supported when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

290 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Acoustic noise *1

Width

Height

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ12L

PT-REZ10, PT-REZ10L

38 dB (when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL] or [ECO])

35 dB (when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET])

36 dB (when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL] or [ECO])

33 dB (when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET])

PT-REZ80, PT-REZ80L

35 dB (when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL] or [ECO])

32 dB (when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET])

Operating environment

Operation position

Power requirements

Operating temperature 0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F) *2*3*4

Operating humidity 10 % to 80 % (no condensation)

[FLOOR/CEILING], [FRONT/REAR]

100 V - 240 V ~ (100 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz

Rated current

Maximum power consumption

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ12L

PT-REZ10, PT-REZ10L

PT-REZ80, PT-REZ80L

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ12L

PT-REZ10, PT-REZ10L

PT-REZ80, PT-REZ80L

10.4 A - 4.3 A

8.8 A - 3.7 A

7.7 A - 3.2 A

995 W

840 W

730 W

Standby mode power consumption

Approx. 12 W

When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL] f [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled f no Function Board attatched f <DC OUT> terminal is not in use

Approx. 0.5 W when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]

498 mm (19-5/8") (excluding protrusions)

212 mm (8-3/8") (with the feet at shortest position)

Standard outside dimensions

Weight *5

Outer case

Power cord length

Depth

Materials

Color

196 mm (7-23/32") (excluding the feet and protrusions)

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ10,

PT-REZ80

PT-REZ12L, PT-REZ10L,

PT-REZ80L

PT-REZ12, PT-REZ10,

PT-REZ80

PT-REZ12L, PT-REZ10L,

PT-REZ80L

Molded plastic

648 mm (25-1/2") (excluding protrusions, including standard zoom lens)

538 mm (21-3/16") (excluding protrusions)

Approx. 28.7 k lens)

Approx. 27.0 k

]

]

(63.3 lbs.) (including standard zoom

(59.5 lbs.) (excluding the optional lens)

Black model

White model

3.0 m (118-1/8")

Black

White

*1 Measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation all comply with ISO/IEC 21118:2020 international standards.

*2 The operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) if the projector is used at an altitude between 1 400 m

(4 593') and 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level. Note that altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level is the maximum height that the performance of this projector is guaranteed.

*3 The operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.:

AJ-WM50 Series) is attached.

*4 When the operating environment temperature exceeds the following value, the light output may be reduced to protect the projector.

f When using the projector at an altitude lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level: 35 °C (95 °F) f When using the projector at an altitude between 1 400 m (4 593') and 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level: 30 °C (86 °F) f When using the projector at an altitude between 2 700 m (8 858') and 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level: 25 °C (77 °F)

*5 Average value. Weight varies for each product.

ENGLISH - 291

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Laser

Classification

Wireless LAN *1

Remote control

Laser Class Class 1 (IEC/EN 60825-1:2014)

Risk Group ET-C1T700

Compliance standards IEEE802.11b/g/n

Risk group 3 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)

Transmission method DSSS, OFDM

Frequency range

(Channel)

2 412 MHz to 2 462 MHz (1 to 11ch)

IEEE802.11n

Maximum 144 Mbps

Data transfer speed

(Standard value)

IEEE802.11g

IEEE802.11b

WPA2-PSK (AES)

Maximum 54 Mbps

Maximum 11 Mbps

Encryption method

Power requirements

Operating range

Weight

Outside dimensions

DC 3 V (AAA/R03/LR03 battery x 2)

Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)

102 ] (3.6 ozs.) (including batteries)

Width: 48 mm (1-7/8"), Height: 145 mm (5-23/32"), Depth: 27 mm (1-1/16")

*1 To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series).

Note f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

292 - ENGLISH

Dimensions

Unit: mm(inch)

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

249(9-13/16")

452(17-13/16")

498(19-5/8")

* The above dimensions are obtained when the standard zoom lens is attached.

460(18-1/8")

ENGLISH - 293

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

List of compatible signals

The following table specifies the image signals that the projector can project.

For details of SDI signal, refer to “List of single link SDI compatible signals” ( x

page 298), “List of quad link SDI compatible signals” ( x page 301).

This projector supports the signal with l in the compatible signal column.

f The content of the signal type column is as follows.

g V: Video signal g C: Computer signal

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

480/60p

576/50p

720/60p

720/50p

720/120p

1080/60i

1080/50i

1080/24p

1080/24sF

1080/25p

1080/30p

1080/60p

1080/50p

1080/120p

2K/24p

2K/25p

2K/30p

2K/48p

2K/60p

2K/50p

2560 x 1080/60p

2560 x 1080/50p

3840 x 2160/24p

3840 x 2160/25p

3840 x 2160/30p

3840 x 2160/60p

3840 x 2160/50p

4096 x 2160/24p

4096 x 2160/25p

4096 x 2160/30p

4096 x 2160/60p

4096 x 2160/50p

Resolution

(Dots)

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 560 x 1 080

2 560 x 1 080

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

720 x 480

720 x 576

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

148.5

148.5

198.0

185.6

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

297.0

594.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

297.0

594.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

297.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

27.0

27.0

74.3

74.3

148.5

74.3

74.3

67.5

56.3

66.0

56.3

54.0

56.3

67.5

135.0

135.0

112.5

112.5

54.0

56.3

67.5

135.0

135.0

112.5

112.5

27.0

27.0

28.1

33.8

67.5

56.3

135.0

27.0

28.1

33.8

54.0

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

31.5

Vertical

(Hz)

59.9

31.3

45.0

50.0

60.0

*2

37.5

90.0

33.8

28.1

50.0

120.0

60.0

*2

*2

50.0

24.0

*2

48.0

*2

25.0

30.0

*2

60.0

*2

50.0

120.0

*2

24.0

*2

25.0

30.0

*2

48.0

*2

60.0

*2

50.0

60.0

*2

50.0

24.0

*2

25.0

30.0

*2

60.0

*2

60.0

*2

50.0

50.0

24.0

*2

25.0

30.0

*2

60.0

*2

60.0

*2

50.0

50.0 l l l l l l *3 l l *3 l l l l l *3 l l *3 l l l l l l l

HDMI l l l

Compatible signal

DisplayPort

DIGITAL

LINK *1

― l

― l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

― l

― l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

― l

― l l l l

― l

― l l l l l l l l *3

― l *3

― l *3

― l *3

― l l

294 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Signal type

C

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

640 x 480/60

1024 x 768/50

1024 x 768/60

1280 x 800/50

1280 x 800/60

1280 x 1024/50

1280 x 1024/60

1366 x 768/50

1366 x 768/60

1400 x 1050/50

1400 x 1050/60

1440 x 900/50

1440 x 900/60

1600 x 900/50

1600 x 900/60

1600 x 1200/50

1600 x 1200/60

1680 x 1050/50

1680 x 1050/60

1920 x 1200/50

1920 x 1200/60RB

2560 x 1440/50

2560 x 1440/60

2560 x 1600/50

2560 x 1600/60

3440 x 1440/50

3440 x 1440/60

3840 x 2400/30

3840 x 2400/50

3840 x 2400/60

Resolution

(Dots)

1 600 x 1 200

1 680 x 1 050

1 680 x 1 050

1 920 x 1 200

1 920 x 1 200 *4

2 560 x 1 440

2 560 x 1 440 *4

2 560 x 1 600

2 560 x 1 600 *4

3 440 x 1 440 *4

3 440 x 1 440 *4

3 840 x 2 400 *4

3 840 x 2 400 *4

3 840 x 2 400 *4

640 x 480

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 366 x 768

1 366 x 768

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 440 x 900

1 440 x 900

1 600 x 900

1 600 x 900

1 600 x 1 200

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz)

75.0

54.1

65.3

61.8

74.0

74.1

88.8

82.4

98.7

73.7

88.9

73.0

122.9

148.1

39.6

47.7

54.1

65.2

46.3

55.9

46.4

55.9

61.8

31.5

39.6

48.4

41.3

49.7

52.4

64.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

49.9

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

30.0

50.0

60.0

49.9

59.8

50.0

60.0

49.9

59.9

49.9

60.0

49.9

59.9

50.0

60.0

50.0

59.8

50.0

60.0

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

162.0

119.5

146.3

158.3

154.0

256.3

241.5

286.0

268.5

259.4

312.8

286.2

481.6

592.5

69.0

85.5

99.9

122.6

86.8

106.5

96.5

119.0

131.5

25.2

51.9

65.0

68.0

83.5

88.0

108.0

*1 This is supported when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

*2 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.

*3 YP

B

P

R

4:2:0 format only

*4 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant

Note f A signal with a different resolution, including DisplayPort signal and SDI signal, is displayed converted to the number of display dots. The number of display dots is 1 920 x 1 200.

f The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.

f When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.

HDMI

Compatible signal

DisplayPort

DIGITAL

LINK *1 l l l l l l l

― l l l l l l l

― l l

― l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

― l

― l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

ENGLISH - 295

Signal name

(SIGNAL

FORMAT)

480/60p

576/50p

720/60p

720/50p

720/120p

1080/60i

1080/50i

1080/24p

1080/24sF

1080/25p

1080/30p

1080/60p

1080/50p

1080/120p

2K/24p

2K/25p

2K/30p

2K/48p

2K/60p

2K/50p

2560 x 1080/60p

2560 x 1080/50p

3840 x 2160/24p

3840 x 2160/25p

3840 x 2160/30p

3840 x 2160/60p

3840 x 2160/50p

4096 x 2160/24p

4096 x 2160/25p

4096 x 2160/30p

4096 x 2160/60p

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

3 840 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

4 096 x 2 160

640 x 480

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 366 x 768

1 366 x 768

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 440 x 900

720 x 480

720 x 576

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

2 560 x 1 080

2 560 x 1 080

3 840 x 2 160

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

List of plug and play compatible signals

The following table specifies the image signals compatible with plug and play.

Signal with l in the plug and play compatible signal column is the signal described in the EDID (extended display identification data) of the projector. For the signal without l in the plug and play compatible signal column, the resolution may not be selected on the computer even if the projector is supporting it.

4096 x 2160/50p

640 x 480/60

1024 x 768/50

1024 x 768/60

1280 x 800/50

1280 x 800/60

1280 x 1024/50

1280 x 1024/60

1366 x 768/50

1366 x 768/60

1400 x 1050/50

1400 x 1050/60

1440 x 900/50

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

56.3 25.0

67.5 30.0

*4

135.0 60.0

*4

135.0 60.0

*4

112.5 50.0

112.5 50.0

54.0 24.0

*4

56.3 25.0

67.5 30.0

*4

135.0 60.0

*4

135.0 60.0

*4

112.5 50.0

112.5 50.0

31.5 59.9

39.6 50.0

48.4 60.0

41.3 50.0

49.7 59.8

52.4 50.0

64.0 60.0

39.6 49.9

47.7 59.8

54.1 50.0

65.2 60.0

46.3 49.9

31.5 59.9

31.3 50.0

45.0 60.0

*4

27.0

27.0

74.3

37.5 50.0 74.3

90.0 120.0

*4 148.5

33.8 60.0

*4 74.3

28.1 50.0 74.3

27.0 24.0

*4

27.0 48.0

*4

28.1 25.0

33.8 30.0

*4

67.5 60.0

*4

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

56.3 50.0 148.5

135.0 120.0

*4 297.0

27.0 24.0

*4

28.1 25.0

33.8 30.0

*4

54.0 48.0

*4

67.5 60.0

*4

56.3 50.0

66.0 60.0

*4

56.3 50.0

54.0 24.0

*4

185.6

297.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

148.5

198.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

297.0

594.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

297.0

594.0

25.2

51.9

65.0

68.0

83.5

88.0

108.0

69.0

85.5

99.9

122.6

86.8

Plug and play compatible signal

HDMI DisplayPort DIGITAL LINK *1

4K/60p *2 4K/30p 2K 4K/60p *2 4K/30p 2K 4K/60p 4K/30p *3 2K l l l l l l

― l l l l l l l l

― l l l

― l l l l l

― l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

― l

― l

*5

*5

*5

*5 l l

― l l l

― l l l l l

― l l l l l

― l l l

― l

― l

― l

― l l

― l l l

― l l l l

― l

― l

― l

― l l

― l

― l l l l l

― l l l l l

― l

― l l l l

― l

― l l

― l

― l

― l l

― l

― l l l l l

― l l l l l

― l l l

― l

― l

― l

― l l

― l

― l l l l

― l

― l

― l

― l l

― l l l

― l l l l l

― l l l l l l l l

*5

― l *5

― l l l l

― l

*5

*5

― l

― l l

― l l l

― l l l l l l

― l

― l l l l l

― l l l

― l

― l l

― l l

― l l l l l

― l

― l

― l

296 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Signal name

(SIGNAL

FORMAT)

1440 x 900/60

1600 x 900/50

1600 x 900/60

1600 x 1200/50

1600 x 1200/60

1680 x 1050/50

1680 x 1050/60

1920 x 1200/50

1920 x

1200/60RB

2560 x 1440/50

2560 x 1440/60

2560 x 1600/50

2560 x 1600/60

3440 x 1440/50

3440 x 1440/60

3840 x 2400/30

3840 x 2400/50

3840 x 2400/60

Resolution

(Dots)

1 440 x 900

1 600 x 900

1 600 x 900

1 600 x 1 200

1 600 x 1 200

1 680 x 1 050

1 680 x 1 050

1 920 x 1 200

1 920 x 1 200 *6

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

55.9

46.4

55.9

61.8 49.9

75.0 60.0

54.1 50.0

65.3 60.0

61.8

59.9

49.9

60.0

49.9

74.0 60.0

2 560 x 1 440

2 560 x 1 440 *6

2 560 x 1 600

2 560 x 1 600 *6

74.1 50.0

88.8 60.0

82.4 50.0

98.7 60.0

3 440 x 1 440 *6

3 440 x 1 440 *6

73.7 50.0

88.9 60.0

3 840 x 2 400 *6 73.0 30.0

3 840 x 2 400 *6 122.9 50.0

3 840 x 2 400 *6 148.1 60.0

106.5

96.5

119.0

131.5

162.0

119.5

146.3

158.3

154.0

256.3

241.5

286.0

268.5

259.4

312.8

286.2

481.6

592.5

Plug and play compatible signal

HDMI DisplayPort DIGITAL LINK *1

4K/60p *2 4K/30p 2K 4K/60p *2 4K/30p 2K 4K/60p 4K/30p *3 2K

― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―

― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l

― l

― l

― l

― l l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l l

― l

― l

― l

*1 This is supported when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

*2 4K/60p indicates 4K/60p/HDR and 4K/60p/SDR.

*3 4K/30p indicates 4K/30p/HDR and 4K/30p/SDR.

*4 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.

*5 YP

B

P

R

4:2:0 format only

*6 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

― l

ENGLISH - 297

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

List of single link SDI compatible signals

The following table specifies the single link SDI signals that the projector can project.

This is supported when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) or the optional Function

Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot.

f The content of the 4K division column is as follows.

g IL: Interleave (transmission format of 2-Sample Interleave Division) f The content of the signal type column is as follows.

g V: Video signal

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

720/60p *1

720/50p *1

1080/60i

1080/50i

1080/24p

1080/24sF *1

1080/25p

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

45.0 60.0

*2 74.3

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0

1 920 x 1 080i 33.8

60.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 33.8

60.0

*2

74.3

74.3

74.3

1 920 x 1 080i 33.8

60.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 33.8

60.0

*2

74.3

74.3

1 920 x 1 080i 33.8

60.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 28.1

1 920 x 1 080i 28.1

50.0

50.0

1 920 x 1 080i 28.1

1 920 x 1 080i 28.1

50.0

50.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

1 920 x 1 080i 28.1

50.0

1 920 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 27.0

48.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 27.0

48.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 27.0

48.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 27.0

48.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080i 27.0

48.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 28.1

1 920 x 1 080 28.1

25.0

25.0

1 920 x 1 080 28.1

1 920 x 1 080 28.1

1 920 x 1 080 28.1

25.0

25.0

25.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

4K division

Format

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

Color format

RGB

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

HD-SDI

HD-SDI

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

Sampling

298 - ENGLISH

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

1080/30p

1080/60p

1080/50p

2K/24p

2K/48p *1

2K/25p

2K/30p

2K/60p

2K/50p

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

1 920 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

74.3

74.3

1 920 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

74.3

74.3

1 920 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 67.5

60.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 67.5

60.0

*2

1 920 x 1 080 56.3

1 920 x 1 080 56.3

50.0

50.0

74.3

148.5

148.5

148.5

148.5

2 048 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 27.0

24.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 54.0

48.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 54.0

48.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 28.1

2 048 x 1 080 28.1

25.0

25.0

2 048 x 1 080 28.1

2 048 x 1 080 28.1

25.0

25.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

2 048 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 33.8

30.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 67.5

60.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 67.5

60.0

*2

2 048 x 1 080 56.3

2 048 x 1 080 56.3

50.0

50.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

148.5

148.5

4K division

Format

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

Color format

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

Sampling

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

ENGLISH - 299

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Signal type

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

3 840 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 56.3

3 840 x 2 160 56.3

25.0

25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3

3 840 x 2 160 56.3

25.0

25.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3

25.0

3 840 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 135.0

60.0

*2

3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

4 096 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

594.0

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 54.0

24.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 56.3

4 096 x 2 160 56.3

25.0

25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3

4 096 x 2 160 56.3

4 096 x 2 160 56.3

25.0

25.0

25.0

4 096 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 67.5

30.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 135.0

60.0

*2

4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

4K division

Format

Color format

V

3840 x 2160/24p

3840 x 2160/25p

3840 x 2160/30p

3840 x 2160/60p

3840 x 2160/50p

4096 x 2160/24p

4096 x 2160/25p

4096 x 2160/30p

4096 x 2160/60p

4096 x 2160/50p

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

*1 This is supported when the optional Function Board for 12G-SDI Optical (Model No.: TY-SB01FB) is installed in the slot.

*2 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

12G-SDI Type 1

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

594.0

Sampling

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

300 - ENGLISH

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

List of quad link SDI compatible signals

The following table specifies the quad link SDI signals that the projector can project.

This is supported when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in the slot.

f The content of the 4K division column is as follows.

g SQ: Square (transmission format of Square Division) g IL: Interleave (transmission format of 2-Sample Interleave Division) f The content of the signal type column is as follows.

g V: Video signal

3840 x 2160/24p

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1 297.0

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4K division

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

Format

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

Color format

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

Sampling

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

ENGLISH - 301

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

3840 x 2160/25p

3840 x 2160/30p

3840 x 2160/60p

3840 x 2160/50p

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1

3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

3 840 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

594.0

594.0

594.0

594.0

594.0

594.0

594.0

594.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4K division

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

Format

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

Color format

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

Sampling

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

302 - ENGLISH

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

4096 x 2160/24p

4096 x 2160/25p

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 54.0 24.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

4 096 x 2 160 56.3 25.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4K division

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

Format

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

Color format

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

Sampling

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

ENGLISH - 303

Chapter 7   Appendix — Specifications

Signal type

V

Signal name

(SIGNAL FORMAT)

4096 x 2160/30p

4096 x 2160/60p

4096 x 2160/50p

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq. Dot clock

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz) freq.

(MHz)

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

297.0

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1 297.0

4 096 x 2 160 67.5 30.0

*1 297.0

4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1 594.0

4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1 594.0

4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1 594.0

4 096 x 2 160 135.0 60.0

*1 594.0

4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

594.0

594.0

4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

4 096 x 2 160 112.5 50.0

594.0

594.0

4K division

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

IL

SQ

*1 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.

Format

HD-SDI

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-A

3G-SDI Level-B

3G-SDI Level-B

Color format

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

RGB

R

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

RGB

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

YP

B

P

R

Sampling

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:2:2 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 10bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:4:4 12bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

4:2:2 10bit

304 - ENGLISH

Chapter 7   Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket

Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket

f When installing the projector to the ceiling, be sure to use the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:

ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis

Adjustment), ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)) specified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. The Ceiling

Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD130H

(for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)) is used in combination with the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:

ET-PKD130B (Projector Mount Bracket)).

f Attach the drop-prevention set (flat washer and wire rope) that comes with the Ceiling Mount Bracket to the projector. If you need the drop-prevention set (Service Model No.: TTRA0214) separately, consult your dealer.

f Ask a qualified technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.

f Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of the

Ceiling Mount Bracket not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or the inappropriate choice of location for installing the Ceiling Mount Bracket, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.

f Immediately remove the product that is not in use anymore by asking a qualified technician.

f Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten the screws to their specified tightening torques. Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.

(Screw tightening torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m) f Read the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for details.

f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

r

Specification for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)

Unit: mm(inch)

M6

12 (15/32")

ENGLISH - 305

Chapter 7   Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket r

Dimensions for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)

Unit: mm(inch)

274(10-13/16")

64(2-9/16")

64(2-9/16")

280(11")

396(15-9/16")

306 - ENGLISH

Index

Index

A

35, 68

[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]

94, 116

H

<HDMI 1/2> button

Accessories

Adjusting adjustable feet

[HDMI IN]

[ADVANCED MENU]

Application software

<HDMI2> button

29, 276

[ASPECT]

187

126

<HDMI1> button

33, 80

213

Art-Net

108

33, 80

151

35

[PROJECTOR ID]

[PROJECTOR NAME]

94, 151

Protecting the registered signal

I

Q

R

B

C

D

E

F

G

145, 172

[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]

162

30

305

<ID ALL> button

33, 89

<ID SET> button

[BLANKING]

[BRIGHTNESS]

33, 89

Read this first!

Initial setting

<INPUT MENU> button

Cautions when installing

Cautions when transporting

<CEC> button

[COLOR]

[COLOR CORRECTION]

[COLOR MATCHING]

[COLOR SPACE]

M

N

O

P

173

36, 81

33, 81

42

S

T

U

121

6

Registering new signals

<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal

<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal

[INITIALIZE]

33

181

51

Renaming the registered signal

92

[RS-232C]

Connecting the remote control to the projector

105

68

with a cable

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 200

[LENS]

<LENS> button

[COLOR TEMPERATURE]

[LENS MEMORY]

Connecting with wireless LAN

Connection

[CONTRAST]

267

List of compatible signals

187

[SAVE LOG]

[SCHEDULE]

[LENS HOME POSITION]

199

150

36, 82

152

Security

[LENS TYPE]

[LIGHT OUTPUT]

Light source indicator

294

186

171

95, 198

Selecting the input signal

[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

198

80

Self-diagnosis display

<SERIAL IN> terminal

[DATA CLONING]

<DEFAULT> button

202

33, 88

<MENU> button

[NETWORK SECURITY]

[NFC SETTING]

Disposal

[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]

169, 172

169

[SLOT SETTING]

[NO SIGNAL SETTING]

[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

102

145

[STATUS]

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

68

Power indicator

147

132

106

36

[STARTUP LOGO]

<STATUS> button

Remote control

Switching on the projector

Switching the input signal

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

[PJLink]

[FUNCTION BUTTON]

210

206

207

211

93, 108

<SERIAL OUT> terminal

[SERVICE PASSWORD]

Setting ID number of the remote control

Projector body

Remote control

[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE]

Deleting the registered signal

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

[DIGITAL LINK]

DIGITAL LINK

Dimensions

Display language

<DISPLAYPORT> button

[SIGNAL LIST]

Network connection

[NETWORK CONTROL]

Projector body

Remote control

[DisplayPort IN]

Remote control

[SLOT IN]

Specifications

[EDGE BLENDING]

<ENTER> button

36

Remote control

202

196

<ON SCREEN> button

Projector body

Expanding signal lock-in range

36

Remote control

[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

<FOCUS> button

253

174

33, 92

94, 123

102

259

191

92

35, 70

269

93

145

176

91

170, 173

143

158

<SHIFT> button

Power cord

42

108

33, 82

36, 87

[SHUTTER SETTING]

36, 81

sRGB-compliant video

<STANDBY> button

284

37

289

Projector body

[NOISE REDUCTION]

[STANDBY MODE]

[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

Storing

Optional accessories

Remote control

121

[FREEZE]

Function Board

88

<FUNCTION> button

Remote control

181

100

168

On-screen menu

[OPERATION SETTING]

32

93, 97

Switching off the projector

181

33, 89

30

79

[POWER MANAGEMENT]

[GEOMETRY]

116

<POWER ON> button

36

24

<TEST PATTERN> button

102

105

Remote control

[TINT]

Remote control

Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount

[GRADATION SMOOTHER]

69

33

Precautions for use

80

267

95, 192

Troubleshooting

Projecting

98

270

ENGLISH - 307

Index

W

149

Web control

100

[WIRED LAN]

205

Z

[ZOOM]

<ZOOM> button

308 - ENGLISH

EU Declaration of Conformity for RE Directive

English

Български

Declaration of Conformity

This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive

2014/53/EU.

Декларация за съответствие

Това устройство отговаря на съществените изисквания и останалите приложими разпоредби на Директива

2014/53/EC.

Dansk

Deutsch

Eesti

Ελληνικά

Español

Français

Hrvatski

Italiano

Overensstemmelseserklæring

Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU.

Konformitätserklärung

Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der

Richtlinie 2014/53/EU.

Vastavusdeklaratsioon

See seade vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL olulistele nõuetele ja teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Δήλωση συμμόρφωσης

Αυτός ο εξοπλισμός είναι σε συμμόρφωση με τις ουσιώδεις απαιτήσεις και άλλες σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας

2014/53/EE.

Declaración de conformidad

Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 2014/53/UE.

Déclaration de Conformité

Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive

2014/53/UE.

Deklaracija o sukladnosti

Ovaj proizvod odgovara bitnim zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim uredbama Direktive 2014/53/EU.

Dichiarazione di conformità

Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 2014/53/UE.

Magyar

Nederlands

Norsk

Polski

Português

Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat

Ez a készülék teljesíti az alapvető követelményeket és más 2014/53/EU irányelvben meghatározott vonatkozó rendelkezéseket.

Verklaring van conformiteit

Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn

2014/53/EU.

Samsvarserklæring

Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 2014/53/EU.

Deklaracja zgodności

Urządzenie jest zgodne z ogólnymi wymaganiami oraz szczególnymi warunkami określonymi Dyrektyvą UE:

2014/53/UE.

Declaração de Conformidade

Este equipamento está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões relevantes da

Directiva 2014/53/UE.

Suomi

Svenska

Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus

Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 2014/53/EU olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräysten mukainen.

Försäkran om överensstämmelse

Denna utrustning ăr i overensstămmelse med de văsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestammelser i Direktiv

2014/53/EU.

ENGLISH - 309

Indication of the manufacturer and the importer with EU Directive requirements

English

Български

Čeština

Српски

Dansk

Deutsch

Eesti

Ελληνικά

Manufactured by: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importer: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Germany

Authorized Representative in EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Производител: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Япония

Вносител: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Германия

Упълномощен представител в ЕС: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Германия

Vyrobil: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonsko

Dovozce: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Německo

Oprávněný zástupce v EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburk, Německo

Произведен од: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Јапан

Увозник: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Немачка

Овлашћени представник у ЕУ: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Немачка

Fremstillet af: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importør: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Tyskland

Autoriseret repræsentant i EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland

Hergestellt von: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importeur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Deutschland

Vertretungsberechtigter in der EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Deutschland

Tootja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Jaapan

Maaletooja: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Saksamaa

Volitatud esindaja ELis: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Saksamaa

Κατασκευάστηκε από: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Ιαπωνία

Εισαγωγέας: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Γερμανία

Εξουσιοδοτημένος αντιπρόσωπος στην ΕΕ: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Γερμανία

310 - ENGLISH

Español

Français

Hrvatski

íslenskur

Italiano

Latviešu

Lietuvių

Magyar

Nederlands

Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japón

Importador: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Alemania

Representante Autorizado para la UE: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgo, Alemania

Fabriqué par : Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japon

Importateur : Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Allemagne

Représentant autorisé dans l’UE : Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hambourg, Allemagne

Proizvodi: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Uvoznik: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Njemačka

Ovlašteni zastupnik u EU-u: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Njemačka

Framleitt af: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Innflytjandi: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Þýskalandi

Viðurkenndur fulltrúi í ESB: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Þýskalandi

Fabbricato da: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Giappone

Importatore: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Germania

Rappresentante autorizzato nell’UE: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Amburgo, Germania

Ražotājs: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japāna

Importētājs: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Vācija

Oficiālais pārstāvis ES: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Vācija

Gamintojas: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonija

Importuotojas: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Vokietija

Įgaliotasis atstovas ES: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgas, Vokietija

Gyártotta: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japán

Importőr: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Németország

Hivatalos képviselő az EU-ban: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Németország

Geproduceerd door: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importeur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Duitsland

Bevoegde vertegenwoordiger in de EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Duitsland

ENGLISH - 311

Norsk

Polski

Português

Română

Slovenčina

Slovenščina

Suomi

Svenska

Türkçe

Produsert av: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importør: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Tyskland

Autorisert representant i EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland

Wyprodukowano przez: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonia

Importer: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Niemcy

Upoważniony przedstawiciel w UE: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Niemcy

Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japão

Importador: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Alemanha

Representante Autorizado na UE: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgo, Alemanha

Fabricat de: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonia

Importator: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Germania

Reprezentant autorizat în UE: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germania

Výrobca: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonsko

Dovozca: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Nemecko

Autorizovaný zástupca v EÚ: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Nemecko

Proizvaja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonska

Uvoznik: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden,Nemčija

Pooblaščeni zastopnik v EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Nemčija

Valmistaja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japani

Maahantuoja: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Saksa

Valtuutettu edustaja EU:ssa: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hampuri, Saksa

Tillverkad av: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importör: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Tyskland

Auktoriserad representant i EU: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland

Tarafından Üretilmiştir: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonya

İthalatçı: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Almanya

AB Yetkili Temsilcisi: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Almanya

312 - ENGLISH

Manufactured by:

Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Importer:

Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Strasse 43, 65203 Wiesbaden, Germany

Authorized Representative in EU:

Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Importer for UK:

Panasonic Connect UK, a branch of Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH,

Maxis 2, Western Road, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1RT

Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

Web Site : https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

© Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. 2023

Panasonic Connect North America

Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102

TEL: (877) 803 - 8492

Panasonic Canada Inc.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3

TEL: (905) 624 - 5010

W0723JZ1103 -PT

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents